JP2023165930A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a "non-ready-to-win (long)" performance mode is selected and "five seconds" are selected as extension time for a "slump state" in a slump performance table 222f, the total performance time becomes "20 seconds" and "20000" is set to a value of a slump performance timer 223g. As a "slump performance" corresponding to the value of the slump performance timer 223g, a first "fake pseudo continuation 1" performance is set to a "first performance", and a second "false pseudo continuation 2" is set to a "second performance".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols, etc. is performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a predetermined In some cases, the dynamic display related to the ball entering the ball is suspended up to a certain number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the interest of the game, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a jackpot appears, the symbols are changed again in the dynamic display and the dynamic display is executed again. There is a method that performs a pseudo effect (so-called "pseudo-connection" effect) that makes it appear as if a specific display result will appear, and then performs an effect that determines whether or not a specific display result will appear (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-134027

However, in conventional gaming machines, if a predetermined performance lottery is not won, even special performances such as the above-mentioned "pseudo-ren" performance are not performed, and the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, making it impossible to create surprises in the content of the performance. There wasn't. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes: a firing means for firing a game ball; a first ball entrance means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter; a second ball entry means into which the fired game ball can enter and which is different from the first ball entry means; and an acquisition means which is capable of acquiring lottery information by at least the ball entering the first ball entry means; A determination means capable of making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and a selection for selecting an effect pattern for dynamic display of identification information performed on the first display means based on a determination result by the determination means. and dynamic display execution means capable of executing the dynamic display on the first display means based on the performance pattern selected by the selection means, and the display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine is capable of awarding a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, and the lottery information is obtained by the obtaining means up to a predetermined number. a second display means capable of displaying first performance number information corresponding to the number of said lottery information stored in said storage means; and a ball entered into said second ball entry means; a second performance number information display means capable of displaying second performance number information different from the first performance number information in the second display means; Either all of the identification information that has changed with the start of the dynamic display stops, and the specific identification information appears, or unlike the specific identification information, the predetermined gaming value cannot be assigned and appears. A performance for determining whether non-specific identification information whose form may change later appears can be executed a number of times corresponding to the total number of the first performance number information and the second performance number information, and the gaming machine includes an execution time selection means capable of selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means; and after the execution time selected by the execution time selection means has elapsed. and a post-lapse change means capable of changing the visual appearance of the area in which the non-specific identification information is displayed in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means, The means is capable of executing a first aspect of changing the aspect of the non-specific identification information displayed on the first display means, and a second aspect that is different from the first aspect on the first display means. The gaming machine is configured such that: a first changing means capable of changing a display mode of the first performance number information to at least two or more display modes; and second changing means that can change in response to the ball entering the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the game machine includes: a firing means for firing a game ball; a first ball entering means into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter; and a game ball fired by the firing means. a second ball entering means which is different from the first ball entering means, an acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information by at least the ball entering the first ball entrance means, and acquisition by the acquisition means. a determining means capable of making a determination based on the lottery information that has been selected; a selecting means that selects a production pattern for dynamic display of identification information performed on the first display means based on a determination result by the determining means; Dynamic display execution means capable of executing the dynamic display in the first display means based on the performance pattern selected by the means, and in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine capable of awarding a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears, and a memory capable of storing the lottery information obtained by the obtaining means up to a predetermined number. a second display means capable of displaying first performance number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means; a second performance number information display means capable of displaying second performance number information different from the first performance number information, and the dynamic display execution means starts the dynamic display on the first display means. Either all of the identification information that has been changed due to this stops, and the specific identification information appears, or unlike the specific identification information, it cannot give the predetermined gaming value and the mode changes after it appears. The gaming machine is capable of executing a performance for determining whether or not possible non-specific identification information appears a number of times corresponding to the total number of the first performance number information and the second performance number information; execution time selection means capable of selecting the execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means; and after the execution time selected by the execution time selection means has elapsed, a post-lapse changing means capable of changing the visual recognition mode of the area in which the non-specific identification information is displayed in a situation where the information is not stored; A first aspect of changing the aspect of the non-specific identification information appearing on one display means, and a second aspect different from the first aspect on the first display means, The machine includes a first changing means capable of changing the display mode of the first performance number information to at least two or more types of display modes, and a first changing means capable of changing the display mode of the first performance number information to the second ball entering means. and a second changing means that can change in response to the ball entering the ball. This has the effect of suitably increasing the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a typical sectional view in front view of an alternate distribution unit and a reservation device. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternate distribution unit and the holding device taken along line AA in FIG. In b), when the holding device solenoid is activated from the state of (a), the holding state of the ball held in the holding device is released, and the ball flows down from the board return port to the dummy winning port. It is a figure showing a state, and (c) shows a state in which the tip of the holding device opening/closing plate is tilted toward the passage side of the sorting ball entry opening from the state of (b) so that balls can be received into the holding device. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the balls that have flowed into the sorting ball entry opening from the state of (c) are guided into the holding device by the holding device opening/closing body. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a held ball storage area, and a held ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reservation number table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern tables, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern tables, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern tables. , is a diagram schematically showing an example of a C table of a stop pattern table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a D table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an E table of the stop pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for loss. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing an example of the performance time of each performance element of the variable performance or "slump performance" executed in each game situation. A timing chart showing the relationship between variable time and extension time and "slump performance", in which (a) shows the "slump performance" when losing, and (b) shows the "slump performance" when reaching. This shows a "slump effect." FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device and the display control device. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a pending change table. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pending display information storage area. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a slump effect storage area. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a slump effect table. (a) calculates the fluctuation time of the fluctuating performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when a fluctuating performance with a "non-reach (long)" performance mode is acquired based on the starting prize in the "slump state". (b) is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when the variable performance of various reach is acquired based on the starting prize in the "slump state". This is a timing chart shown in FIG. (a) shows the variable time and ``slump effect'' of a variable effect when a variable effect with a ``non-reach (long)'' effect mode is obtained based on a starting prize during a ``slump effect'' other than the extended time. (b) is a timing chart showing the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance when various reach fluctuating performances are acquired based on the starting prize during the "slump performance" other than the extended time. It is a timing chart showing the production time of the "slump production" and the production time of the "slump production". (a) shows the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance and the "slump performance" when the fluctuating performance with the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is acquired based on the starting prize during the "slump performance" based on the extended time. (b) is a timing chart showing the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance when various reach fluctuating performances are obtained based on the starting prize during the "slump performance" based on the extension time. It is a timing chart showing the production time of the "slump production" and the production time of the "slump production". FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pending information storage area and an execution information storage area. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the reservation device control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing dummy winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 12 is a flowchart showing a hold display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a final setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the fluctuation effect processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. (a) is a diagram showing a state where the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device, and a state where the chance eye development symbol is about to appear. Yes, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the fake chance pattern has stopped in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" in "gase pseudo series 1" from the state of (a), and (c) is ) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved symbols have shifted from the state of It is a diagram showing a state in which the false chance symbols are stopped in the production element of "Pseudo fluctuation" in "Pseudo series 2", and (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the suspended symbols are shifted from the state of (d) and "Gase pseudo series 3" is shown. ” is a diagram showing a state in which the performance element of “high-speed fluctuation” is executed, and (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the performance element of “high-speed fluctuation” that is It is a diagram showing a state in which the eye pattern has stopped and a series of "slump effects" have been completed. (a) is a state in which the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is being executed in the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" on the third symbol display device, It is a diagram showing the state just before the chance eye development pattern appears, and (b) shows the state where the first chance eye pattern appears in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of (a). (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the production element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which all symbols change again from the state of (b) is being executed, and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is being executed. , (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the "pseudo fluctuation" production element is executed from the state (c), and (e) is a diagram showing the state in which the second chance symbol appears again from the state (d). It is a diagram showing a state in which the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which the symbols fluctuate is being executed, and (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the reach-forming symbol changes from the state of (e) in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation". It is a diagram showing a state that is about to appear. (a) is a diagram showing a state where the "first development possibility effect" is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the "second development possibility effect" is being executed from the state of (a). It is a diagram showing a state in which the "Development Possibility Effect" is being executed, and (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the "Third Development Possibility Effect" is being executed from the state in (b). (a) shows a state where the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element is being executed in the "slump performance" on the third symbol display device, and a state where the chance development symbol is about to appear. (b) is a diagram showing whether or not the chance pattern stops in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram showing the state of (b). It is a diagram showing a state in which a false chance eye pattern appears in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state of (c), and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" ends from the state of (c), It is a diagram showing a state in which it is suggested that the fluctuating effect ends due to the appearance of a false chance pattern, and (e) is a state in which the "third development possibility effect" is being executed from the state of (d). (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the "third development success/failure effect" has been successfully developed and a chance pattern has appeared from the state (e). (a) shows a state where the "pseudo fluctuation" effect element is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device, and the chance eye development symbol is stopped in the main display area. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance pattern appears in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state (a), and (c) is a diagram showing the state where the chance pattern appears again from the state (b). It is a diagram showing a state in which the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" is being executed after all the symbols have changed, and a state where the reach forming pattern is about to appear, and (d) is the same as in (c). It is a diagram showing a state where the reach forming pattern appears from the state, the sub display area and the cockpit display area are erased, and the reach forming pattern is enlarged. It is a diagram showing a state where the production element of "Which one is reach" is being executed, and (f) is a diagram showing a state where the "jackpot symbol" has appeared from the state of (e).

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes (ball entrances) 63, 65a, 77a, 78a, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Note that details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the performance in the preview display that is executed during the variable display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the third symbol is referred to as "variable performance"). Also used as

In addition, the variable performance is a performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a (see FIGS. 3 and 4), which will be described later, and the pattern (third pattern described later) is changed for a predetermined period of time. After that, the result of the lottery to be held for the winning prize (whether it is a jackpot or not) is presented to the player based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, the stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. There are three stages: "Stage" and "Island Stage." Various performances such as the above-mentioned fluctuating performance and the "reach display" performed during the fluctuating performance are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "reach display" refers to the display one step before the "jackpot display" that indicates that a jackpot will occur in a variable production executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" can be roughly divided into one unit of element that makes up the production of "normal reach" (hereinafter, one unit of element that makes up the production is referred to as "production element"); The performance element of "Super Reach" is developed and executed from the production element of the "Normal Reach", and has a higher jackpot expectation than the production element of the "Normal Reach", and the production element of "Normal Reach" is also developed and executed, The performance element of "Special Reach", which has higher jackpot expectations than the production element of "Super Reach", and the "Which one is it?" "Reach" production elements are prepared.

Changes to the stage may be made during a period when no variable effects are being performed (i.e., while a demo is being displayed), or during a “high-speed variation” effect in which the third symbol changes rapidly in a variable effect that is invisible to the player. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the display is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage" → "sky stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → . . . Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the "Normal Reach" performance element is started in the variable performance performed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, the "Normal Reach" performance element can be changed to the "Super Reach" performance element or When developing into a “Special Reach” performance element, a selection screen for a “Super Reach” performance element or a “Special Reach” performance element is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the “Normal Reach” performance element. It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, multiple candidates are displayed that can be selected as the "Super Reach" performance element or the "Special Reach" performance element, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the "Super Reach" performance element or the "Special Reach" performance element is determined based on the performance candidate that was selected when developing the "Super Reach" performance element or the "Special Reach" performance element. According to the determination, the performance element of "Super Reach" and the performance element of "Special Reach" are executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player can press the frame button 22 in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, It may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward, and leftward. Based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the production element of "Super Reach" or the production element of "Special Reach" may be determined.

Furthermore, although the frame button 22 is configured to be placed on the front side of the upper plate 17 in a side view, the frame button 22 may be placed in any position as long as it can be pressed down by the player. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or in the vicinity (on the upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50, which will be described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or during a predetermined "ready-to-reach display", and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 each having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when there is a jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LED lights up or blinks, causing each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 to lights up or flashes to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are in the "reach display" that is one step before hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 is made of acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") which is chromium plated in order to create a more dazzling appearance. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, there is provided an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player in order to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51 is a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operating handle 51, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball while the button is pressed, and a rotation operation amount of the operating handle 51 based on changes in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes a Micro-Processing Unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and a port for various lottery operations. A random number generator used for this purpose, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the specific configuration of the game board 13, as well as the detailed configurations of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the reservation device 73 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. First, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding the ball, and a ball that is won. A general winning hole 63 from which you can get a predetermined prize ball, a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a jackpot for the third symbol occurs, a left special symbol prize winning hole 77a and a right special prize hole that trigger the lottery for the third symbol. An alternate distribution unit 71 having a figure winning hole 78a and a holding device 73 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) to be described later, a second ball entry hole 67 that triggers the lottery of the second symbol, a third symbol display device 81, and It is constructed by assembling a variable display device unit 80 having a second symbol display device 83 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning hole 63, the variable winning device 65, the alternate distribution unit 71, the second ball entrance hole 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 It is fixed from the front side with wood screws, etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 3.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arcuate member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a winning opening etc. is provided, and a space where the fired balls are placed). (area flowing downstream).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 3) to prevent balls that have been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. (Hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front will be referred to as "hitting to the right.") , the act of causing the fired ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as "hitting to the left"). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball is configured to enter the alternate distribution unit 71, but it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 67 and the variable winning device 65. . Further, in a right-handed game, the ball can enter the second ball entry port 67 and the variable winning device 65, but it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the alternate distribution unit 71. The specific configuration of this alternate distribution unit 71 will be described later.

Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 including a plurality of LEDs 37a serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b is disposed at the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 3). The first symbol display device 37 displays a variable display of the first symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as "dynamic display"). At the same time, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate the number of reserved balls for which dynamic display has not yet been performed (pending balls) among the balls that have won (balls entered) in the left special drawing prize opening 77a and the right special drawing prize opening 78a, which will be described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the LED 37a corresponding to the state. Note that the LED 37a is configured such that each LED emits light in a different color (for example, red, green, blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. .

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right, and dynamically displays the determination result of the first symbol. Specifically, the two 7-segment LEDs display a variable time (dynamic time) determined based on winnings to the left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a provided in the alternate distribution unit 71, which will be described later. After the dynamic display (in the first embodiment, one segment in the center of the 7-segment LED blinks alternately) until the target display time (target display time) has elapsed, a symbol indicating the determination result is displayed in a stopped state. If the judgment result is a loss, a "-" symbol is displayed in which only one segment in the center lights up, and if the judgment result is a jackpot, "3" and "7" corresponding to the jackpot are displayed. ” will be displayed.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery) for a ball that enters the left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a, and if it is determined that it is a big hit, the It also determines the type of jackpot. As the jackpot type determined here, "15R probability variable jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", or "2R probability variable jackpot" are prepared.

Here, the "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds and then shifts to the "probability variable state." In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variable jackpot" is won, the same odd numbered symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81.

A "2R variable probability jackpot" is a variable probability jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds and then shifts to a "probability variable state." In the first embodiment, when winning the "2R probability variable jackpot", a predetermined third symbol combination (for example, "341") is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

"15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, the state shifts to "time reduction state" and remains in "time reduction state" for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). That's true. In the first embodiment, when the "15R normal jackpot" is won, the same even numbered symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a so-called probability fluctuation state.In other words, a state of play where it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. That's true. In the high probability state in the first embodiment (probability variable, probability variable state), the probability of winning of the variable display of the second symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the second symbol is referred to as "variable display") described later increases, and The electric accessory 79 provided on the right side of the alternating sorting unit 71 becomes more likely to be in the open state, and as a result, a game in which the ball easily enters the right side special drawing prize opening 78a in the alternating sorting unit 71. Contains state.

On the other hand, the "normal gaming state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is higher than the normal state, that is, the jackpot probability is higher than the "probability fluctuation state". refers to a state where the value is low. In addition, the "time saving state (so-called time saving state)" is a state in which the jackpot probability is low like the "normal game state", and only the winning probability of the variable display of the second symbol is increased, and " Similarly to "Probability Fluctuation State", it refers to a game state in which the electric accessory 79, which will be described later, is in an open state and the ball is likely to enter the right special drawing prize opening 78a.

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the variable display of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electric accessory 79 attached to the right side special drawing prize opening 78a or the winning probability of one winning can be changed. The number of times the electric accessory 79 is opened may be changed. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the time during which the electric accessory 79 attached to the right special drawing prize opening 78a is opened is made longer than in cases other than the "time shortened state", or the electric The number of times the accessory 79 is released may be made greater than in cases other than the "time reduction state". In addition, in the "time reduction state", at least two of the following are possible: increasing the winning probability of the variable display of the second symbol, prolonging the opening time of the electric accessory 79, and increasing the number of times the electric accessory 79 is opened. Both may be performed at the same time.

An alternate distribution unit 71 into which balls flowing down the game area can enter is arranged at the lower center of the game area. This alternate distribution unit 71 mainly includes a distribution ball entrance 72 into which a ball flowing down the left side of the variable display unit 80 in the game area (i.e., a ball in a left-handed game) can enter. A holding device 73 (see FIG. 4) in which the balls that enter the sorting ball entrance 72 (see FIG. 4) enter and are held, and a board return device from which the balls held in the holding device 73 are discharged. A dummy prize opening 75 into which the balls ejected from the board surface return opening 74 can flow, and balls that have entered the sorting ball entry opening 72 but have not entered the holding device 73 are alternately sorted. A sorting device 76 (see FIG. 4) that alternately distributes balls to the left path 77 or right path 78 (both see FIG. 4) in the unit 71, and balls that are sorted to the left path 77 by the distribution device 76 can enter the ball. It is comprised of a left side special figure winning hole 77a, a right side special figure winning hole 78a into which the ball distributed to the right path 78 by the sorting device 76 can enter, and the above-mentioned electric accessory 79.

When a ball enters the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a provided in this alternate distribution unit 71, a special figure winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. , due to the turning on of the special symbol winning hole switch, a jackpot lottery for the first symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), and a dynamic display of the first symbol according to the lottery result is displayed as the first symbol. It is shown on the 7-segment display 37b of the display device 37, and a variable effect of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that the left side special figure winning hole 77a and the right side special figure winning hole 78a each serve as one of the winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the configurations of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 of the first embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a schematic sectional view of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 when viewed from the front. In addition, in FIG. 4, for convenience of explanation, the composition excludes the parts on the front side of the alternate sorting unit 71 and the holding device 73 when viewed from the front, and is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the alternating sorting unit 71 and the holding device 73. The alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 are expressed in a cross-sectional view, and each member (part) constituting them will be explained.

As described above, the alternate sorting unit 71 includes a holding device 73 that holds balls that have entered the sorting ball entry port 72, and a sorting device that can sort out balls that have not been held in the holding device 73 and have flown down. A device 76 is provided. The balls held in the holding device 73 are configured to be able to enter the dummy winning slot 75, and the balls sorted by the sorting device 76 are configured to be able to enter the left special drawing winning slot 77a or the right special drawing winning slot 78a. It is configured.

The sorting ball inlet 72 of the alternate sorting unit 71 is a path through which a ball that is shot left-handed and flows down the game area can pass when flowing into the alternating sorting unit 71. The balls flowing into the port 72 are configured to be guided to a holding device 73 or a sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side (towards the bottom of the alternate sorting unit 71). It should be noted that the distribution ball entry opening 72 is configured to prevent balls that have been fired right-handed and passed through the game area from flowing into the distribution ball entry opening 72.

The holding device 73 is a device for holding (storing) only one ball that has entered the sorting ball entry port 72, and is located downstream of the sorting ball entry port 72 and upstream of the sorting device 76. It is located in The ball flowing into the sorting ball entrance 72 is configured to be held by the holding device 73 before reaching the sorting device 76 if the ball is not held in the holding device 73. When the balls are held in the holding device 73, they pass through the front side of the holding device 73, flow down to the sorting device 76, and are sorted in the downstream direction by the sorting device 76. The balls held in this holding device 73 are ejected from this holding device 73 when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when a "slump effect" is executed), and flow out from the board return port 74. , is configured to flow (win) into a dummy winning opening 75 provided directly below the board return opening 74.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is designed to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from performing a fluctuating performance of the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “slump”) as much as possible. For the first time in a situation where no variable effects are being performed (in the first embodiment, more than 5 seconds have elapsed after the variable effects have stopped; hereinafter, this situation will be referred to as a "slump state"), the left special drawing prize opening 77a or When the variable performance of the third symbol is executed based on the winning in the right special symbol winning hole 78a, the performance has a longer time (period) than the execution time of the obtained variable effect, and the obtained variable effect The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a production element (hereinafter referred to as a "slump production") that has been executed more times than the number of executions. By configuring in this way, by increasing the number of performances while lengthening the performance time performed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the situation where no performance is performed on the third symbol display device 81, It is possible to prevent players from getting excited.

In this case, the number of executions of the fluctuating performance corresponding to the acquired starting winning is greater than the number of executions of the fluctuating performance (hereinafter referred to as a "slump performance"), from the start of fluctuating the third symbol to the fluctuating stop (pseudo stop). In order to execute the ``slump performance'' of the ``slump performance'' (a unit of performance consisting of a combination of multiple performance elements up to and including (including It is necessary to display a dummy hold display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, to give the player the illusion that a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, in order to create the above-mentioned situation, the balls that were held in the holding device 73 at the timing before the execution of the "slump effect" are transferred to an alternate distribution unit having a left side special figure winning hole 77a and a right side special figure winning hole 78a. 71, and based on the winning, the dummy hold display is changed to the hold display of the actual variable effect (hereinafter, the hold display of the actual variable effect may be referred to as the "main hold display"). ) is displayed in the cockpit display area Db. Then, by extinguishing the dummy hold display during the execution of the additionally executed "slump effect," it is possible to give the player an illusion as if a variable effect is being executed.

It should be noted that, like the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element described later, a method of executing multiple performances in a fluctuating performance corresponding to one main hold display can be considered, but in that case, players who are accustomed to the game will When I looked at the ``pseudo fluctuation'' effect element that is executed when there are few main hold displays, I inferred that ``I was simply forcing the time of the fluctuation effect to be longer,'' and that it was actually a factor that made me lose interest in the game. It has become. Therefore, by executing the "slump effect" with the appearance and extinguishment of the dummy hold display as in the first embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect as if a variable effect is being executed, and thereby to simply change the slump effect. It is possible to make it difficult for people to guess that the time for presentation is being increased, and to prevent players from becoming disinterested.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the operation mode of the holding device 73 and the behavior of the balls when the balls flow into the holding device 73, are held (reserved), and are discharged will be explained. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 taken along the line AA in FIG. 4 when viewed from the side, and FIG. FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the state, and FIG. 5(b) shows that the ball held in the holding device 73 is released from the board surface return port 74 by the holding device solenoid 73f being energized from the state shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the balls are discharged and flowed down to the dummy prize opening 75, and FIG. 5(c) shows that the tip part of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is in the passage of the sorting entry opening 72 from the state shown in FIG. 5(b). It is a diagram showing a state in which balls can be received into the holding device 73 by tilting to the side (front side of the pachinko machine 10), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the ball that has flowed into the opening 72 is guided into the holding device 73 by the holding device opening/closing plate 73a. Note that when the state shown in FIG. 5(d) is reached, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 5(a) again, so the states of FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d) are configured to loop. .

First, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the holding device 73 mainly includes a holding device opening/closing plate 73a, a holding ball holding portion 73b, a rotating shaft portion 73c, a rear wall 73d, a lock piece 73e, It is composed of a holding device solenoid 73f and a holding ball detection switch 73g. Each of the above configurations will be described below with reference to the movements of each configuration shown in FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d).

The holding device opening/closing plate 73a, the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the rotating shaft portion 73c are integrally formed, and the holding device opening/closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b are arranged in an L-shape at right angles to each other. At the same time, a rotating shaft portion 73c is arranged at a connecting portion (at a corner position of the L-shape) between the holding device opening/closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b. The holding device opening/closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b are configured to be rotatable in the front-rear direction of the Pachinko machine 10 by this rotating shaft portion 73c.

FIG. 5A shows a state in which one ball is held in the holding device 73. In this state, the holding device solenoid 73f is in a de-energized state (that is, off), and the holding portion lock portion 73e1 and the opening/closing plate pushing portion 73e2 provided on the lock piece 73e connected to the holding device solenoid 73f are both rearward. It is in a state in which it protrudes from the wall 73d (hereinafter, a state in which the lock piece 73e (holding part lock part 73e1 and opening/closing plate extrusion part 73e2) protrudes from the rear wall 73d is referred to as an "initial position"). In addition, when the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, the movement of the lock piece 73e is regulated by the holding device solenoid 73f.

The reserved ball holding portion 73b is a part for storing the balls in the retaining device 73 when the balls flow into the retaining device 73. When a ball flows into the holding device 73 in a state where the tip side of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted toward the path side of the sorting ball entry port 72 (that is, in a state where the holding device 73 is open), the ball is held. When the device solenoid 73f is in a non-driven state and the holding portion locking portion 73e1 is in the initial position, a ball is held on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the holding state is maintained by the holding device solenoid 73f.

Specifically, when a ball is placed on the held ball holding part 73b, the held ball holding part 73b rotates due to the weight of the ball, and then the lower surface of the held ball holding part 73b locks the holding part of the lock piece 73e. The retaining ball retaining portion 73b is in contact with the upper surface of the retaining ball retaining portion 73e1, and the downward rotation of the reserved ball retaining portion 73b is restricted by the retaining portion locking portion 73e1. That is, the held ball holding part 73b is pressed downward by the weight of the ball resting on the upper surface of the held ball holding part 73b while its downward rotation is restricted by the holding part locking part 73e1. The retained ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state, and the holding device opening/closing plate 73a integrally formed with the reserved ball holding portion 73b is maintained in an upright state. As a result, the state in which the balls are stored in the space formed by the holding device opening/closing plate 73a, the upper surface of the holding ball holding part 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening/closing plate extrusion part 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained. At the same time, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is maintained in an upright state, and the balls that have flowed into the sorting ball entry port 72 flow into the sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side.

At this time, the held ball detection switch 73g provided in the holding device 73 detects that the ball is held in the holding device 73. This retained ball detection switch 73g detects the presence of a ball between a light emitting element and a light receiving element (both not shown) by blocking the space between the light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown). The main control, which will be described later, is configured with an optical detection switch that detects the absence of a ball between the light receiving element and the light emitting element by not interrupting the light receiving element, and is electrically connected to this held ball detection switch 73g. Detection information of the held ball detection switch 73g is output to the device 110. Note that the retained ball detection switch 73g is not limited to an optical type, and other known sensors such as a microswitch can be used.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is shipped from the factory with one ball held in reserve during the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 10. The lock piece 73e is configured such that when the holding device solenoid 73f is in a de-energized state (that is, off), the holding portion locking portion 73e1 is located at a position that limits the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b. ing. Further, even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned sideways or upside down, the lock piece 73e is configured to maintain the state in which the balls are held in the reserved ball holding portion 73b. With this configuration, the state in which the balls are held in the holding device 73 can be maintained no matter how the pachinko machine 10 is oriented in any direction during the transportation of the pachinko machine 10 from when it is shipped from the factory to when it is installed in the hall. can do. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a hall, the first ball that enters the alternate sorting unit 71 is not held in the holding device 73, and the player enters the left special drawing opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a. can be done. Therefore, when playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 for the first time, when balls are allowed to flow into the alternate distribution unit 71, it is possible to ensure that the player receives the third symbol (first symbol) lottery. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(b), 6 seconds have elapsed since the first performance unit (hereinafter referred to as "first performance") in the predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, the "slump performance") was executed. When the holding device solenoid 73f has elapsed), the holding device solenoid 73f is excited (i.e., turned on) for a predetermined period of time (“2000ms” in the first embodiment), the lock piece 73e moves toward the holding device solenoid 73f, and the holding unit locking portion Both the opening/closing plate extrusion portion 73e1 and the opening/closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 are recessed into the rear wall 73d. In this way, when the holding device solenoid 73f is energized, the holding portion locking portion 73e1, which had previously limited the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b, is recessed into the rear wall 73d, thereby locking the holding ball. The holding portion 73b rotates downward due to the weight of the ball. Then, the balls held in the held ball holding part 73b flow down, are discharged from the board return port 74 to the front side of the game board 13, and flow directly into the dummy winning port 75. That is, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured to enter the dummy prize opening 75 by exciting (driving) the holding device solenoid 73f.

With this configuration, the balls held in the holding device 73 can be reliably won into the dummy winning slot 75, and players who do not understand the details of the dummy winning slot 75 can receive the special drawing on the left side. When the ball enters the dummy winning hole 75 arranged between the mouth 77a and the right side special figure winning hole 78a, it is possible to create an illusion as if the player has won the starting prize of the third symbol (first symbol).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(c), when the holding device solenoid 73f changes from the energized state to the de-energized state, both the holding part locking part 73e1 and the opening/closing plate pushing part 73e2 of the locking piece 73e are released from the rear wall 73d. It becomes prominent again. At this time, the opening/closing plate extrusion part 73e2 of the lock piece 73e collides with the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a, and the force of the collision causes the holding device opening/closing plate 73a to move toward the front passage wall 72a of the sorting ball entry opening 72. Rotated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(d), the holding device opening/closing plate 73a that collided with the opening/closing plate extrusion part 73e2 in the state of FIG. The front passage wall 72a collides with the tip portion (the inclined surface at the tip) of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a. Since the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is configured to be heavier than the holding device opening/closing plate 73b, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., the sorting input) due to its own weight. The state in which the ball opening 72 is tilted toward the front passage wall 72a side is maintained. Therefore, when no balls are placed on the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is maintained in a tilted state, and the balls flowing into the sorting ball entry opening 72 can be received into the holding device 73. state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "acceptable state").

Here, the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is formed to have a sharp inclined surface, and when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted toward the front passage wall 72a, the inclined surface vibrates. It is configured to come into surface contact with the front passage wall 72a of the ball entry port 72. With this configuration, when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a can be tilted more towards the front passage wall 72a side of the sorting ball entry port 72, and the holding device opening/closing plate 73a can be tilted more towards the front passage wall 72a side of the sorting ball entry port 72. It is possible to reliably guide the balls flowing into the holding device 73.

In addition, the balls flowing into the sorting ball entry opening 72 are made difficult to collide with the upper surface side of the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a (the part that comes into contact with the wall surface of the sorting ball entering opening 72), and the holding device opening/closing plate 73a By configuring it so that it collides with the sloped surface on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the surface on the upper right side of the tilted holding device opening/closing plate 73a), it becomes possible to parry the impact due to the weight of the ball by the sloped surface, It is possible to reduce the impact when the ball collides with the holding device opening/closing plate 73a, thereby preventing the holding device opening/closing plate 73a from being damaged.

Then, when a ball flows into the sorting ball entry port 72 in a situation where the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is in the receiving state, the ball collides with the holding device opening/closing plate 73a and flows down toward the holding device 73 side. . Then, the ball collides with the upper surface of the reserved ball holding part 73b, and the held ball holding part 73b is rotated downward about the rotating shaft part 73c due to the weight of the ball. At this time, the holding device solenoid 73f is in a de-energized state and the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, so the lower surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b and the upper surface of the holding portion locking portion 73e1 come into contact with each other, and the holding portion locking portion 73e1 This restricts the downward rotation of the reserved ball holding portion 73b. By being pressed downward by the weight of the balls placed on the upper surface of the retained ball holding part 73b, the held ball holding part 73b is maintained in a horizontal state and is formed integrally with the held ball holding part 73b. The upright state of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is also maintained. As a result, the state in which the balls are stored in the space formed by the upper surface of the reserved ball holding part 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening/closing plate extrusion part 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained (see FIG. 5(a) reference).

In this way, the holding device 73 holds only one ball that has entered the distribution ball entry port 72, and when a predetermined condition is met (in the first embodiment, when a "slump effect" is executed). , the balls held in reserve are discharged from this holding device 73 and placed in a dummy prize opening 75. Then, based on the prize winning, a dummy pending display is displayed in the same display as the main pending display, and the second performance unit in the "slump performance" that is additionally executed (hereinafter, n in "slump performance" (n is a natural number) ) The dummy is held at the time of execution (the first performance unit is called the "nth performance") (when the execution of the first performance element starts. However, the "pseudo-relationship" performance and the "development possibility" performance are excluded). By letting the display digest, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if a variable performance is being executed.

In addition, when a plurality of balls consecutively flow into the sorting ball entrance 72 and into the holding device 73 in a state where the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted (that is, in an accepting state), the first A discharge path may be provided to retain only one ball and discharge the subsequent balls. With this configuration, only one ball can be held in the holding device 73, and only one ball can be flowed into the dummy prize opening 75 during the "slump performance", and the content of the performance can be changed. It is possible to prevent discrepancies from occurring.

Further, the members constituting the alternate distribution unit 71 may be made of a transparent or semi-transparent material (for example, polycarbonate resin, etc.), and the members constituting the holding device 73 may also be made of a transparent or semi-transparent material. . With this configuration, the player can visually check the falling state of the balls that have flowed into the alternate distribution unit 71, and can grasp the winning openings 77a and 78a into which the balls flow, and the balls are held in the holding device 73. It is possible to visually check whether the

Furthermore, the holding device 73 is arranged upstream of the left side special figure winning hole 77a and the right side special figure winning hole 78a in the alternate sorting unit 71 (that is, between the sorting ball entrance 72 and the sorting device 76). However, instead of this, it may be arranged on the downstream side of the left side special figure winning hole 77a and the right side special figure winning hole 78a. By causing the holding device 73 to hold the balls that have won the left special drawing winning slot 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a, the balls that have entered the alternate distribution unit 71 can be transferred to either of the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a. It is possible to make the balls win in the holding device 73 as well while ensuring that the first symbol lottery opportunity is obtained. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the first symbol cannot be drawn even though a ball has entered the alternate distribution unit 71. In this case, since the ball held in the holding device 73 is a so-called out ball, even if the ball flowing down from the holding device 73 enters the dummy prize opening 75, it is configured so that the prize ball etc. is not paid out. suitable.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. As described above, the sorting device 76 of the alternate sorting unit 71 is used to alternately distribute balls that have flowed down from the sorting ball inlet 72 and have not flowed into the holding device 73 to the left path 77 or the right path 78. This device includes a rotating shaft portion 76a, a center plate portion 76b extending upward from the outer periphery of the rotating shaft portion 76a, and a left side support extending left and right from the outer periphery of the rotating shaft portion 76a. It is composed of a plate 76c, a right receiving plate 76d, and a distribution side magnet (not shown) built into the center plate portion 76b. In addition, on the wall on the back side of the game board 13 of the alternate distribution unit 71, a unit side magnet ( (not shown) is built-in.

This sorting device 76 is configured to be able to rotate 30 degrees left and right around a rotating shaft portion 76a, and in the state shown in FIG. The entire left side receiving plate 76c is positioned below the rotating shaft 76a and the right side receiving plate 76d is above the rotating shaft 76a. It is in a condition to guide the ball that has flown down to the right path 78. The right guide position is maintained by the repulsive action between the distribution side magnet and the unit side magnet.

Here, a manner in which balls entering the alternate distribution unit 71 are alternately distributed to the left path 77 or the right path 78 by the distribution device 76 will be described. First, as in the state shown in FIG. 4, the tip side of the left side receiving plate 76c comes into contact with the wall of the alternate distribution unit 71, and the entire left side receiving plate 76c is below the rotating shaft portion 76a, and the right side receiving plate 76d If the ball is located above the rotating shaft portion 76a, the balls that have entered the alternate distribution unit 71 and flowed down from the distribution ball entry port 72 are distributed to the center plate portion 76b and the right receiving plate 76d of the distribution device 76. It fits into the space formed by. Then, by pushing down the right receiving plate 76d due to the weight of the ball, the entire distribution device 76 rotates, and the tip side of the right receiving plate 76d comes into contact with the wall of the alternate distribution unit 71, and the entire right receiving plate 76d is rotated. The left receiving plate 76c is located below the rotating shaft portion 76a and above the rotating shaft portion 76a. Therefore, the sorting device 76 is in a state where the balls can flow down to the right path 78, and in this state, the balls are guided to the right path 78 by rolling on the upper surface of the right receiving plate 76d.

At this time, the force pushing down the right receiving plate 76d (rotating the entire distribution device 76) due to the weight of the ball is stronger than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since this is larger, the sorting device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the left side receiving plate 76c is placed above the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right side receiving plate 76d is placed below the rotating shaft portion 76a, that is, the left guiding position. maintained.

Then, the balls that enter the alternate distribution unit 71 and flow down from the distribution ball entry port 72 are stored in the space formed by the center plate portion 76b and the left receiving plate 76c of the distribution device 76. Then, the distribution device 76 rotates by pushing down the left side receiving plate 76c due to the weight of the ball, and the tip side of the left side receiving plate 76c contacts the wall of the alternate distribution unit 71, causing the entire left side receiving plate 76c to rotate. The right receiving plate 76d is located below the shaft portion 76a and above the rotating shaft portion 76a. Therefore, the sorting device 76 is in a state where the balls can flow down to the left side path 77, and in this state, the balls are guided to the left side path 77 by rolling on the upper surface of the left receiving plate 76c.

At this time, the weight of the ball pushes down the left side receiving plate 76c (turns the entire distribution device 76) rather than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since the force is larger, the sorting device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the left side receiving plate 76c is located below the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is located above the rotating shaft portion 76a, that is, the state is at the right guiding position. maintained. By repeating these movements alternately, balls entering the alternate distribution unit 71 are alternately distributed to the left path 77 and the right path 78.

The left side path 77 of the alternate distribution unit 71 is a path along which the balls guided to the left side of the alternate distribution unit 71 by the distribution device 76 flow down. A left side exit is provided on the lower left side of this left side path 77, through which the balls flowing down the left side path 77 flow out, and a left side special drawing prize opening 77a is provided below the left side exit. Therefore, after the ball guided to the left path 77 flows down the left path 77, it is discharged from the left exit and is configured to win into the left special drawing prize opening 77a.

The right side path 78 of the alternate distribution unit 71 is a path along which the balls guided to the right side in the alternate distribution unit 71 by the distribution device 76 flow down. A right side exit is provided on the lower right side of this right side path 78, through which the balls flowing down the right side path 78 flow out, and a right side special drawing prize opening 78a is provided below the right side exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the right path 78 is configured to flow down inside the right path 78, then be discharged from the right exit and enter the right special drawing prize opening 78a.

By configuring the alternate distribution unit 71 in this way, it is possible to alternately distribute the balls that enter the alternate distribution unit 71 to the left side special figure winning hole 77a and the right side special figure winning hole 78a. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the winning holes continue to be fixedly won, and to diversify the patterns of balls entering the winning holes 77a and 78a.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the alternating distribution unit 71 when viewed from the front, and a large winning opening 65a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stops symbol. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, an opening/closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball easily enters the big winning opening 65a. As this special game state, the grand prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapse or until 10 balls are won).

This big prize opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the big winning prize mouth 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state (jackpot state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount than usual as a reward for gaming value (gaming value). Prize balls will be paid out.

A second ball entry opening 67 is provided above the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front and on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (to be described later) when viewed from the front. The second ball entry port 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction through which the ball passes. When the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67, a second symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes the main controller 110 to change the variable display of the second symbol. A lottery will be held. It should be noted that this second ball entrance 67 only serves as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is configured so that no prize balls or the like are paid out even if a ball passes through.

An electric accessory 79 is provided on the downstream side of the variable prize winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 71. This electric accessory 79 mainly includes a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that drives the rotating plate to open and close.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally maintains the rotary plate of the electric accessory 79 in an upright state and closes the right side special symbol prize opening 78a, but when the second symbol is variablely displayed. In the case of winning, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined period of time, and the rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 is moved from an upright position to the right at a predetermined angle (for example, , 45 degrees) to an open state (tilted state), the right side special figure winning hole 78a is opened, and the ball is configured to be in a state where it is easy to win into the right side special figure winning hole 78a. .

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning in the variable display of the second symbol changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and by making it difficult to win in the variable display of the second symbol, the electric accessory It is configured to make it difficult to open the rotating plate 79 (tilt state) and to make it difficult to win a prize into the right side special drawing prize opening 78a. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and by making it easier to win in the variable display of the second symbol, The rotary plate of the electric accessory 79 is made easy to open (tilt), and it is configured so that a prize can be easily entered into the right special drawing prize opening 78a.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Further, as described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged from the central portion to the right side area of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 has a third display in synchronization with the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the left special symbol winning hole 77a or the right special symbol winning hole 78a (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable pattern, and a second symbol is variably displayed using the passing of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is such that the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110. The third pattern of the third pattern display device 81 is used to make a decorative display corresponding to the pattern. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 6(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers from "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, among which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with the number "9" is a large number added almost completely to the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") have characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet almost completely on the front of the wooden box. A simulated attached symbol is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that even numbers are small and green and are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the first symbol by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , is configured so that the jackpot occurs after the fluctuating performance ends. If the jackpot transitions to the "probability variable state (probability variable state)" after the jackpot ends and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpots are awarded, a variable effect in which the main symbols with odd numbers (equivalent to "probability variable symbols") are aligned will be performed. be exposed. On the other hand, when shifting to the "time saving state" after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuating effect is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to "time saving symbols") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three parts in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is reserved as the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It consists of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of pitches, etc., and the other upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order, and a variable effect is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Note that the arrangement of numbers may be configured to be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the main symbol numbers may be arranged in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the main symbol numbers may be arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows of upper, middle, and lower rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variable production, the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Stop display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "jackpot display") is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video will be displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing a variable display (dynamic display) or “slump display” of the third symbol (first symbol), the ball is on the left side. When a ball enters the special drawing prize opening 77a or the right side special drawing prize opening 78a, the number of balls entered (the number of reserved balls) is displayed up to four times. In addition, if a ball enters the dummy prize opening 75 while the third symbol is being fluctuated or "slumped" on the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the ball enters the dummy winning hole 75 (the dummy held ball (number) will be displayed at most once. In other words, if the ball enters the left special figure winning hole 77a, the right special figure winning hole 78a, or the dummy winning hole 75 while the third symbol variation effect or "slump effect" is being performed, The number of pitches (number of pending pitches) is displayed up to a maximum of 5 as a real pending display and a dummy pending display. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the dummy hold display exists.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of times the ball enters the left special symbol winning hole 77a or the right special symbol winning hole 78a, which triggers the lottery of the third symbol (first symbol), is displayed in the cockpit display area Db. In addition to being displayed as the main hold display, the number of times the ball entered the dummy winning hole 75 is displayed in the cockpit display area Db as a dummy hold display, either together with the main hold display or alone. . In addition, by displaying the main hold display based on the ball entering the left special drawing winning hole 77a or the right special drawing winning hole 78a and the dummy holding display based on the ball entering the dummy winning hole 75 in the same manner, They are structured in such a way that they cannot be distinguished from each other. Then, based on the main hold display and the dummy hold display displayed in the cockpit display area Db, the third symbol display device 81 displays either a conventional variation effect or a "slump effect" executed when the variation effect is interrupted. or is configured to run.

Conventionally, when a "slump state" occurs in which the variable performance is not executed in the third symbol display device 81 due to no ball entering the left special figure winning hole 77a or the right special figure winning hole 78a for a long time, Even though the player is playing the game by firing balls, the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player cannot obtain the entertainment related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Unable to do so, he loses interest in the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a because the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81. However, there is a risk that the player may decide that the machine is difficult to obtain gaming value from, and stop playing the game on that Pachinko machine 10, resulting in a decrease in the operation of the Pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 once falls into a "slump state", then a ball enters the left special pattern winning hole 77a or the right special pattern winning hole 78a and the variable performance is executed for the first time. When it is executed, the third symbol display device 81 performs a “slump performance” that is executed for a longer time than the execution time of the obtained fluctuation performance instead of the regular fluctuation performance, and the third symbol display device 81 performs a “slump performance”. The performance time is configured to be longer than the execution time of the regular variable performance. In addition, as the "slump effect" is executed, the dummy pending display is displayed in the same manner as the actual main hold display based on the winning in the dummy winning hole 75, and the first effect of the "slump effect" is displayed. When the unit is executed, the dummy pending display is consumed (erased).

With this configuration, when a ball enters the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a, it is possible to determine whether the effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a regular variable effect or not. The "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81 makes it difficult to identify whether the effect is a "performance" or not, while the "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81 makes it possible to make the performance time performed by the third symbol display device 81 longer than the time of the actual variable performance. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the duration of the performance on the third symbol display device 81, thereby increasing the interest of the game without discouraging the player.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation of the third symbol (first symbol) is accurately indicated by the first symbol display device 37, while the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation of the third symbol (first symbol) is The number of reserved balls with "slump performance" is shown in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 provided in the cockpit display area Db. In the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, there is one main pending display and one dummy pending display (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol (white circle symbol) for each reserved ball (one reserved ball). .Hereinafter, the main pending display and the dummy pending display may be collectively referred to as "pending symbols") are displayed respectively, and the pending symbols displayed in the first to fifth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are displayed. Depending on the number, the number of pending pitches for the variable effect and the "slump effect" is displayed.

That is, in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the number of reserved balls in the variable performance and "slump performance" is one time. , and if a total of two pending symbols are displayed, one each in the first and second pending symbol display areas Db1 and Db2, the number of pending balls in the fluctuating effect and "slump effect" is twice. , and if a total of three pending symbols are displayed, one each in the first to third pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db3, the number of pending balls in the fluctuating effect and "slump effect" is 3 times. , and if a total of four pending symbols are displayed, one each in the first to fourth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, the number of pending balls in the variable performance and "slump performance" is 4 times. , and if a total of 5 pending symbols are displayed, one each in the first to fifth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, the number of pending balls in the fluctuating effect and "slump effect" is 5 times. . In addition, if no pending symbol is displayed in the first to fifth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, the number of pending balls of the variable performance and "slump performance" is 0, and the suspended variable performance and " It shows that "slump effect" does not exist.

In addition, on the left side of the cockpit display area Db, an execution pattern display in which a pattern (hereinafter referred to as an "execution pattern") indicating that a fluctuation effect or "slump effect" is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. A region Db0 is provided. This executed symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to display executed symbols larger than each of the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. In addition, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the pending symbols displayed in the first pending symbol display area Db1 move (shift. Hereinafter, moving and displaying the pending symbols may be referred to as "shift display"). and is displayed as an execution pattern.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when one production unit of the fluctuation production or "slump production" is completed, and with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed pending symbol is moved to the lower side ( It moves and is displayed as a pending symbol on the left side). Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased due to the end of one production unit of the variable production or "slump production", it is displayed in the first pending symbol display area Db1. The pending symbol that has been held is moved (shifted) and displayed as an executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, the pending symbols displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2 are moved (shifted) and displayed as pending symbols in the first pending symbol display area Db1. Further, the pending symbol displayed in the third pending symbol display area Db3 is moved (shifted) and displayed as a pending symbol in the second pending symbol display area Db2. Further, the pending symbol displayed in the fourth pending symbol display area Db4 is moved (shifted) and displayed as a pending symbol in the third pending symbol display area Db3. Furthermore, the pending symbol displayed in the fifth pending symbol display area Db5 is moved (shifted) and displayed as a pending symbol in the fourth pending symbol display area Db4.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while one performance unit of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" is being executed in the main display area Dm, the execution symbol continues to be displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 ("super reach"). ”, except for the production elements of “Special Reach” or the production elements of “Which Reach”). On the other hand, if one production unit of the variable production or "slump production" is completed, or if the production element of "Super Reach", "Special Reach", or "Which Reach" is being executed, In this case, the executed symbol is erased. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that one performance unit of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, If the execution symbol is not displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, either the fluctuating effect or the ``slump effect'' is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or the ``super reach'' is not executed. This indicates that the performance element , the performance element ``Special Reach'', or the performance element ``Which Reach'' is being executed.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be able to execute a "reservation change notice" using the reservation symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "pending change notice" refers to the jackpot expectation of one performance unit of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" executed in the main display area Dm. This is a notice that is suggested by changing the display color of the pending symbol and the executed symbol in multiple stages from before to during the execution of the performance unit.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "pending change notice", the display color of the pending symbols and executed symbols is changed from "white" which is the normal display mode, to "blue" which is the blue display mode, to green. The display mode is configured to be changeable to "green" in the display mode or "red" in the red display mode. In this pachinko machine 10, when a "jackpot display" or "reach display" occurs in one production unit of a variable production or a "slump production", the display colors of pending symbols and executed symbols are changed. Since the selection ratios are configured to be different, the display color of the pending symbol and executed symbol changes from the normal display format ("white") to another display format (for example, "blue"), It is possible to suggest to the player by each display color the possibility that a "reach display" or "jackpot display" will occur in the fluctuating effect indicated by the pending symbol and the executed symbol, or in one effect unit of the "slump effect". can.

Specifically, in the "pending change notice", if the pending symbol and the executed symbol are displayed in "blue" rather than the normal display format ("white"), the changes indicated by the pending symbol and the executed symbol are The ratio of "reach display" or "jackpot display" in one production unit of production or "slump production" is set high. In addition, when the pending symbol and the executed symbol are displayed in "green" rather than "blue", the "reach display" or "jackpot display" is better in the fluctuating effect or "slump effect" indicated by the pending symbol and the executed symbol. The ratio is set to be high. Furthermore, if the pending symbol and execution symbol are displayed in "red" rather than "green", the "reach display" is better in one production unit of the fluctuation production or "slump production" indicated by the pending symbol and execution symbol. The percentage of "jackpot display" is set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending symbol and executed symbol is "green" or "red", "Normal reach" is displayed in the fluctuating effect or "slump effect" indicated by the "green" or "red" pending symbol or executed symbol. ” (the main performance mode is referred to as the “performance mode”), the “Super Reach” production mode, or the “Special Reach” production mode is set to be executed.

In addition, due to this "reservation change notice", when the display mode of the reservation symbol has changed and the reservation symbol shifts due to the execution (extinguishment) of one production unit of the fluctuation production or "slump production", the The changed display mode of the pending symbol is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected on the shifted pending symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the pending symbol changes, the changed pending symbol is displayed in the other pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 or the executed symbol display area Db0 with the execution of one production unit of the fluctuation production or "slump production". Even when shifted to , the display mode before the shift is maintained as it is as the display mode of the pending symbol or executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the fifth reserved symbol display area Db5, the reserved symbol changes from the fourth reserved symbol display area Db4 to the third reserved symbol display area Db3 to the second reserved symbol. When shifting from the display area Db2 to the first reserved symbol display area Db1 to the executed symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbols or executed symbols are configured to continue to be displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the ball entering the left special figure winning hole 77a or the right special figure winning hole 78a is configured to be held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved pitches is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls corresponding to one performance unit of the "slump performance" based on the ball entering the dummy prize opening 75 was configured to be reserved up to one time, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to one time. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to two or more times (for example, four times). Furthermore, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area partitioned into five can be displayed in a manner that differs by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.) is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not possible to execute a "reserved change notice" based on the reserved symbols, so other character symbols, etc. may be additionally displayed. By making it appear, it may be configured to execute a prefetched notice similar to the "pending change notice."

Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 is provided with five holding lamps that indicate the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls in the variable effect and "slump effect," and the number of held balls is displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit. It may also be something to do. Alternatively, one of the executed symbol or the reserved symbol may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the other of the executed symbol or the reserved symbol may be displayed on a reservation lamp other than the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if the configuration is such that the number of balls on hold is displayed using a hold lamp, it is natural that a look-ahead notice similar to the "hold change notice" in the first embodiment can be executed by providing a plurality of display colors for the hold lamp. possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot as a result of the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm.

As mentioned above, the cockpit display area Db is a performance unit of one of the variable performance and "slump performance" among the balls entered into the left side special figure winning hole 77a, the right side special figure winning hole 78a, or the dummy winning hole 75. This is an area for displaying a pending symbol indicating the number of pending balls, which is the number of balls that have not yet been executed (reserved balls), and an executed symbol related to one performance unit of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" being executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a preview symbol is displayed, and one effect unit of the variable effect or "slump effect" performed in the main display area Dm is different from normal. It is suggested to the player that the state is likely to transition to a jackpot.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in the first embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action in the central small area Ds2, and a variable effect or Based on the "slump effect", special actions different from the predetermined actions are performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, the color of the headband, which is usually white, changes, and another character appears. A preview performance will be held.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the right small area Ds3 has a level that indicates step-by-step whether or not a jackpot will occur in one performance unit of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" performed in the main display area Dm. A meter (not shown) appears and is displayed. This level meter is a "reach display" in one performance unit of the variable performance or "slump performance" that is being executed based on the appearance of a preview symbol etc. in one performance unit of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance". The level meter is configured to increase (add) each time the level of occurrence expectation and the level of jackpot expectation increase, and to indicate that a jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of indicating the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (normal symbol)) every time the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67. This is a variable display that allows you to In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in the first embodiment), the electric accessory 79 is in an operating state for a period of time corresponding to the gaming state. (The rotating plate is rotated (tilted)).

The number of balls held at the second ball entrance 67 is held up to four times at the maximum, and the number of balls held is lit and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp 84 provided in the center frame 86. Four second symbol retention lamps 84 are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of symbols reserved, and are arranged below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reservations is displayed based on the number of second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, as in the first embodiment. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to four times, but is limited to three times or less, as is the case with the left special pattern winning port 77a or the right special pattern winning port 78a. The number of times may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 71 when viewed from the front (below the second ball entrance 67 when viewed from the front), and a horizontally long rectangular big winning hole (large opening ) 65a is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol (third symbol) in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot is announced. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 to display the stop symbol, and by displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, if a jackpot occurs as a lottery result for the first symbol, the jackpot 65a, which is normally closed, will be closed until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or until the ball is (until 10 prizes are won).

This big prize opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the big winning prize mouth 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state (jackpot state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount than usual as a reward for gaming value (gaming value). Prize balls will be paid out.

The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing plate forward to open and close around the lower side of the opening/closing plate. . The grand prize opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot based on the lottery game of the first symbol, the jackpot solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, opening the jackpot so that the ball fired right-handed can easily enter the jackpot 65a. It operates to temporarily form a state and alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

That is, when hitting right in the "probability fluctuation state" or right hitting in the "time reduction state", the ball enters the right special drawing prize opening 78a, which is made easier to enter by the electric accessory 79, and When the player wins a jackpot in the lottery game with the first symbol based on the ball, the opening and closing of the jackpot 65a is controlled and the player enters the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" again. It is configured so that subsequent games can be played while continuing the game of hitting.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that opens and closes separately from the grand winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the 7-segment display 37b corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37, the grand winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. , while the grand prize opening 65a is open, a game state is created in which a large opening provided separately from the grand prize opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the grand prize opening 65a. It may also be formed as a special game state.

Pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes (ball entry ports) 63, 65a, 75, 77a, and 78a are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing a program, as well as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as data transmission and reception circuits are built-in.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 controls the display results of the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display and variable effects or "slump effect" settings on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203b that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters, etc. are used for jackpot lottery, dynamic display settings on the first symbol display device 37, variable effects or “slump effects” settings on the third symbol display device 81, and variable display on the second symbol display device 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a lottery of display results, etc. Furthermore, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and the variable production or “slump production” setting of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, A jackpot type counter C2 used to select the stop type of the jackpot symbol, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the performance mode of the fluctuating effect or "slump effect", and a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. 1 initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

Further, a winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery on the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 4 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 26), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 34). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of four reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas) related to the first symbol, and each of these areas has a left special Entering the figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a (hereinafter, the left side special figure winning hole 77a and the right side special figure winning hole 78a may be collectively referred to as "special figure winning holes 77a, 78a") In accordance with the ball timing, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored, respectively.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and reaches the maximum value (for example, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). The configuration is such that it returns to "0" after reaching the value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value. It will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (starting winning), the jackpot random number counter in one of the first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 is stored. It is stored in area 203c1.

The value of the random number that makes the jackpot random number counter C1 a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and is set by the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reservation area. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot is determined.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 9(a). FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the first symbol (a period in which it is not in the "probability fluctuation state"), which is the "normal gaming state" or the "time reduction state". A high probability state used when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state where the first symbol has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than a low probability state, and a "probability fluctuating state (probability variable state)". It is divided into two types: one for status and one for status. The numbers of random numbers that constitute a jackpot included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state are set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number It is stored in table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the low probability state (namely, "normal game state" or "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900=1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state is 9, and the values ``28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866'' are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9/900=1/100.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value will be easily predicted from the outside, so there is a risk that there will be a high possibility that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that results in a jackpot depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), it is possible to win a jackpot. Since the value of the random number can be made difficult to predict, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") until the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of ``99'', the counter returns to ``0'' after reaching ``99''.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (starting winning), the holding area is the same as the holding area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 in the reservation area.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that results in a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that results in a loss, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance is determined. The type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is a random number that results in a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern and stop type in the fluctuation performance will be those at the time of jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on this jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 9(b). FIG. 9(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first symbol stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table that associates the jackpot types with the values of the jackpot type counter C2.

As mentioned above, the jackpot types include the "15R probability variable jackpot" in which the jackpot probability changes to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15. Afterwards, the jackpot probability becomes low probability state, and the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to "time shortened state" for 100 fluctuations, and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds, shifts to "probability fluctuation state" There is a "2R surefire jackpot". In the following explanation, the 15-round jackpot between the "15R probability variable jackpot" and the "15R regular jackpot" may be described as "common to the 15R jackpot."

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 9(b), the value "0-39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "15R probability variable jackpot", and the value "40-39" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "2R probability variable jackpot". 59" is associated with the jackpot type counter C2, and the value "60-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "15R normal jackpot".

When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "50", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "90", "15R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

In this way, in the first embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, the "15R probability variable jackpot" is selected with a 40% probability, the "2R probability variable jackpot" is selected with a 20% probability, and the "15R probability variation jackpot" is selected with a 40% probability. ``Normal jackpot'' is selected.

Note that the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, in accordance with the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99).

In the first embodiment, the rough performance mode of the variable performance at the time of jackpot and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the number of pending variable performances and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. selected. Specifically, there are "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, or "non-reach (short)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, and "normal reach" as a "reach display". There is a "Normal Reach" performance mode in which only the "Normal Reach" production elements are executed, a "Super Reach" production mode in which the "Super Reach" production elements are developed from the "Normal Reach" production elements, and a "Normal Reach" production mode as well. The "Special Reach" performance mode develops from the "Special Reach" performance element and executes the "Special Reach" production element, and the "Special Variation" production mode where the "Movie" production element dedicated to the "2R Guaranteed Variation Jackpot" is executed. Seven presentation modes are selected.

Among the production modes, there are "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (long)" production mode). "Non-reach (middle)" production mode and "Non-reach (short)" production mode are collectively referred to as "non-reach" production mode") means each display in the main display area Dm. After the "high-speed variation" variation element is performed in areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6(a)), the "low-speed variation" production element or "pseudo variation" is performed, excluding the "non-reach (short)" production mode. This is a presentation mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and does not generate a "ready-to-reach display". The details of the "high-speed fluctuation" performance element, the "slow-speed fluctuation" performance element, and the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element will be described later.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode refers to the variable presentation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) in the main display area Dm, in which the same pattern is displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3. A "reach display" in which the "Normal Reach" production element is executed immediately after the third symbol stops, and does not develop into other "Reach Display" (i.e., "Super Reach" production element or "Special Reach" production element). This is one of the presentation modes. Note that details of the performance elements of "Normal Reach", "Super Reach", and "Special Reach" will be described later.

Among the performance modes, the "Super Reach" performance mode is one of the "Reach for Reach" performance modes in which the "Super Reach" performance element is executed, which is developed from the "Normal Reach" performance element.

Among the performance modes, the "Special Reach" performance mode is one of the "Reach for Display" performance modes in which the "Special Reach" performance element is executed, which is developed from the "Normal Reach" performance element.

Among the production modes, the "special variation" production mode is a production mode that is always executed when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, and is a production mode in which the production element of "movie" is executed. Note that the details of the production elements of the "movie" will be described later.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (starting winning), the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 of the area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of currently pending variable performances (number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided with a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected depending on the number of variable performances on standby (number of pending balls), etc.

Specifically, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variable performance, first, based on the pending number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the validity of the variable performance, the current gaming state, and the current fluctuation performance are determined. One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough performance mode of the variable performance is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of a variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the performance mode is selected is different for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the production mode of the variable production according to the propriety of the variation production, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a jackpot occurs in the variation performance of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is to change the selection ratio of the production mode depending on whether there is one or not, and (3) how many balls are on hold for the variable production that is on hold.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each production mode. In other words, depending on whether you win the jackpot lottery or lose the jackpot lottery, there are different stop patterns, ie, "non-reach" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, and "special reach" presentation mode. By configuring the selection ratio of the modes (excluding the "special variation" production mode that is always selected when winning the "2R guaranteed variable jackpot") to be different, the expectation level of a jackpot for each production mode can be increased. change.

Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot lottery, you can easily select the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode, and if you do not win the jackpot lottery, you can select the "non-reach" presentation mode. To make it easy to select a mode and a "normal reach" performance mode. By configuring this way, the "Super Reach" performance mode and the "Special Reach" performance mode can be made easy to hit the jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" production mode and the "Non-Reach" production mode are difficult to hit the jackpot. It is possible to create a performance or a performance that does not lead to a jackpot, and it is possible to differentiate the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that is easy to hit a jackpot appears in a fluctuating performance, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while the performance that is easy to hit a jackpot is being performed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that is easy to win a jackpot, and difficult to select a performance that is difficult to hit a jackpot. It is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) which is the rough content of the variable performance. On the other hand, if the acquired lottery result is a loss, the performance mode (stop pattern) of the variable performance is determined based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it difficult to select a performance that is easy to hit the jackpot and easy to select a performance that is difficult to hit the jackpot. Configure to select.

As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in a variable performance, if a performance that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being executed, a jackpot is likely to occur with that variable performance, and a performance that is difficult to hit is executed. By making it difficult for a jackpot to occur in the fluctuating performance when the fluctuating performance is being carried out, and by providing a difference in the expected jackpot value for each performance mode (stop pattern), the interest of the game can be increased during the execution of the fluctuating performance.

In addition, the second reason is that when the number of times of waiting for the variable production of the third symbol (dynamic display of the first symbol; the same applies hereinafter) has reached the upper limit, the ball enters the special symbol prize openings 77a and 78a. This is to reduce as much as possible the number of wasted balls (so-called non-drawing due to overflow winnings).

To be more specific, the number of times the third symbol's fluctuating performance can be waited for is limited to a maximum of 4 times, and the fluctuating performance is executed for at least a certain amount of time. In the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the right special symbol winning hole 78a in the "state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol. In these game states, if you select a variable performance with a long variation time, the ball will frequently enter the right special drawing winning hole 78a when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached, and you will be able to take advantage of the right special drawing winning hole. Even though the ball enters the mouth 78a, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained.

In addition, even in the "normal game state", if you select a variable performance with a long fluctuation time when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol has been reached, the number of reserved balls for the third symbol will remain Since this is not digested, even if a ball enters the special symbol winning holes 77a, 78a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained.

When the above-mentioned state occurs, the player determines that no gaming value can be obtained even if the ball enters the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a, and the variable performance is exhausted and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. The ball stops firing and the game is interrupted until the situation is reached. As a result, the game is interrupted, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a short variation time is selected in a game state in which the maximum number of balls held in the third symbol is easily reached or in a number of balls held close to (or matching) the maximum number of balls held. It is configured to select the performance mode of the variable performance based on the easy stop pattern table 202d. Thereby, it is possible to prevent balls from entering the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the fluctuating performance is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time long and delaying the end of the fluctuating performance.

To be more specific, if the number of reserved balls in the variable performance is small (non-existent), if a new ball is not entered into either the special drawing prize opening 77a or 78a within the variable time of the variable performance being executed, It is not possible to start the next variable performance, and a demonstration screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform a variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 even though he or she is playing a game by shooting balls, the player may not be able to obtain the entertainment related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. I get excited about the game. In addition, since the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine in which it is difficult for balls to enter the special symbol winning holes 77a and 78a, and it is difficult to obtain gaming value. There is a possibility that the player may determine that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine and stop playing the game on that pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the production mode of the variable production based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of balls on hold for the variation production is small. There is. Thereby, a situation in which the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 is made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, details of the pending number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the reservation number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a variable effect is performed based on a ball entering the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a, the validity of the variable effect and the game at that point are determined. It is configured to refer to the pending number table 202c and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5 based on the state and the pending number of variable effects at that time. Then, a rough performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c in FIG. 10, when the number of reserved balls is "1" when extracting a loss in the "normal gaming state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a)) is selected.

Also, when extracting losses in the "normal gaming state" and the number of pending balls is "2 or 3", or when extracting losses in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of pending balls is "1", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when extracting a loss in the "normal gaming state" and the number of pending balls is "4", or when extracting a loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" and the number of pending balls is "4", In the case of "2 to 4", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when extracting "15R jackpot ("15R definite strange jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot")", no matter what game state or number of reserved balls, D table 202d4 of stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 12(a) reference) is selected.

Further, when extracting the "2R probability-variable jackpot", the E table 202d5 (see FIG. 12(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of reserved balls.

That is, if any jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4 or E table 202d5) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of balls reserved or the gaming state at that time. Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, when it is a loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2, or C table 202d3) is selected based on the number of pending balls and the gaming state at that time. .

Note that even when a jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when a jackpot is won and there are many balls on hold, a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the production element of "high-speed variation" is a "super reach" production mode of 5 seconds, It may also be configured such that a "special reach" performance mode, etc.) can be selected.

In this case, in each performance mode in which the "ready-to-reach display" is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when starting a fluctuating effect when there are four pending pitches, even if the "high-speed fluctuating" performance element is performed for 5 seconds, the "high-speed fluctuating" effect for the 5 seconds When the "fluctuation" production element ends (at the time it is recognized as the 5-second "high-speed variation" production element), in that variation production, a "loss display" will appear after the "slow variation" production element, or It is unclear whether this will develop into a “reach display”. Therefore, even if a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" performance element is performed, the "reach display" that is not the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode or the "non-reach (short)" performance mode By configuring the performance mode in which this is executed, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the fluctuating performance will be a jackpot or a loss at the time of execution of the performance element of ``high-speed fluctuation'' for 5 seconds.

In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", when the jackpot has not been won and the number of reserved balls is small, a relatively long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table 202d1) may be selected. With this configuration, even in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the third symbol display device 81 is performing the fluctuation performance, and the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to configure a situation in which the variable performance is not performed to occur less likely to occur, and to maintain the execution state of the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected in the event of a loss, and FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d. b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 11(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. . Moreover, FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a jackpot, and FIG. 12(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d. 12(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each "non-reach (long)" performance mode is set to "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Normal Reach" production mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "95" to " 97'', and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the ``Special Reach'' performance mode is set to ``98'' and ``99''. In addition, in the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" production mode and "non-reach (short)", and the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is not assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. The mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(b), in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Normal Reach" production mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "95". ” to “97”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “Special Reach” performance mode is set to “98, 99”. In addition, in the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" production mode. ” presentation mode and “non-reach (short)” presentation mode are set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(c), in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" production mode is "0" to "74". , the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Normal Reach" production mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "95". ” to “97”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “Special Reach” performance mode is set to “98, 99”. In addition, in the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" production mode. ” presentation mode and “non-reach (short)” presentation mode are set not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" performance mode accounts for 75%, the "normal reach" production mode accounts for 20%, the "super reach" production mode accounts for 3%, and the "special reach" production mode accounts for 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In addition, in the B table 202d2, 75% of the performance modes are "Non-reach (Middle)", 20% are the "Normal reach" mode, 3% are the "Super reach" mode, and 2% are the "Special reach" mode. It is set to be the selection ratio. Furthermore, in the C table 202d3, 75% of the performance modes are "Non-reach (short)", 20% are the "Normal reach" mode, 3% are the "Super reach" mode, and 2% are the "Special reach" mode. It is set to be the selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" production mode. The C table 202d3 is configured such that the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode. There is.

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 is likely to have a relatively long variation time for the selected variation effect compared to the B table 202d2 or the C table 202d3, and the B table 202d2 is likely to be selected compared to the C table 202d3. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance tends to be relatively long. In other words, the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1, and the C table 202d3 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2. It can be said that the time is likely to be shortened.

Note that the selection ratios of the "normal reach" performance mode, "super reach" performance mode, and "special reach" performance mode are set to be the same for the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is selected based on the number of balls held in the pending variable presentation. For example, when the number of pending balls in a variable performance is large, it is easy to select a "non-reach (short)" performance mode or a "non-reach (middle)" performance mode with a short variable performance time. Thereby, when the number of balls on hold for the variable performance is large, the execution efficiency of the variable performance can be improved by shortening the execution time of the variable performance to be executed and increasing the number of times the variable performance is executed.

In addition, for example, when the number of pending balls for a variable effect is small, in order to secure the time for the balls to enter the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a, the variable effect time is shorter than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. To make it easy to select a long "non-reach (long)" performance mode or a "non-reach (middle)" performance mode. As a result, it is possible to perform a "non-reach (long)" production mode or a "non-reach (middle)" production mode that has a longer variable production time than when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. By making it easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the figure winning slots 77a and 78a, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect can maintain a running status.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the production mode of the variable production obtained by starting winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" production mode, additional information is added to the variation time of the obtained variation production. A production extension time (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "extension time") for performing a performance is obtained by lottery, and during the total time of the obtained variable time and extension time, a series of "slump production" is configured to run. With this configuration, the dynamic presentation time of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the variation time of the acquired variable presentation, and the third symbol display device 81 By reducing the number of situations in which dynamic performance is not performed, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disheartened.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(a), in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" production mode is set to "0" to "4", The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Super Reach" production mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "Special Reach" production mode is set to "40" to " 99" is set. In addition, in the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" presentation mode, and the "special variation" presentation mode is set not to be selected. Further, the D table 202d4 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a jackpot, and since the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" performance mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12(b), in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" effect mode ("0" to "99"). , the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to other performance modes in which "reach display" is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when winning the "2R probability variable jackpot" is always set to be the "special variation" presentation mode. Note that since the E table 202d5 is a stop pattern table 202d that is selected at the time of a jackpot, the "non-reach" performance mode is not selected.

That is, in the D table 202d4, the selection ratio is set to be 5% for the "normal reach" performance mode, 35% for the "super reach" performance mode, and 60% for the "special reach" performance mode. Furthermore, in the E table 202d5, the "special variation" effect mode is set to have a selection rate of 100%.

Therefore, in the variable presentation when winning a jackpot, the selection rate is higher in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode, and in the variable presentation when losing a jackpot, the selection rate is higher in the order of "Normal Reach" presentation mode > The selection rate is set to increase in the order of "Super Reach" performance mode > "Special Reach" performance mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation level when each "reach display" appears is that the probability that a jackpot display result will appear is higher in the order of "special reach" production mode > "super reach" production mode > "normal reach" production mode. It is configured so that Thereby, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation for a jackpot depending on the performance mode of the variable performance, and the player can enjoy the feeling of exhilaration at the jackpot depending on the performance mode of the executed variable performance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the variable effect of losing, but the special drawing prize opening 77a , 78a, and determining the variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the ball's entry are configured so that substantially the same effect mode is selected. There is. Specifically, in the case of a losing variable performance, the configuration is such that one of the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, or the C table 202d3 is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the variable performance. The A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3 have stop pattern counters assigned to the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, or the "non-reach (short)" production mode. The values of C3 are the same, and the values of the stop pattern counters C3 allocated to other performance modes are also set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of pending pitches in the variable performance, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected, or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is selected. Since the only difference is in which mode is selected, the same presentation mode of "reach display" is selected regardless of the number of balls held. Therefore, the production mode selected at the time of starting winning and the production mode selected at the start of fluctuation are substantially the same production mode even if the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). is selected. As a result, even if a pre-read notice such as a "pending change notice" is given based on the performance mode selected at the time of winning the start, the content of the pre-read notice will not change in the variable performance that was the subject of the pre-read notice. It is possible to perform a performance without causing any discrepancies.

From the above, the situation in which the game is being played is determined based on the propriety of the variable effect, the game state at that point, and the number of pending balls of the variable effect at that point. By shortening the execution time of the fluctuating performance and increasing the number of executions of the fluctuating performance based on the above, it is possible to select a performance mode that increases the execution efficiency of the fluctuating performance.

In addition, when the number of pending balls in the fluctuation effect is large (for example, "4") and the "reach display" is selected, the stop pattern in which the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element of each "reach display" is shortened will be displayed. A table 202d may also be provided. In addition, when the number of balls on hold in the fluctuating performance is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the performance element of "low-speed fluctuation" is omitted in each performance mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each performance mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable performance. However, if the selection rate of each production mode differs depending on the number of pending pitches in a fluctuating production, when performing a pre-read notice such as a "pending change notice", it is necessary to The number of pending pitches at the time of execution of the variable performance that is the target of the look-ahead notice may be different. In such a case, a process is required to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-read notice and the content of the variable effect, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented by "1" sequentially within the range of "0 to 9", for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (starting winning), the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the area.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation performance. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to perform detailed processing in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. Determining the fluctuation pattern is specifically determining the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance. The audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 change the reach type and detailed pattern of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not to execute the preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation performance and determines only the variation time. With this configuration, there is no need for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control detailed advance notice lottery etc. necessary for executing the variable effect, so the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is no longer necessary to prepare commands for all the variation patterns of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine detailed fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby controlling the fluctuation performance. You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 where the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the production content of the variable production at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate production according to the gaming state. can.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a series of "slump effects," and in the "slump effects," a "pseudo-series" effect is used as a variation pattern of the variable effects. Even if only one variation pattern is provided, the variation pattern of the "pseudo-continuous" performance can be executed a plurality of times as a "slump performance". Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of performances while reducing the ROM capacity, and to improve the interest of the game.

Here, details of the variation pattern table 202e will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variable pattern table 202e, a losing variable pattern table 202e1 used in the case of a loss and a jackpot variable pattern table 202e2 used in the case of a jackpot are prepared. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the losing variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 13, the losing variation pattern table 202e1 is divided into groups based on the selected performance mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, the "E0: non-reach (long)" production mode, which is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, and the "non-reach (middle)" production mode are determined. For "E1: Non-reach (Middle)" which is referred to when the "Non-reach (Short)" production mode is determined, "E2: Non-reach (Short)" which is referred to when the "Non-reach (Short)" production mode is One for "E3: Normal Reach" which is referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, one for "E4: Super Reach" which is referred to when the "Super Reach" production mode is determined, and one for "Special Reach" production. It is divided into "E5: Special reach" which is referred to when the mode is determined. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random value), that is, it is a value that results in a loss, the reservation number table 202c is referred to. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area and the above stop pattern table are selected. The production mode is selected based on 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In the group (group) of the losing variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is the one in the variation performance held in the holding area. Determined as a fluctuation pattern.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "E0: Non-reach (long)" includes "high-speed variation (long)" production element + "slow variation" production element with a total variation time of "15 seconds" One variation pattern (variation time; hereinafter, "variation pattern" can of course be replaced with "variation time") is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the variation pattern in "E0: Non-reach (long)" and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "the effect element of "high-speed variation (long)" + the effect of "slow variation"". ``element'' is set as ``0 to 9'', and only ``the effect element of ``high-speed variation (long)'' + the effect mode of ``low-speed variation'''' is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "high-speed variation (long)" is selected for all values ("0 to 9") that the variation type counter CS1 can take. )" production element + "low speed fluctuation" production mode" are associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, only the "high-speed variation (long)" presentation mode + "slow variation" presentation mode is always selected as the variation pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the production mode of "low speed fluctuation" is the first half of the production element of "pseudo series", and the chance development pattern appears. , Furthermore, it is configured to be the same as the variation time of the production mode of "pseudo variation" that indicates whether or not a chance pattern appears, and the audio lamp control device 113 side changes the production mode of "slow variation" to "pseudo variation". ''.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 110 selects “high-speed variation (long)” presentation mode + “low-speed variation” presentation mode” and this is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 selects either "High-speed fluctuation (long)" performance mode + "Slow-speed fluctuation" performance mode" or "High-speed fluctuation" performance mode in the variation performance of the third symbol display device 81, as transmitted. It is configured such that it is possible to select and execute the presentation mode of ``fluctuation (long)'' + the presentation mode of ``pseudo fluctuation.'' With this configuration, it is possible to execute more effects than the type of variable time selected by the main control device 110, and while increasing the variety of effects, the number of variable times stored in the main control device 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, each performance mode will be explained in detail while referring to each performance element that constitutes each performance mode. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the performance time of each performance unit of the variable performance or "slump performance" executed in each game situation. In addition, FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing an example of the relationship between the variable time and extension time and the "slump effect", and FIG. 16(a) is an example of the "slump effect" when a loss occurs. Yes, and FIG. 16(b) is an example of the "slump effect" at the time of reach.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, in order to avoid a slump situation in which the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a fluctuating performance of the third symbol, the pachinko machine 10 is designed to avoid a slump situation in which a "slump performance" may occur. (i.e., in a “slump state”), when the variable effect of the third symbol is executed based on winnings in the special symbol winning holes 77a and 78a, a series of “slump effects” are executed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in a situation other than the "slump state" (that is, the "normal state"), the system is configured to perform a variable performance composed of predetermined performance elements. With this configuration, the performance time performed on the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, the possibility that the next starting prize will occur during the execution of a series of "slump effects" is increased, and the third symbol display By reducing the number of situations in which the device 81 is not performing a performance, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disinterested.

First, as a "normal state" production, there is a production element of "high-speed variation (long)" that is performed for "10 seconds", a production element of "high-speed variation (short)" that is performed for "5 seconds", and a production element of "high-speed variation (short)" that is performed for "5 seconds". The "low-speed fluctuation" performance element that takes place, the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element that takes place for "5 seconds," the "normal reach" performance element that takes place for "5 seconds," and the "super reach" that takes place for "15 seconds." , the production element of "Special Reach" which is carried out for "25 seconds", the production element of "Re-fluctuation" which is carried out for "5 seconds", and the production element of "Movie" which is carried out for "50 seconds". Provided. In addition, as a "slump effect" of the "slump state", there is a "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element that is performed for "5 seconds", a "pseudo fluctuation" performance element that is performed for "5 seconds", and a "0 second" performance element. A performance element of ``Development Possibility Performance'' that is performed for a longer period shorter than ``10 seconds'' and a performance element of ``Which Reach'' that is performed for ``10 seconds'' are provided. Note that the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performed in the "normal state" and "slump state" and the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation" are equivalent performance elements.

"High-speed fluctuation (long)" or "high-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, the performance elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are collectively referred to as "high-speed fluctuation") The performance elements of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (sometimes referred to as Refers to a performance element in which the third symbol displayed in (see a) is scrolled at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen.

In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop results of the previously stopped and displayed fluctuation effect or "slump effect" are mixed irregularly. (Shuffle) is performed as a performance. In the first embodiment, the difference between the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" performance element and the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element is the length of the high-speed shuffling performance time ("10 seconds" and "5 seconds"). ) (see Figure 15).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is performed, a specific performance mode ("non-reach (short)" performance) is performed. The present invention is configured so that the performance element of "low speed fluctuation" or the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation" is performed except for the performance mode of "special fluctuation" or "special fluctuation" performance mode.

The "low-speed fluctuation" performance element is a fluctuation performance performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6(a)), which is visually visible to the player after the "high-speed fluctuation" performance element described above. It refers to a performance element in which the third symbol is scrolled at a slow speed as possible. This "low-speed variation" performance element is a production mode other than the "non-reach (short)" production mode, and unless a "pseudo variation" described later is executed, the "high-speed variation" production element is followed by " 5 seconds" (see FIG. 15).

In this "low speed fluctuation" performance element, while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol, the third symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) is displayed. Stop displaying the symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it is assumed that a "reach display" has occurred and develops into a "normal reach" production element, while the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 When a different third symbol stops (excluding the chance development symbol described later), the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating effect is ended ("Pseudo series" described later) (excluding cases where it develops into). In addition, in the production element of this "low-speed fluctuation", the time when the "reach display" is established and the middle symbol row Z2 changes several frames, and the time when the "reach display" is not established and the middle symbol row Z2 stops. are configured so that they are the same time.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the "high-speed variation (long)" production element is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variation production, and then the "low-speed variation" production element is performed for "5 seconds". be exposed. In addition, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, the "high-speed variation (short)" production element is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variation production, and then the "low-speed variation" production element is performed for "5 seconds". be exposed. Then, in the "low-speed fluctuation" performance element, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) stops in order, a "loss display" appears, and the first fluctuation performance ends.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, the "low-speed variation" production element is not performed after "high-speed variation (short)" is performed for "5 seconds", and the "high-speed variation (short)" production element is not performed. After the end of the element, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) stops at the same time, a "loss display" appears, and the first variable performance ends. That is, in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, after the "high-speed variation (short)" production element is performed, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 rapidly moves without passing through the "slow variation" production element. It is configured to stop (so-called "bitter stop").

In addition, when the "loss display" is stopped and displayed in the "low speed fluctuation" performance element, the fluctuation performance ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db. The executed symbol will be deleted.

The production element of "pseudo fluctuation" is, first, when the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, the third symbol whose number is "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6(a)) is When the symbols are stopped and displayed (for example, when the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the third symbol "8" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)), In other words, "7○8 (○ is fluctuating)") corresponds to this combination.Hereinafter, this combination will be referred to as a "chance development pattern.") After that, the chance development pattern will appear. If the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) is stopped, a third symbol that is the same as the third symbol that was stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (for example, the left symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed. This corresponds to the case where the third symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the third symbol "8" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row Z3 (i.e. "778").Hereinafter, this combination will be described. (referred to as a "chance pattern"), or in the middle symbol row Z2, a third symbol whose number is "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (for example, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1. This corresponds to the case where the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3 (i.e., "788").Hereinafter, this combination will be explained. (referred to as "false chance pattern."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation", when the above-mentioned chance symbol appears in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)), the "high speed fluctuation" is again performed. (Short)'' effect is executed, and if the false chance pattern appears, the variable effect ends as is.

This "pseudo fluctuation" performance element may be performed for "5 seconds" after the "high speed fluctuation" performance element instead of the "slow fluctuation" performance element (see FIG. 15). In addition, in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation", when the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) stops, the same third symbol as the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6(a)) When the third symbol (i.e., the reach forming symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is configured to develop into a "reach display" (a "normal reach" performance element or a "which way reach" performance element) as it is.

Therefore, in this "pseudo fluctuation" performance element, when the chance pattern is stopped and displayed, the "high speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element start again from that chance pattern. A performance as if another fluctuating performance had started (so-called "pseudo-sequence".Hereinafter, the combination of the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and the "pseudo-variation" performance element is called "pseudo-sequence"). ”) is executed.

In the first embodiment, a maximum of one "pseudo consecutive" performance is executed (selected) in a "normal state" fluctuating performance, and a maximum of five "pseudo consecutive" performances can be executed in a series of "slump performances". (can be selected).

Specifically, for example, when executing one "pseudo series" performance in the "normal state", after the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is executed. The "pseudo fluctuation" performance element is executed and the chance pattern is displayed as a pseudo stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo stop"), and then the "high speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element are displayed again. is executed, a reach formation pattern appears in the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element, and develops into the "normal reach" performance element described later.

On the other hand, when performing a "pseudo series" effect five times in a "slump effect", the "pseudo variation" production element is executed after the execution of the "high-speed variation (short)" production element, and the chance pattern is simulated. Then, the second "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and "pseudo fluctuation" performance element are executed again, the chance pattern pseudo-stops, and then the third "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and the effect element of "Pseudo fluctuation" are executed and the chance eye pattern pseudo-stops, and then the fourth effect element of "High speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "Pseudo fluctuation" are executed and the chance eye symbol is executed. comes to a pseudo stop, and the fifth "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and "pseudo fluctuation" performance element are executed, a reach forming pattern appears in the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element, and then, This will develop into the production element of ``Dochida Reach'', which will be discussed later.

In addition, when performing three "false pseudo consecutive" effects in the "slump effect," the "pseudo variation" production element is executed after the "high-speed variation (short)" production element is executed, and the chance eye pattern is A false chance pattern appears without stopping, and the second "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and "pseudo fluctuation" performance element are executed again, causing a false chance pattern to appear without stopping. appears, and then the chance pattern does not stop in the third "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element, and the false chance pattern appears in the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element. appears, and then a series of "slump effects" ends.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the main control device 110 manages only a variation pattern in which the number of "pseudo-continuation" effects is executed only once, In the "slump performance" in the "slump state", the "pseudo-series" performance can be performed two or more times (up to five times). Therefore, even if the number of fluctuation patterns related to the "pseudo-sequence" performance stored in the main controller 110 is reduced, multiple patterns of "pseudo-series" performance can be executed, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. , it is possible to increase the variety of performances.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal state" and the "slump state", when a chance pattern appears in this "pseudo-connection" performance, at least some kind of "reach display" (in the "normal state") It is configured so that it always develops into the production element of ``Normal Reach'' (described later), and the production element of ``Which Reach'' (described later in ``Slump State'').

Therefore, in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation", after the production element of the "pseudo fluctuation" ends, the reach forming pattern appears (medium symbol row Z2 is changing) and the reach formation element develops into the production element of "normal reach". It is possible to provide a game feature in which a chance pattern appears and the game develops into a "pseudo series" performance again, or a false chance pattern appears and the variable performance ends as it is.

In addition, in the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation", if the fake chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6(b) (see below), the execution symbol displayed in the above is erased (hereinafter, the case where the false chance symbol stops and the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" ends is referred to as a "false pseudo series" performance). On the other hand, if the chance pattern or the reach formation pattern (middle pattern row Z2 is fluctuating) is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation effect or "slump effect" continues, so it is displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db. The displayed execution symbols are also continuously displayed until the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" ends.

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the "pseudo series" performance in the "normal state", the maximum number of pseudo stops is one, but a "pseudo series" performance in which the number of pseudo stops is performed twice or more is executed. It may be configured as follows. Furthermore, in the "Pseudo-Run" performance in the "Slump Effect", the number of pseudo-stops was set to five at most, but even if the configuration is configured to execute a "Pseudo-Run" effect in which the number of pseudo-stops is six or more times. good.

The "Normal Reach" performance element is a "Slow Fluctuation" performance element or a "Pseudo Fluctuation" performance element in which reach-forming symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see Figure 6(a)). This is a performance element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)). This "normal reach" performance element is performed for "5 seconds" after the "low speed fluctuation" performance element or the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element (see FIG. 15).

In this "Normal Reach" production element, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the main display area Dm is displayed in a larger size than usual. (not shown). In addition, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)) is scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a state where it can be visually recognized by the player. be done. Furthermore, in the "Normal Reach" production element, as the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) is enlarged, the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased (not shown). ).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of "normal reach" is executed, there are two patterns: a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a pattern that directly displays a "super reach". A pattern that develops into a performance element, a pattern that develops into a "special reach" performance element, and a pattern that once displays a "loss display" and then executes a "re-variation" performance element are prepared.

In addition, in the production element of "normal reach", if the "loss display" or "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed, the variable production ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b) ) will be deleted.

The "Super Reach" performance element is developed and executed when the "loss display" continues to fluctuate in the middle symbol row Z2 (see Figure 6(a)) in the "Normal Reach" performance element without stopping. , is a performance element that performs a "battle performance" in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" performance element is performed for "15 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" performance element (see FIG. 15).

In this "Super Reach" performance mode, while the "Super Reach" performance element is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased from the display state of the "Normal Reach" performance element, and this " The third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display" is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the "normal reach" performance element, and a plurality of character symbols appear to perform a "battle performance" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, the system is configured to suggest whether or not the variable performance is appropriate based on the result (win or loss) of the "battle performance". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect," if the player's character symbol wins over the enemy's character symbol, the variable effect suggests that it will be a "jackpot display," and the player If the side's character pattern loses to the enemy's character pattern, the fluctuating performance is configured to indicate a "loss display."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of "Super Reach" is executed, there are two patterns: a pattern that directly displays the "loss display", a pattern that directly displays the "jackpot display", and a pattern that directly displays the "loss display". A pattern is prepared in which the effect element of ``re-variation'' is executed after ``'' appears.

In addition, in the production element of "Super Reach", when the "loss display" or "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed, the variable production ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6(b) (see) will be deleted.

The "Special Reach" performance element is developed and executed when the "loss display" continues to fluctuate in the middle symbol row Z2 (see Figure 6(a)) in the "Normal Reach" performance element without stopping. , is a performance element that performs a "competitive performance" in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" performance element is performed for "25 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" performance element (see FIG. 15).

In this "Special Reach" performance element, while the "Special Reach" performance element is being executed, the display state of the "Normal Reach" performance element is changed from the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6(a)) is erased, and the third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the "Normal Reach" performance element, and a plurality of characters different from the "Super Reach" performance element appear and the "Competitive Reach" ” (not shown).

The first embodiment is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable performance based on the result (win or loss) of the "competitive performance". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competitive effect," if the player's character symbol wins over the enemy's character symbol, the fluctuating effect suggests that it will be a "jackpot display," while the game If the player's character pattern loses to the enemy's character pattern, the variable performance is configured to indicate a "loss display."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of "Special Reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display" and a direct "jackpot display" are displayed, similar to the performance element of "Super Reach". There are two patterns: a pattern that appears, and a pattern that once displays the "loss display" and then executes the "re-variation" effect element.

In addition, in the production element of "Special Reach", when the "loss display" or "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed, the variable production ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6(b) (see) will be deleted.

In addition, the configuration is such that after the execution of the "Normal Reach" performance element, the "Super Reach" performance element or the "Special Reach" performance element develops, but instead of this configuration, the "Slow Variation" performance element is When the reach-forming pattern stops later, it may be configured so that it suddenly develops into a "super reach" performance element or a "special reach" performance element without passing through the "normal reach" performance element. Further, the performance element of "Special Reach" may be configured to be performed after the performance element of "Super Reach" is executed.

The "re-variation" performance element is a performance element that is developed and executed after a "loss display" appears once in any "reach display", and a "jackpot display" appears. This "re-fluctuation" performance element is performed for "5 seconds" after any one of the "ready-to-reach displays" is executed (see FIG. 15).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only a pattern in which a "jackpot display" appears after the performance element of "revariation" is executed is prepared. That is, when the effect element of "re-variation" is executed, the "jackpot display" is always displayed afterwards. In other words, in the case of a "loss display", the performance element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the "re-fluctuation" performance element is a performance element that changes the "loss display" that is temporarily stopped and displayed to one of the "jackpot display", so the "loss display" that has not won the jackpot If this is done in this case, an inconsistency in presentation will occur. Therefore, this "re-variation" effect element is selected only in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, and is configured not to be selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1.

In addition, in the production element of "re-variation", when the "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed, the variation production ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db. The executed symbol will be deleted.

The "movie" performance element is executed when the "2R probability-variable jackpot" is won, and is a production element that causes a "jackpot display" corresponding to the "2R probability-variable jackpot" to appear. This "movie" production element is performed for "50 seconds" as a whole (see FIG. 15), and from the start of the variable production, a specific character pattern (for example, A performance is performed in which a (premier character) speaks a predetermined message (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only a pattern in which a "jackpot display" corresponding to a "2R probability-variable jackpot" appears after the performance element of "movie" is executed is prepared. That is, when the effect element of "Movie" is executed, the "Jackpot Display" of "2R Probable Variable Jackpot" is always displayed afterwards. In the first embodiment, the "movie" effect element is configured to be executed (selected) not only in the "normal state" but also in the "slump state".

In addition, when the "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed in the "movie" production element, the variable production ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db. The current execution symbol will be deleted.

Next, the effect of "slump state" will be explained. In the "slump state", when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element and the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element. The "pseudo series" effect (including the "false pseudo series" effect; the same applies hereinafter) consisting of is configured to be executed at least twice.

Conventionally, when there is no pending number of balls for a variable performance, if a new ball does not enter either of the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a within the variable time of the variable performance being executed, the next variable performance is started. Therefore, a demonstration screen or the like will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform a variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 even though he or she is playing a game by shooting balls, the player may not be able to obtain the entertainment related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. I get excited about the game. In addition, since the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine in which it is difficult for balls to enter the special symbol winning holes 77a and 78a, and it is difficult to obtain gaming value. There is a possibility that the player may determine that the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine and stop playing the game on that pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball starts and wins a prize in the special symbol winning holes 77a, 78a during the "slump state", the "slump effect" is executed, and the variable time of the obtained variable effect is executed. It is configured so that the dynamic presentation of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed for a longer period of time. This makes it difficult for the third symbol display device 81 to perform a dynamic presentation (fluctuation presentation and “slump presentation”) of the third symbol. It is possible to maintain the execution state of a dynamic performance for a long time.

In particular, if the fluctuating performance obtained by the above-mentioned start-up winning is a "non-reach" performance mode, there will be multiple "Gase Pseudo-Run" performances that are "slump performances" for a longer time than the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuating performance. is configured to run once. With this configuration, the dynamic presentation time of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the variation time of the acquired variable presentation, and the dynamic presentation time of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is increased. By reducing the number of situations in which a special performance is not performed, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disinterested.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the production mode of the variable production obtained by starting winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" production mode (i.e., the number of balls on hold is 0, so it is "15 seconds"). ("Non-reach (Long)" production mode), the time for additional production to the variable time of the obtained variable production (hereinafter referred to as "extension time") is obtained by lottery. The "slump effect" is executed during the total time of the acquired variable time and extended time. Specifically, if an extended time of "5 seconds" is obtained, two "Gase pseudo-ren" performances are executed as a "slump effect", and if an extended time of "10 seconds" is obtained. As a "slump effect", in addition to two "fake pseudo-connection" effects, a presentation mode of a "development possibility effect" to be described later is executed for "5 seconds".

In addition, the performance mode of the variable performance obtained by starting winning in the "slump state" is a performance mode that executes the "reach display" (i.e., the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, or the "special reach" performance mode). ), the extended time will not be drawn, and one or more "pseudo-ren" effects will be executed according to the obtained variable time, and the "Which way reach" effect elements will be executed, which will be described later. . The detailed contents of the various effects performed in the "slump effect" will be described later.

Furthermore, if the performance mode of the variable performance obtained by starting winning during the "slump performance" is the "non-reach (long)" performance mode, the extension time will not be drawn, and the " ``slump effect'' is additionally set. This is because the extension time has already been obtained for the "slump effect" that is already being executed, and if an additional extension time is acquired in that state, the production time of the "slump effect" will be longer than necessary. At the same time, the management of the performance time becomes complicated. Therefore, if a variable effect (all variable effects in the ``non-reach'' effect mode and the ``reach display'' mode) is obtained during the ``slump effect'', additional extension time will not be extracted. By configuring this, the processing load associated with extracting the extended time can be reduced, and the performance time of the "slump performance" can be easily managed.

In particular, if a new starting prize occurs during a "slump performance", if the currently running "slump performance" is not in execution of one performance unit of the "slump performance" based on the extended time; If the previous stage of the performance element is being executed, an additional "slump performance" is performed based on the above-mentioned starting prize, and in order to make the series of "slump performances" consistent, an additional performance is performed. In order to do this, the initially set extension time is once reset (ie, cleared to 0), and the contents of a series of "slump effects" are newly set. This means that if a performance element other than the performance element during the extended time, that is, a performance element in the previous stage of the performance element based on the extended time, is executed, the performance element corresponding to the acquired extended time will not be executed. This is because even if the extension time is reset once and the performance contents of a series of "slump effects" are set again, there will be no discrepancy in the performance contents.

In addition, in the "pseudo series" production in the "slump state", if the false chance pattern is stopped and displayed, that is, when the "false pseudo series" production is performed, one of the series of "slump productions" The performance unit ends, and at the same time, the executed symbol (main pending display or dummy pending display) displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased. Therefore, as one performance unit of the "slump performance", a "pseudo series" performance equivalent to the fluctuation performance of the "normal state" is performed, and as a display result, the false chance pattern is stopped and displayed, and the execution symbol display area By erasing the executed symbol displayed on Db0, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if one variable performance has ended.

The production element of the "development possibility production" is one of the production elements executed during the "slump production" during the "slump state", and is (pseudo) stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is a production that determines whether or not the fake chance eye symbol will be changed. Furthermore, the performance element of "development possibility performance" is a performance element exclusively for "slump performance". In this performance element of "development possibility performance", a crack appears in the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a performance as if the liquid crystal screen is broken is executed (see FIG. 45).

In the production element of this "development possibility production", if a pseudo-crack appears on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, a production in which the liquid crystal screen is broken is performed, the fake chance pattern becomes a chance. The eye pattern is replaced with the next ``pseudo-ren'' effect, or the false chance eye pattern is replaced with the reach forming pattern and the ``Which way reach'' effect element is performed. On the other hand, in the production element of "Development Possibility Production", if a pseudo-crack appeared on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the production of the liquid crystal screen being pseudo-broken was not carried out, the false chance It is configured so that a series of "slump effects" ends with the eye pattern intact.

During the "slump performance", this "development possibility performance" performance element is executed for a period longer than "0 seconds" and shorter than "10 seconds" after the execution of the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element (see Figure 15). The structure is such that the longer the execution time is, the more the amount of artificial cracks that appear on the liquid crystal screen gradually increases. Specifically, from "0 seconds" to "3 seconds", the "first development possibility effect" with a small amount of cracks is executed, and from "3 seconds" to "7 seconds", the "first development possibility effect" is executed. ``Second development success/failure performance'' with a larger amount of cracks than the ``second development success/failure performance'' is executed, and from ``7 seconds'' to ``10 seconds'', the "third development success/failure performance" with a larger amount of cracks than the "second development success/failure performance" is executed. ” is executed. The detailed content of the "development possibility production" will be described later.

In addition, if the display screen is not simulated to break in the performance element of "development possibility performance" in "slump performance", in other words, if the performance element does not evolve from the "development possibility performance", The first performance unit of the "slump performance" is completed, and the execution symbol (main suspension display or dummy suspension display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6(b)) of the cockpit display area Db is erased. Ru. Therefore, the "development possibility performance" is performed as a "slump performance", and as a display result, the fake chance symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased, so that the game It is possible to make the person feel as if the first variation performance has ended.

The production element of "Which one is reach" is one of the productions executed in the "slump production", and is a "reach display" that is one step before whether or not the "jackpot display" appears. Furthermore, the production element of "Which Reach" is a production element exclusively for "slump production". In this "Which way reach" production element, the third symbol that is the same as the reach-forming symbol and the third symbol that is different from the third symbol are displayed in the central part of the third symbol display device 81. A performance (hereinafter referred to as "which performance") competes to see whether or not to be displayed is executed (see FIG. 47(e)).

This "Which way reach" performance element is performed for "10 seconds" during the "slump performance" after the execution of the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element or the "development possibility performance" performance element (see FIG. 15).

In this "Which Reach" production element, while the "Which Da Reach" production element is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 6 (a)) disappears, similar to the "Super Reach" production element etc. Then, the third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes to a background display exclusively for the effect element of "Dochida reach", and the above-mentioned "Dochida effect" is performed (see FIG. 47(e)). ).

The first embodiment is configured to suggest whether or not the "slump effect" (variable effect) is appropriate based on the result (win or loss) of the "which effect". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "Which way effect", the third symbol, which is the same as the reach-forming symbol, is stopped and displayed in the central part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (i.e., at the position of the middle symbol row Z2). In this case, the "slump effect" suggests that it will be a "jackpot display", while if a third symbol different from the reach formation symbol is stopped and displayed in the center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, It is structured to suggest that the "slump effect" will become a "loss display."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the performance element of "Which Reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display" are displayed, similar to the production element of "Super Reach", etc. '' appears, and a pattern that once appears the ``loss display'' and then executes the ``re-variation'' effect element.

In addition, in the production element of "Which way reach", if the "loss display" or "jackpot display" is stopped and displayed, the series of "slump production" ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6(b))) is erased.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the performance time (variable time) of all the performance elements of the variable performance that can be executed in the "normal state" is an integral multiple of the performance time in units of "5 seconds" ( In other words, it is composed of "5 seconds", "10 seconds", "15 seconds", "20 seconds", "25 seconds" or "50 seconds"). Furthermore, in the ``slump state'', the performance times of all performance elements except the performance element of the ``development possibility performance'' are also configured to be integral multiples of the performance time in units of ``5 seconds''. The extension time selected in the "slump state" is also an integral multiple of the presentation time in units of "5 seconds". With this configuration, when performing a series of "slump performances" in which multiple performance elements are executed in relation to one acquired fluctuating performance, the fluctuation time (and extension time) of the fluctuating performance and the " It is possible to easily match the production time of the "slump production".

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the relationship between the execution time of the fluctuating effect (dynamic display), the extension time obtained during the "slump effect", and the effect time of the "slump effect" to be executed will be explained. do.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the "slump state" and "5 seconds" is selected as the extension time, the total presentation time is " 20 seconds'', and as a ``slump performance'', the first ``Gase Pseudo-Ren'' performance (hereinafter, the 1st ``Gase Pseudo-Ren'' performance, ``Gase Pseudo-Ren 1'', the second The "Gase Pseudo Series" performance is set as "Gase Pseudo Series 2", ..., the nth (n is a natural number) "Gase Pseudo Series n") is set, and the "Gase Pseudo Series n" is set. ``Gase Pseudo-Ren 2'' is set in ``2 Production''.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in the "slump state", if the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected and "10 seconds" is selected as the extension time, the total production time becomes "25 seconds", and as a "slump effect", "Gase pseudo-sequence 1" is set in the "1st effect", "Gase pseudo-series 2" is set in the "second effect", and "Third effect" is set. ``Development possibility performance'' corresponding to the remaining ``slump performance'' performance time (ie, ``5 seconds'') is set.

Then, each of the above-mentioned "slump effects" is performed, and the false chance eye pattern, which is the pattern corresponding to the stop symbol of the obtained variable effect ("loss display" because it is a "non-reach (long)" effect mode), is The stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends. While this "slump performance" is being performed, if a new starting prize occurs in the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a, the state will transition to the "normal state", while no new starting winning will occur. If it does, it will go into a "slump state" again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(b), when the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected in the "slump state", the total production time is "20 seconds", and the "1st production" is selected as the "slump production". ”, the first “Pseudo-Ren” performance (hereinafter, the first “Pseudo-Ren” performance is referred to as “Pseudo-Ren 1”, the second “Pseudo-Ren” performance is referred to as “Pseudo-Ren 2”,..., n The ``Pseudo-Run'' performance for the second time (n is a natural number) is set as ``Pseudo-Run n''), and the ``Which Reach'' performance element is set in the ``Second Performance''.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16(b), when the "super reach" presentation mode is selected in the "slump state," the total presentation time is "30 seconds," and the "first ``Pseudo-Run 1'' is set in ``Performance'', ``Pseudo-Run 2'' is set in ``Second Effect'', and the performance element ``Which Reach'' is set in ``Third Effect''.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16(b), when the "Special Reach" performance mode is selected in the "slump state", the total performance time will be "40 seconds", and the "first "Pseudo series 1" is set for "Production", "Pseudo series 2" is set for "Second production", "Pseudo series 3" is set for "Third production", and "Which one" is set for "Fourth production"? The production elements of ``Da Reach'' are set.

Then, each of the above-mentioned "slump performances" is performed, and the "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stop symbol of the acquired variable performance is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump performances" ends.

With this configuration, the "slump effect" is performed longer than the variable time of the acquired variable effect, the effect time performed on the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, and the effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to reduce the number of situations in which the game is not played, and to prevent players from becoming disinterested.

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. In the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E1: Non-reach (middle)" includes "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element + "low-speed fluctuation" performance element with a total fluctuation time of "10 seconds" One variation pattern is prepared. Note that in the following description of each performance element regarding the variation patterns in FIGS. 13 and 14, the term "performance element" will be omitted for convenience of explanation.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: Non-reach (middle)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "slow fluctuation". 0 to 9", and only "'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "high-speed variation (short)" is selected for all values ("0 to 9") that the variation type counter CS1 can take. )” + “low-speed fluctuation” are associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode, only "'high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation"" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the losing variation pattern table 202e1, "E2: Non-reach (short)" has one variation pattern "only "high-speed variation (short)" with a total variation time of 5 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: Non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only "high-speed fluctuation (short)". It is set so that only ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "high-speed variation (short)" is selected for all values ("0 to 9") that the variation type counter CS1 can take. )” are associated. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" performance mode, ""high-speed fluctuation (short)" only" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E3: Normal reach" includes "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" and the total fluctuation time. Two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" with a duration of "30 seconds". A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach". 0 to 6'' and ``7 to 9'' for ``high-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``high-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``normal reach.''

In other words, in the "Normal Reach" production mode when losing, the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" is 70%, and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation pattern is set to be selected at a rate of 30%. Therefore, in a variation performance that includes the production element of "normal reach" that is selected when losing, the variation pattern of "high-speed variation (long)" + "slow variation" + "normal reach" is more likely to be selected (70%). There is.

In the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E4: Super reach" includes "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "super reach" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds", and the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds". Two fluctuation patterns can be selected: "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach" with a fluctuation time of "40 seconds" A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in the "E4: Super Reach" performance mode and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is ""High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach"". "0-7" for "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach" "8,9", It becomes.

In other words, in the "super reach" performance mode when losing, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 80%, and the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo reach" is 80%. The variation pattern of "variation" + "high-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "super reach" is set to be selected at a rate of 20%. Therefore, in the "super reach" performance mode selected when losing, the variation pattern of ""high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" + "super reach"" is likely to be selected.

In the loss variation pattern table 202e1, "E5: Special reach" includes "high-speed variation (long)" + "slow variation" + "special reach" with a total variation time of "40 seconds", and Two fluctuation patterns can be selected: "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Special reach" with a fluctuation time of "50 seconds" A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach". 0 to 8, and 9 for ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Special reach''. .

In other words, in the "Special Reach" performance mode when losing, the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" is 90%, and the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo reach" is 90%. The variation pattern of "variation" + "high-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "special reach" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%. Therefore, in the "Special Reach" performance mode that is selected when losing, the variation pattern of "'High Speed Variation (Long)' + 'Low Speed Variation' + 'Special Reach'" is likely to be selected.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of fluctuation type counters together (selecting whether or not to display a notice, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected performance mode. Specifically, the production modes are "E6: Normal Reach" which is referred to when the "Normal Reach" production mode is determined, and "E7: Super" which is referred to when the "Super Reach" production mode is determined. "Reach", "E8: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is determined, and "E9: Special Variation" which is referred to when the "Special Variation" production mode is determined. It is divided into two parts: Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number), the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area and the gaming state at the time of starting winning. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on and, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the performance mode. In the group of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance held in the holding area. be done.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Normal reach" includes "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" and the total fluctuation time. "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow variation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-variation" with a total variation time of "25 seconds" and "High-speed variation (long)" with a total variation time of "30 seconds" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach"" and "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" Four fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach". 0'', ``1, 2'' for ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Slow fluctuation'' + ``Normal reach'' + ``Re-variation'''', ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + `` "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" "3-5", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" ” + “Normal reach” + “Re-variation” is “6-9”.

In other words, in the "Normal Reach" production mode when hitting a jackpot, the variation pattern of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow variation" + "Normal reach" is 10%, and "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow variation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-variation" fluctuation pattern is 20%, "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation pattern 30% pattern, 40% variation pattern of "high-speed variation (long)" + "pseudo variation" + "high-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "normal reach" + "re-variation" is set to be selected.

Therefore, in the "Normal Reach" production mode selected at the time of a jackpot, "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation" The variation pattern is more likely to be selected (40% of the total). However, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-variation", "high-speed fluctuation" By configuring the system so that ``(long)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``high-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + ``normal reach'' are also selected, the gameplay allows you to expect a jackpot from any fluctuation pattern. Can be provided.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Super reach" includes "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "super reach" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" and the overall fluctuation time of "30 seconds". "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-variation" with a fluctuation time of "35 seconds" and "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" )" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach"" and "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" with a total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" ” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Super reach” + “Re-fluctuation” are available for selection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach". "0, 1", "2-4" for "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" + "Re-variation", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + " ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Super reach'', ``5, 6'', ``High speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High speed fluctuation (short)'' )” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Super reach” + “Re-fluctuation”, it is “7-9”.

In other words, in the "Super Reach" performance mode when hitting a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" is 20%, and the fluctuation pattern of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow speed fluctuation" is 20%. The variation pattern of ``Fluctuation'' + ``Super Reach'' + ``Re-variation'' is 30%, ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Super Reach''. "' fluctuation pattern is 20%, and the fluctuation pattern of ''High-speed fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'Super reach' + 'Re-fluctuation'" is 20%. It is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" performance mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern that includes the "re-fluctuation" performance element (i.e. "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation") "Fluctuation" and "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Super reach" + "Re-variation") are likely to be selected (overall 60%). However, variation patterns that do not include the production element of "re-variation" (i.e. "high-speed variation (long)" + "slow variation" + "super reach") or "high-speed variation (long)" + "pseudo variation" + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Super reach'') can be configured so that a jackpot can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E8: Special reach" includes "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "special reach" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds", and the overall fluctuation time of "40 seconds". "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-variation" with a fluctuation time of "45 seconds" and "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with a total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" )" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Special reach"" and "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "55 seconds" ” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Special reach” + “Re-fluctuation” are available for selection, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set for each fluctuation pattern. are associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach". "0-2", "3, 4" for "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + " "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Special reach" "5-7", "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" )" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-fluctuation"" is "8,9".

In other words, in the "Special Reach" performance mode at the time of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" is 30%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow speed fluctuation" is 30% The variation pattern of ``Fluctuation'' + ``Special Reach'' + ``Re-variation'' is 20%, ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Special reach. "' fluctuation pattern is 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'Special reach' + 'Re-fluctuation'" is 30%. It is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" performance mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern that does not include the "re-fluctuation" performance element (i.e., "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super Reach"), etc. , "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'Super reach'") is more likely to be selected (60% of the total). However, fluctuation patterns that include the production element of "re-fluctuation" (i.e. "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation") or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + A game where you can expect a jackpot from any fluctuation pattern by configuring it so that "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-fluctuation") are also selected. can provide sex.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, only one variation pattern of "Movie" with a total variation time of "50 seconds" is prepared in "E9: Special variation". In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: Special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "movie", and only "movie" is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is set to be selectable. That is, when the stop type of the jackpot is "2R probability variable jackpot", "movie" is always selected as the variation pattern.

When "Movie" is selected by the main control device 110, a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to "Movie" is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In this pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the "movie", for example, a "chicken" or "girl" etc. is displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the third symbol display device 81. While displaying the character, the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol (for example, "341"), or as a specific lamp lights up or flashes, the third symbol is finally identified. This includes fluctuating patterns that stop at the symbol.

In this way, by configuring the system so that a relatively long variation pattern is likely to be selected when a jackpot has been won, the entertainment of the game can be improved by enriching the content of the variation production in which a jackpot occurs. be able to. In addition, if you have not won a jackpot, that is, if you lose, the structure is configured so that a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected, so that the content of the variation effect in the case of a loss is shortened, and the variation effect is changed. Can be digested efficiently.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a preview effect that foretells the start of a jackpot or the start of a "reach display" before or during a change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when a reach is achieved, , it may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols are shifted from the third symbol to be stopped at the end (for example, one symbol is shifted before or after losing, etc.).

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" was provided, but a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" was not provided, and in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R Only the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of "normal jackpot" may be defined. In this case, when the jackpot type is "2R probability variable jackpot", "movie" may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2.

Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 10, only "Movie" is selected when it becomes a "2R certain strange jackpot", but when it becomes a "2R certain strange jackpot", one variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of variation patterns. It may be selected. In this case, even in a group dedicated to "2R probability variable jackpot" like the "15R jackpot common" group, the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to the variation pattern selected when "2R probability variation jackpot" occurs. The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in a certain holding area may be determined as the fluctuation pattern in the changing performance held in that holding area.

Furthermore, among the performance modes selected by the main control device 110, a performance mode may be provided in which a "pseudo fluctuation" production element is executed in which the number of pseudo stops (number of chance pattern stops) is twice or more. . Alternatively, the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element may not be executed, but a chance pattern may be made to appear in the "slow fluctuation" performance element to develop the "pseudo series" performance.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Further, when the winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the winning random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26). At the same time, it is updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67. Ru. There are 50 random number values that will win, and the range is from 5 to 54. That is, when the acquired value of the winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 54", it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. At the same time, the electric accessory 79 of the right side special figure winning hole 78a is activated, and the right side special figure winning hole 78a is opened for a predetermined time.

On the other hand, if the value of the acquired winning counter C4 is not in the range of "5 to 54", that is, if it is in the range of "0 to 4" or "55 to 99", it is determined that you have lost and the second The "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the symbol display device 83, and the electric accessory 79 does not operate.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is provided with various tables. and the above-mentioned tables 202a to 202e, the setting of the jackpot lottery and the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the display on the second symbol display device 83. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as lottery results, can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203b shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and input/output data. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 33). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power failure, etc. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as processing at the time of a power outage.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a pending ball counter 203a, a pending ball storage area 203c, a pending ball execution area 203d, a main slump counter 203e, a pending device drive flag 203f, and a pending device drive timer 203g.

The reserved ball number counter 203a counts balls entering the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (hereinafter referred to as special drawing winning balls) detected during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The dynamic display of the first symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (the dynamic display of the first symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the third symbol corresponding to the first symbol up to four times.

The reserved pitch number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (S813 in FIG. 33). Then, each time a starting prize in either of the special symbol winning holes 77a, 78a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4". (See S204 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first symbol (fluctuation effect of the third symbol) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 28).

The value of this held ball number counter 203a (namely, the number of held balls of the first symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a held ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 27). The held ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the held ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of balls held in the first symbol dynamic display (fluctuating effect) held in the main control device 110 by the number of balls commanded. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the first symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a starting prize is detected, a command for the number of reserved balls is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, so that the dynamic display (fluctuation) of the first symbol managed in the audio lamp controller 113 Even if the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) deviates from the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the number of balls on hold for the next received ball The deviation can be corrected using the pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display held pitch number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved pitch number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a held pitch number command to the audio lamp control device 113, in the held pitch number command, only the value of the held pitch number counter 203a that is incremented by 1 is used. However, along with the start winning that triggered the addition of the number of reserved balls counter 203a, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8), Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the main controller 110 is A number of commands are transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are transmitted by the number of reserved balls command, are used to execute a fluctuation performance based on the respective values. It reads ahead before executing the variable performance and determines how the variable performance will turn out (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable performance. Then, based on the results of the pre-read judgment, it is possible to decide on the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and execution timing of the "pending change notice".

In addition, the number of pending balls command indicating the number of pending balls for the variable performance and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command that indicates the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., which is different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of a ball entering the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a, and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. is generated based on the entered ball. It may be configured to generate commands similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) and send them to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, by reusing the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203c stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern acquired from the counter buffer 203b upon detection of a starting prize in either of the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a. This is a memory for storing the values of the selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, respectively. During the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered either the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (starting winning), the MPU 201 inputs each counter C1 to C3 from the counter buffer 203b. , CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas (holding) so that the data (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the starting winning of 1 of the first symbol can be stored (holding) for up to four times. (first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203d is used for starting the execution or for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol being executed, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the dynamic display of the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referenced in processing such as setting of variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable effect, it executes processes such as a jackpot lottery, setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. Therefore, among the data corresponding to each starting winnings (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the above-mentioned held ball storage area 203c, data corresponding to one starting winning is used for this held ball execution. Shift to area 203d. Note that a shift in the first embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8 again, details of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d are used to perform jackpot lottery of the first symbol, dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, variable performance setting of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is used by MPU 201 of main controller 110.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is used to set the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the variable performance of the third symbol display device 81. A jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the production mode of the variable performance, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to determine the fluctuation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203c stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning).

The reserved ball storage area 203c is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4) each include a jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4 are included in one reserved ball storage area 203c. However, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203c contains data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters one of the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a (starting winning). Up to 4 times can be stored, but in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four vacant areas (holding areas 1st to 4th). is memorized. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the starting winnings to the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a that are older in time, and the reservation first area stores the data corresponding to the starting winnings in the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a that are the oldest in terms of time. Data corresponding to the starting prize to 78a will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203d is composed of only one area. Like the reserved ball storage area 203c, this reserved ball execution area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the MPU 201 transfers the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the first holding area of the holding ball storage area 203c to this holding ball. The execution area 203d is shifted to each area 203d1 to 203d4. Then, the data shifted to the held ball execution area 203d is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 29), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the random value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reservation first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 in the reservation ball execution area 203d. Similarly, the random value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the random value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the fluctuation type counter The random value in the storage area 203c4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203d4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the held ball execution area 203d is completed, the first held area becomes vacant, so the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the held ball storage area 203c. Shift processing is performed to shift data to areas (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203c.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c will be explained. For example, if the value of the held ball number counter 203a is "4" when the start judgment of the variable effect is made, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the held ball storage area 203c. do. In this state, the data in the first holding area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203d, and when the first holding area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the holding ball execution area 203d. Shift to the area with one lower number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the second reservation area is shifted to the first reservation area, the data in the third reservation area is shifted to the second reservation area, and the data in the fourth reservation area is shifted to the third reservation area.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the pending pitch number counter 203a is "2" when the start determination of the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the pending second area to the first pending area. , finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the holding areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The main slump counter 203e is configured to be updatable within a predetermined range (“0 to 2” in the first embodiment), and is a counter that is referenced by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not it is in a “slump state.” That is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0", the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recognizes it as a "slump state" in which a "slump effect" is executed, and enters the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a. A "slump effect" is executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the starting prize.

In the first embodiment, during a demonstration performance in which the third symbol display device 81 is not performing a fluctuating performance or a "slump performance", a predetermined period of time (equivalent to an extended time) after the start of the demonstration performance. In one embodiment, after "10 seconds" have elapsed, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to a predetermined value (ie, "2"), and the above-mentioned "slump state" is entered. Then, in the "slump state", when a ball starts winning in the special symbol winning holes 77a, 78a, a "slump effect" is executed on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the variable effect based on the starting winning. is configured to do so.

The value of this main slump counter 203e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When the main slump counter 203e enters a "slump state", the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "2". On the other hand, the value of the main slump counter 203e is increased by 1 based on the starting winnings to the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a during the "slump state" (that is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0"). Subtracted. That is, when the main slump counter 203e is set to a value larger than "0", the MPU 201 calculates the value of the main slump counter 203e (i.e. , 2 starting winnings), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a "slump effect".

In addition, in the "slump state", if the performance mode is such that "reach display" is performed as a fluctuation pattern of the obtained fluctuation performance, the MPU 201 clears the value of the main slump counter 203e to "0" and temporarily returns to the "slump state". ” is eliminated, and the “slump effect” is not performed based on subsequent starting prizes. This is because the variation pattern that includes "reach display" is performed for a relatively long variation time, so there is a possibility that a new prize will be won during that variation time. Therefore, until such a case, there is little need to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the starting winnings in the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a, so the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, the subsequent performance will be performed as a "normal state" instead of a "slump state" until the third symbol display device 81 finishes its performance and enters the "slump state" again.

Here, after setting an additional "slump effect", if a new starting prize occurs during the execution of the "slump effect", if you try to set an additional "slump effect", the "slump effect" Complicated processing is required to understand the execution time of the performance and to ensure consistency of the performance, which may increase the processing load. In addition, if the number of pending fluctuation performances is "2" or more, it is a situation where the performance can be continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81, so the "slump performance" is longer than the performance time of the acquired fluctuation performance. ” will be less effective.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if an additional starting winning occurs during the execution of the "slump effect" and the number of pending variable effects becomes "2" or more, the subsequent It is configured to perform a fluctuating performance without executing a "slump performance" in the performance. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a variable effect without executing a ``slump effect'' in a situation where the effect of executing a ``slump effect'' is poor (that is, a state where a certain number of pending variable effects have accumulated). Since there is no need to perform complicated processing to maintain the consistency of the "slump effect," the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

The holding device drive flag 203f is a flag indicating that the holding device solenoid 73f of the holding device 73 is driven in an on state. In the first embodiment, when the condition for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 and winning the ball into the dummy prize opening 75 is satisfied, the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON, and the holding device drive described later is set to ON. The value of the timer 203g is set (in the first embodiment, "1250"). Thereafter, each time the main controller 110 performs timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), the value of the reservation device drive timer 203g is subtracted, and when the value reaches a predetermined value (i.e., "0"), The holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined period of time (“2000 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). When the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on, the balls held in the holding device 73 are released and are configured to flow into the dummy prize opening 75 provided on the downstream side.

This holding device drive flag 203f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the first embodiment, when the main slump counter 203e enters a "slump state" and the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0" (for example, "2"), the ball is detected in the holding device 73 by the held ball detection switch 73g. In the state where it is detected that the ball is on hold, if a ball starts winning into the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a, if the performance mode of the variable performance based on the starting winning does not generate "reach display", In the ``slump effect'', a plurality of effect elements (for example, a ``false pseudo-series'' effect) in which the main hold display or the dummy hold display is exhausted are executed. Therefore, in order to match the content of the performance with the main hold display or the dummy hold display, the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on in order to cause the balls held in the hold device 73 to enter the dummy winning opening 75. is set (see S211 in FIG. 27).

In addition, in the first embodiment, in the "slump state", no balls are detected by the held ball detection switch 73g, and when no balls are held in the holding device 73, there is no ball to be won in the dummy winning opening 75. do not have. Therefore, even if a ball wins in the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a in the "slump state", if the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the holding device solenoid 73f is not driven. The drive flag 203f is left set to off.

In addition, in the first embodiment, if the fluctuating effect obtained based on the start winning of the ball to the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a during the ``slump state'' is the ``reach display'', the ``slump effect'' is executed. However, since it is configured to execute a "pseudo series" performance that does not erase one executed symbol and does not execute a "pseudo series" performance that does not erase one executed symbol, the hold that is a dummy pending display in the first place There is no need to display a pattern. Therefore, even if a ball starts to win in the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a in the "slump state", when the "reach display" is included in the variation pattern of the obtained variation effect, the holding device solenoid 73f is activated. The reservation device drive flag 203f is left set to off so that it is not driven.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on, a value ("1250" in the first embodiment) is set in the hold device drive timer 203g, which will be described later. Then, in the hold device control process (see FIG. 30) executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of the main controller 110, which is executed every 4 milliseconds, this hold device drive flag 203f is turned on. If so, the value of a reservation device drive timer 203g, which will be described later, is subtracted. Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes “0”, the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined period (“2000 milliseconds” in the first embodiment) (see S504 in FIG. 30). By turning on the predetermined period, the ball held in the holding device 73 is reliably released and the ball flows into the dummy prize opening 75, and the holding device drive flag 203f is set to OFF. (See S505 in FIG. 30).

The holding device drive timer 203g is a timer for measuring the time from when the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on to when the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on. If the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0" while the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on, the MPU 201 determines that it is time to release the ball held in the holding device 73. Then, the holding device solenoid 73f is driven (ie, turned on) for a predetermined period of time.

The holding device drive timer 203g is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the ball enters the "slump state" and the ball starts winning into the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a while the ball is held in the holding device 73, the production mode of the variable performance based on the starting winning is changed to " If it is not a variation pattern that causes a "reach display", the above-mentioned holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON (see S211 in FIG. 27) in order to make the held ball enter the dummy winning hole 75, and this holding "1250" is set in the device drive timer 203g.

Thereafter, in the hold device control process (see FIG. 30) executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of the main controller 110, which is executed every 4 milliseconds, the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on. In this case, the value of this reservation device drive timer 203g is subtracted by "1". Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0" (that is, "5 seconds" after the start of the "slump effect"), the holding device solenoid 73f is activated for a predetermined period (in the first embodiment, "2000 milliseconds") (see S504 in FIG. 30), the ball held in the holding device 73 is released, and about "1 second" after that, the "first effect" in the "slump effect" is turned on. "After 6 seconds" from the start of ", the ball released from the holding device 73 is caused to flow into the dummy prize opening 75."

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a series of "slump effects", the displayed execution symbols and pending symbols and the execution of the "slump effect" in which a plurality of effect elements are executed. In order to maintain consistency with the number of times, when a predetermined period of time (in the first embodiment, 6 seconds) has elapsed since the ball entered the special drawing openings 77a and 78a and the ``slump effect'' started, The ball held in the holding device 73 is entered into a dummy winning hole 75, and a holding symbol is displayed as a dummy holding display. Then, each time one production unit ("Gase pseudo-ren" production) of a series of "slump production" ends, the execution symbol is erased, and the pending symbol, which is a dummy suspension display, is moved to the execution symbol, and then moved. By starting one performance unit in the next "slump performance" based on the executed pattern, one performance unit in the "slump performance" is completed, making it as if the variable performance had been completed once. Execute the performance. With this configuration, the dynamic presentation time of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the variation time of the acquired variable presentation, and the dynamic presentation time of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is increased. By reducing the number of situations where no special performance is being performed, it is possible to prevent players from becoming discouraged and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the number of prize balls in the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a and the dummy winning hole 75 is the same, three. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the prize into the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a or the dummy winning hole 75 based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. Therefore, the player can determine whether the performance being performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a fluctuating performance in a "normal state" or a "slump performance" in a "slump state" based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. ”, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game even if a “slump effect” is performed that lasts longer than the actual variable time of the variable effect. can do.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol holding lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large prize opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side, an electric accessory solenoid for driving the electric accessory 79, and a reservation device solenoid 73f provided in the reservation device 73 described above are connected. The MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these devices via the input/output port 205.

As described above, the holding device solenoid 73f provided in the holding device 73 moves the lock piece 73e from the rear wall 73d (see FIG. 5) into the passage of the holding device 73 (to the front side of the pachinko machine 10) in the off state. This is a drive mechanism that causes the lock piece 73e to be in the protruding state and to be recessed in the rear wall 73d in the on state.

When the lock piece 73e driven by the holding device solenoid 73f protrudes from the rear wall 73d (that is, when the holding device solenoid 73f is off), the holding portion locking portion 73e1 of the locking piece 73e is activated by the holding ball holding portion 73b. The downward rotation (see FIG. 5) is prevented, and the state in which the ball is held in the holding device 73 is maintained. On the other hand, when the lock piece 73e driven by the holding device solenoid 73f is recessed into the rear wall 73d (that is, when the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on), the holding ball holding portion by the holding portion locking portion 73e1 of the locking piece 73e Since the downward support of the holding ball holding part 73b is removed, the downward rotation of the holding ball holding part 73b is allowed, and the balls held in the holding ball holding part 73b flow down to the downstream side of the holding device 73. , flows into the dummy prize opening 75.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and a held ball detection switch provided in the holding device 73. 73g is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The held ball detection switch 73g is an optical detection switch that detects whether or not a ball exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element as described above. When this is detected, an on signal is output to the MPU 201. On the other hand, if it is detected that no sphere exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element, an off signal is output to the MPU 201. Therefore, the MPU 201 can recognize whether or not a ball is held in the holding device 73 based on the detection output of the held ball detection switch 73g.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs turning on and off from a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects and continuous output. It controls the setting of the display mode of performances performed on the third symbol display device 81, such as advance notice performances.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the configuration is such that commands cannot be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to and from each other.

The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the back image of the "Super Reach" production mode, etc., and the third symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the press of the frame button 22. Instruct the display device 81 to display the information.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 displays the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and the like. ``slump effect'', which controls continuous preview effects.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Here, the detailed electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data include a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a pending change table. At least a slump effect table 222e and a slump effect table 222f are stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The audio lamp control device 113 receives a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type that are acquired from the counter buffer 203b upon starting winnings in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d, a pending display setting process (see FIG. 38), which is a prefetch process, is executed. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 executes a pending display setting process, which is also a pre-reading process, based on a dummy pending command transmitted in conjunction with the winning of a ball to the dummy winning hole 75 in the main control device 110.

Then, by this pending display setting process (see FIG. 38), what kind of effect will result from the pending fluctuating effect or "slump effect" that is the target of the pre-reading process (whether it will be a jackpot or not). , whether or not the "reach display" will be displayed, etc.) before the execution of the fluctuation effect or "slump effect" to determine the execution of various effects, or refer to the pending change table 222e to determine the It executes control such as determining the presentation content (and execution timing) of the "notice notice".

In addition, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a slump command (described later) indicating that a "slump state" has started from the main control device 110, and subsequently receives a fluctuation pattern command, the audio ramp control device 113 controls the slump effect table 222f. Refer to , and execute control related to "slump effect".

Note that details of the pending change table 222e and the slump effect table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 includes a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-retention ball counter 223b, a dummy reservation ball counter 223c, a reservation change counter 223d, a reservation display information storage area 223e, a sub-slump flag 223f, a slump effect timer 223g, and a slump effect storage area 223h. , a pending information storage area 223i, and an execution information storage area 223j.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the fluctuation effect should be started in the on state. The fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1507 in FIG. 40). Then, it is turned off when the variable effect or "slump effect" is set on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1602 in FIG. 42).

When the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 starts the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" if there is a fluctuation performance or "slump performance" on standby. A variation effect process (see FIG. 42) is performed to execute the process.

The sub-held ball number counter 223b is a variable performance (dynamic display) performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), similar to the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. In other words, the sub-pending pitch counter 223b is configured to count only the number of times the variable performance is actually held, and not to count the number of times the performance unit of "slump performance" 1 is executed.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of held balls based on the command sent from the main control device 110, and the sub-held ball number counter 223b manages the number of held balls. There is.

Specifically, the audio lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls of the variable effect by the ball entering the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a, and the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. In this case, when a command for the number of held pitches transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the number of held pitches counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the command for the number of held balls (that is, the value added to the number of held balls counter 203a of the main controller 110) The number of held balls of the held variable performance) is stored in the sub-held ball number counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37).

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command that are transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the held pitch counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and responds to the reception of these commands. When the mode of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 is set accordingly, the value of the sub-pending ball counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1613 in FIG. 42). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-pending pitch counter 223b in accordance with the command sent from the main controller 110 in conjunction with the update of the pending pitch counter 203a. The value of the sub-pending pitch counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the pitch counter 203a.

The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is used to display the held symbols and executed symbols on the third symbol display device 81, together with the value of the dummy held ball number counter 223c, which will be described later. That is, in response to receiving a held pitch number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of held balls indicated by the command in the sub held pitch number counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37), or stores the number of held balls indicated by the command in response to reception of a dummy held pitch command. The value of the dummy held ball counter 223c is updated based on the value of the slump production timer 223g (described later) (see S1207 in FIG. 37 or S1113 in FIG. 36), and the sub-pitch is updated in response to reception of the fluctuation pattern command and stop type command. At the timing of updating the value of the reserved pitch number counter 223b (see S1613 in FIG. 42), the value of the sub reserved pitch number counter 223b after storage or update and the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c, which will be described later, are displayed. In order to notify the control device 114, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S1304 in FIG. 38 or S1615 in FIG. 42).

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved pitch number command, it displays the value of the reserved pitch number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the sub reserved pitch number counter 223b and the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113. The pending symbols corresponding to the value and the execution symbol indicating one performance unit of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. , to control the drawing of images.

As described above, the value of the sub-pending pitch number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the sub-pending pitch number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, in a gaming state other than the "slump state", that is, the "normal state", the number of pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 is also controlled by the main control. It can be changed while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203a of the device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable performance is suspended.

The dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of times a ball enters the dummy winning hole 75 in the "slump state". That is, the dummy held ball number counter 223c is configured to count only the number of held balls in one performance unit of the "slump performance" and not to count the number of held balls in the variable performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) The pending symbol and the executed symbol are displayed, and when it is not in a "slump state", the execution of the fluctuating effect and the remaining number of executions are shown, while when the "slump effect" is executed in the "slump state", a series of It is configured to show the execution and remaining number of executions of a plurality of performance units in the "slump performance".

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the dummy holding command transmitted from the main control device 110, it adds 1 to the value of the dummy holding pitch counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 37). In addition, the audio ramp control device 113 controls the "first performance" which is the first performance unit of the "slump performance" (i.e., the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation"). At this timing, when the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is larger than "0", the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (see S1113 in FIG. 36).

That is, when the "slump effect" is started based on the start winning of the ball into the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", "6 After a few seconds, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released toward the dummy winning hole 75 and enters the dummy winning hole 75. Then, when the main control device 110 detects that the ball has entered the dummy winning hole 75, it transmits a dummy hold command to the voice lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 receives a dummy holding command from the main control device 110 when approximately 6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the ``first effect'' in the ``slump effect'', and based on the reception, sets the number of dummy held pitches. Add 1 to the value of the counter 223c. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a held pitch number command for display based on the sum of the added value of the dummy held pitch number counter 223c and the value of the sub-held pitch number counter 223b, and generates a held pitch number command for display. Send to.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which one unit of performance ends from the start of the "slump performance", that is, the timing at which one "gase pseudo-ren" performance ends, using a slump performance timer 223g, which will be described later. At the timing when the first "false pseudo series" effect ends (according to the value of a slump effect timer 223g, which will be described later), the value of the dummy reserved ball counter 223c is subtracted by 1. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a held pitch number command for display based on the sum of the subtracted value of the dummy held pitch number counter 223c and the value of the sub-held pitch number counter 223b. Send to.

As described above, when the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the sub-reserved pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 and the dummy reserved pitches are displayed. The pending symbols corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223c and the executed symbols indicating the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. , to control the drawing of images.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a larger number of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) than the number of reserved balls in the actual variable performance, and also to display the number of reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)). Even when the ``slump performance'' is performed more times, each performance unit of the ``slump performance'' can be made consistent with the reserved symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance in which a winning/failure lottery is performed is performed more times than the actual number of fluctuating performances without causing discrepancies in the performance.

The value of the dummy held ball counter 223c is configured to be incremented by 1 in a series of "slump effects", and subtracted by 1 with the execution of one effect unit in the "slump effects". It is composed of That is, the value of the dummy reserved pitch counter 223c becomes "1" at the maximum due to a series of "slump effects", and is configured such that it never becomes a value of "2" or more.

The pending change counter 223d is a counter that randomly determines whether or not to execute the "pending change notice" in the pending symbols and execution symbols in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as a "pending change notice", the display color of the pending symbol and the executed symbol is changed from white, which is the normal display mode, to "blue", which is a blue display mode, to green display mode. It is configured to be able to change to "green" or "red" in a red display mode.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot according to the pending ball number command received from the main controller 110. Prefetching processing can be executed based on the random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d. In the pre-reading process based on the number of reserved pitches command, the production mode of the variable performance corresponding to the number of reserved pitches command is grasped, and based on the production mode, a "retention change notice" is performed by the pending change counter 223d and the pending change table 222e. A lottery will be made to determine whether or not.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute a prefetch process based on the dummy suspension command received from the main control device 110, as in the case of receiving the number of reserved pitches command. In the look-ahead processing based on the dummy hold command, it is determined whether or not the "slump effect" to be executed is appropriate, and based on the suitability, whether or not to perform a "pending change notice" by referring to the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e. will be selected by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the "pending change notice" even for the pending symbols related to the "slump effect", thereby enriching the variations of the effect.

This pending change counter 223d is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") in the counter update process of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1118 in FIG. 36), and the maximum value is (For example, in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the pending change counter 223d is updated (for example, incremented by 1) once each time the main process loops (see S1117 in FIG. 36).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a held ball number command or a dummy held command is received from the main controller 110, a held display setting process (see FIG. 38) to be described later is executed, and the held ball number command is It grasps the propriety of the performance mode of the fluctuating performance shown or the "slump performance" indicated by the dummy hold command, and refers to the value of the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e based on the grasped contents, and Whether or not to execute "change notice" and the display mode are determined. Then, the execution possibility and display mode of the determined "reservation change notice" are stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e, which is indicated by the sum of the value of the sub-retention pitch counter 223b and the value of the dummy reservation pitch counter 223c. Ru. Note that details of the pending display information storage area 223e will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the pending change table 222e will be explained. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a pending ball count command or a dummy pending command from the main control device 110, it refers to the pending change table 222e based on the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time, and It is determined whether or not to give a "notice of change" and the changing color (display mode) of the "notice of pending change". As shown in FIG. 18, the pending change table 222e is divided into groups based on the validity of the performance to be performed and the selected performance mode.

Specifically, one for "slump performance" when losing, one for "non-reach" performance mode when losing, one for "normal reach" production mode when losing, and one for "super reach" production mode when losing, One for the "Special Reach" performance mode when you lose, one for the "Slump Performance" when you win a jackpot, one for the "Normal Reach" production mode when you hit a jackpot, one for the "Super Reach" production mode when you won a jackpot, and one for the "Special Reach" production mode when you won a jackpot. It is divided into two types: one for the reach mode and the other for the special variation mode at the time of a jackpot. Possible values of the pending change counter 223d are associated with each divided group.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "green" display mode of the "pending change notice" is the presentation mode including any "reach display" (i.e., the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, "Special Reach" production mode, or "Which Da Reach" production element as a "slump production"), or a production mode in which a "jackpot display" occurs (for example, "Special Variation" production mode) is configured to be selected. In other words, when a pending symbol or an executed symbol with a "green" display mode is displayed as a "reserved change notice," at least one of the fluctuation effects or ``slump effects'' corresponding to the pending symbol or executed symbol is displayed. It is configured so that it is confirmed that the performance mode including the "reach display" will be executed. With this configuration, when a pending symbol with a "green" display format appears as a "pending change notice", the player can be confident that at least a "ready-to-reach display" that can lead to a jackpot will be executed. Until the variable performance or "slump performance" corresponding to the suspended symbol is started, the mood of the player can be raised based on the feeling of expectation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "red" display mode of the "pending change notice" is only displayed in the "super reach" production mode, "special reach" production mode, or "special variation" production mode. configured to be selected. In other words, when a pending symbol or an executed symbol with a "red" display mode is displayed as a "reserved change notice", in the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" corresponding to the pending symbol or executed symbol, the "super reach" ” production mode, “special reach” production mode, or “special variation” production mode is determined to be executed. With this configuration, when a pending symbol with a "red" display format appears as a "pending change notice", the player is confident that a performance format that is likely to result in a jackpot will be executed, and Until the variable performance or "slump performance" corresponding to the reserved symbols is started, the mood of the player can be raised based on the feeling of anticipation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the pending change table 222e, for the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, the color of the pending symbol or executed symbol as a "pending change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Only one display mode is available for selection, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the display mode. That is, in the case of the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, the display mode of "none" is always selected. In the first embodiment, when "None" is selected, where the color of the pending symbol or executed symbol does not change, the display mode of the pending symbol or executed symbol remains "white", and the pending symbol or executed symbol is "Change Notice" is not executed.

In other words, in the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, the colors of the pending symbols or executed symbols are displayed as "blue", which changes to blue, "green", which changes to green, and "red", which changes to red. The value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that it is not selected.

The first reason for this is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the color of the pending symbol or executed symbol is "green" or "red" in the "pending change notice", the pending symbol Or, it is a specification in which it is certain that one of the "ready-to-reach displays" will be executed in the variable performance indicated by the execution symbol. For this reason, in the "slump effect" at the time of a loss where "reach display" is not necessarily executed, even if the pending symbol or execution symbol with a "green" or "red" display mode is displayed, the corresponding If the "ready-to-reach display" is not executed in the "slump performance" corresponding to the pending symbol or the executed symbol, an inconsistency will occur in the performance contents, which may confuse the player.

Therefore, in the case of a pending symbol or executed symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" when losing, a pending symbol or executed symbol with a display mode of "none (white)" that does not cause any discrepancy even if the "reach display" is not executed is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation without causing unnecessary confusion for the players.

In addition, as a second reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable performance obtained based on the starting winning of the ball to the special symbol winning slots 77a and 78a in the "slump state" does not display the "reach display". In the case of a presentation mode that includes, the ball held in the holding device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning hole 75, so the held symbol or execution pattern is not displayed as a dummy holding display, and instead (dummy winning hole) 75) is configured to raise the display mode of the "pending change notice" by one rank (for example, change from the display mode of "none" to the display mode of "blue"). There is. Therefore, if the highest display mode (that is, the "red" display mode) is selected as the display mode of the pending symbol or the executed symbol, the display mode cannot be increased by one rank, and the effect There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. In addition, if the display mode changes from "blue" to "green" or from "green" to "red", there is an expectation of a jackpot for the pending symbol or executed symbol. There is a risk that the player will have excessive expectations for a jackpot, even though it is a "reach display" that indicates a loss.

Therefore, for pending symbols or executed symbols that correspond to the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, even if the display mode increases by one rank, the "blue" display mode will not be determined to be the "reach display", and, This is not to stir up excessive expectations for a jackpot. Therefore, by displaying pending symbols or executed symbols in a display mode of "none (white)" that does not cause any discrepancy in the content of the performance, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance without causing unnecessary confusion to the player. I can do it.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of performance units are executed in the "slump performance", but the "pending change notice" of the "slump performance" is the pending symbol or the number of performance units corresponding to the plurality of performance units. It is configured to collectively determine the display mode of the executed symbols. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to draw a lottery for "pending change notice" for each performance unit of "slump performance", and the control regarding "pending change notice" during "slump performance" can be simplified. This makes it easier to create programs and reduces the processing load.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "slump effect" at the time of a loss and the "pending change notice" are associated with "0 to 99" for the display mode of "none". There is. Note that values are not assigned to the display modes of "blue," "green," and "red," so they are expressed as "-."

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of a loss is selected, the display mode of "pending change notice" is "none" at 100%, the display mode of "blue", "green" and "red" is 0%, It is set to be selected at a ratio of .

Therefore, only the display mode of "None" is selected for the "Pending change notice" selected during the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, and only when the display mode of the Pending symbol or execution symbol is increased by one rank, "Pending change notice" is selected. The setting is such that the "pending change notice" itself is unlikely to occur.

In the pending change table 222e, in the "non-reach" performance mode at the time of a loss, the color of the pending symbol or executed symbol as a "pending change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white") to "none". , and "blue" which changes to blue are available for selection, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

It should be noted that the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated with the "non-reach" performance mode at the time of loss so that the "green" and "red" display modes are not selected. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the color of the pending symbol or the executed symbol is "green" or "red" in the "pending change notice", the pending symbol or This is because the specifications are such that it is certain that a performance mode including any one of the "ready-to-reach displays" will be executed in the variable performance indicated by the execution symbol. Therefore, in the "non-reach" performance mode in which no "reach display" is executed, the "green" or "red" display mode of the "pending change notice" is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "pending change notice" in the "non-reach" performance mode at the time of a loss is "0 to 98" for the display mode of "none", "99" is displayed for the "blue" display mode. Note that since no values are assigned to the display modes of "green" and "red", they are expressed as "-".

In other words, when the "non-reach" presentation mode is selected when losing, 99% of the display modes are "none" for "pending change notice", 1% are "blue" display mode, and 1% are "green" and "red" display mode. ” display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, for the "pending change notice" selected in the "non-reach" performance mode when losing, the "none" display mode is more likely to be selected (99%), and the "pending change notice" itself is difficult to occur. It is set.

In the pending change table 222e, three display modes of "None", "Blue", and "Green" of the "Pending Change Notice" are selectably prepared for the "Normal Reach" performance mode at the time of loss, and each display mode The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d. In addition, in the "normal reach" presentation mode when losing, the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode does not appear. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the "red" display mode is not selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "Normal Reach" performance mode at the time of a loss and the "Pending Change Notice" are associated with "0 to 79", " The values are "80-89" for the "blue" display mode, and "90-99" for the "green" display mode. Note that "red" is not assigned a value, so it is written as "-".

In other words, when the "Normal reach" presentation mode is selected when losing, the display mode of "Pending change notice" is "None" for 80%, the "Blue" display mode is 10%, and the "Green" display mode is The display mode of "10%" and "red" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected when a loss occurs, the "none" display mode is more likely to be selected (80%), but the "blue ” display mode is set to be easily selected (1% → 20%). Furthermore, in the "pending change notice" that is selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode when losing, the "green" display mode is selected, which is not selected in the "non-reach" presentation mode when losing. Therefore, it can be said that the configuration is such that when the "normal reach" performance mode is performed when a loss is performed, the "pending change notice" is more likely to be executed, compared to the case where the "non-reach" performance mode is performed when a loss is performed.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes are available for selection: "None," "Blue," "Green," and "Red" for the "Pending Change Notice" for the "Super Reach" performance mode when losing. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "pending change notice" in the "super reach" production mode at the time of a loss is "0 to 19" for the display mode of "none", The values are "20-79" for the "blue" display mode, "80-89" for the "green" display mode, and "90-99" for the "red" display mode.

In other words, when the "super reach" performance mode is selected when losing, the display mode of "pending change notice" is "none" for 20%, the "blue" display mode for 60%, and the "green" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "super reach" presentation mode is selected when a loss occurs, the "blue" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "non-reach" presentation mode when a loss occurs (20% → 60%). ). In addition, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "super reach" performance mode is selected when losing, the "red" display mode is selected, which is not selected during the "non-reach" production mode and "normal reach" production mode when losing. It is set. On the other hand, for the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "Super Reach" performance mode is selected when a loss occurs, the display format of "None" is selected over the "Non-Reach" performance mode when a loss occurs or the "Normal Reach" performance mode when a loss occurs. The setting is such that it is unlikely to occur (99% or 80% → 20%). Therefore, when the "Super Reach" performance mode is performed at the time of a loss, compared to the case where the "Non-Reach" performance mode or the "Normal Reach" performance mode is performed at the time of a loss, the "pending change notice" is more likely to be executed. It can be said that there is.

In addition, in the "pending change notice" selected during the "super reach" performance mode when losing, the "green" or " The display mode of "Red" is configured to be easily selected. As mentioned above, the "Super Reach" production mode is a production mode in which the "Jackpot Display" is more likely to appear than the "Normal Reach" production mode, so "green" or "red" is displayed as a "pending change notice". At the stage when the display mode appears, it is possible to predict that a "super reach" performance mode in which a "jackpot display" can be expected will occur, and it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for a "jackpot display", thereby increasing the game play. can improve the interest of

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes are available for selection: "None," "Blue," "Green," and "Red" of the "Pending Change Notice" for the "Special Reach" performance mode when losing. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "pending change notice" in the "special reach" performance mode at the time of a loss is "0 to 9" for the display mode of "none", The values are "10-59" for the "blue" display mode, "60-79" for the "green" display mode, and "80-99" for the "red" display mode.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" performance mode is selected when losing, the display mode of "Pending change notice" is "None" for 10%, the "Blue" display mode for 50%, and the "Green" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 20%, and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "Pending change notice" selected when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is used when a loss occurs, the "green" or "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a loss occurs (respectively). 10% → 20%). In addition, in the "Pending change notice" that is selected in the "Special Reach" performance mode when losing, as with the "Super Reach" production mode, "Non-reach" and "Normal reach" production modes are not selected when losing. "Red" display mode is selected. On the other hand, the ``pending change notice'' that is selected when the ``Special Reach'' performance mode is selected at the time of a loss, is more The setting (99%, 80%, or 20% → 10%) is such that the display mode of "None" is difficult to select. Therefore, when the "Special Reach" performance mode is performed when a loss is performed, compared to when the "Non-Reach" performance mode, "Normal Reach" performance mode, or "Super Reach" performance mode is performed during a loss, the "Pending change notice" is ” can be said to be a configuration that is easy to implement.

In addition, the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "special reach" performance mode is used when losing is compared to when the "non-reach" production mode, "normal reach" production mode, or "super reach" production mode is performed when losing. Therefore, the display mode of "green" or "red" is configured to be easily selected. As mentioned above, the "Special Reach" production mode is a production mode with a higher possibility of a "jackpot display" appearing than the "Normal Reach" production mode or the "Super Reach" production mode, so it is used as a "pending change notice". At the stage when the "green" or "red" display mode appears, it is predicted that the "Special Reach" production mode will occur, which is the "reach display" where you can expect the most "jackpot display", and the display will proceed to the "jackpot display". It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, for the "slump effect" at the time of a jackpot, three display modes are available for selection: "none", "blue", and "green" for the "pending change notice". The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with this. Note that since no value has been assigned to the display mode of "red", it is written as "-".

In other words, when the "slump effect" is selected at the time of a jackpot, the display mode of "pending change notice" is "none" for 10%, the "blue" display mode is 80%, and the "green" display mode is 10%. %, the "red" display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 0%, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the "red" display mode is not selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, this is acquired based on the starting winning of the ball into the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a in the "slump state", similar to when the "slump effect" is selected at the time of a loss. If the variable performance that has been performed is a performance mode that includes a "reach display", the balls held in the holding device 73 are not allowed to flow into the dummy prize opening 75, so the held symbols or executed symbols are displayed as a dummy held display. Instead, the display mode of the "pending change notice" is increased by one rank (for example, the display mode of "none" is changed to the display mode of "blue"). Therefore, if the highest display mode (that is, the "red" display mode) is selected as the display mode of the pending symbol or the executed symbol, the display mode cannot be increased by one rank, and the effect There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. Therefore, for the reserved symbols or execution symbols that correspond to the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, even if the display mode is increased by one rank, there will be no discrepancy in the effect content. "," "blue" or "green" display mode) is displayed as a pending symbol or an executed symbol so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "slump effect" at the time of a jackpot and the "pending change notice" are associated with "0 to 9" and "blue" for the display mode of "none". ” display mode is “10-89”, and “green” display mode is “90-99”. Note that since no value has been assigned to the display mode of "red", it is written as "-".

In other words, when the "slump effect" is selected at the time of a jackpot, the display mode of "pending change notice" is "none" for 10%, the "blue" display mode is 80%, and the "green" display mode is 10%. %, the display mode of “red” is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" that is selected during the "slump effect" at the time of a jackpot, the display mode of "blue" or "green", which is not selected in the "slump effect" at the time of a loss, is selected. On the other hand, for the "pending change notice" that is selected during the "slump effect" when winning a jackpot, the display mode of "none" is less likely to be selected than the "slump effect" when losing the jackpot (100% → 10%). There is. Therefore, it can be said that the configuration is such that when a "slump effect" is performed at the time of a jackpot, the "pending change notice" is more likely to be executed than when a "slump effect" is performed at the time of a loss.

In addition, the ``pending change notice'' selected during the ``slump effect'' when a jackpot is selected is configured to select the display mode of ``blue'' or ``green'', which is not selected during the ``slump effect'' during a loss. . Therefore, by executing the "slump effect" after the "blue" or "green" display mode appears as the "pending change notice", it is predicted that the "jackpot display" will occur, and the "jackpot display" It is possible to make the players have a sense of expectation for the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "pending change notice" of the "slump effect" collectively determines the display mode of the pending symbols or executed symbols corresponding to a plurality of performance units. is configured to do so. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to draw a "pending change notice" for each of multiple performance units in a series of "slump performances", and it is possible to easily control the "pending change notice" during the "slump performance". This makes it easier to create a program and reduces the processing load. In addition, when a jackpot "slump performance" is performed, and when a lottery for executing a "pending change notice" is won, "pending change notice" may occur continuously in a plurality of pending symbols or execution symbols. Therefore, if a "holding change notice" occurs in multiple held symbols or execution symbols, and a "reach display" etc. does not occur in the performance element corresponding to the previous held symbol, a "big hit" will occur in the next performance element. The player can be made to have a sense of expectation for the display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes are selectable for the "Normal Reach" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot: "None," "Blue," "Green," and "Red," and the The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the value of the pending change counter 223d in the "Normal reach" performance mode at the time of a jackpot is associated with the "Pending change notice" in the display mode of "None", "0 to 9", " "10-19" for the "blue" display mode, "20-49" for the "green" display mode, and "50-99" for the "red" display mode.

In other words, when the "Normal reach" presentation mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the "None" display mode of "Pending change notice" is 10%, the "Blue" display mode is 10%, and the "Green" display mode is 10%. 30%, and the "red" display mode is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "retention change notice" selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a jackpot is won, the "red" display mode is selected, which is not selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a loss occurs. On the other hand, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the "none" display mode is less likely to be selected than the "normal reach" presentation mode when a loss occurs (80% → 10%). It has become. Therefore, it can be said that the configuration is such that when the "normal reach" performance mode is performed when a jackpot is won, the "pending change notice" is more likely to be executed, compared to the case where the "normal reach" performance mode is performed when a loss is performed.

In addition, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "normal reach" production mode is used when a jackpot is won, a "green" or "red" display format is selected compared to when the "normal reach" production mode is used when a loss occurs. It is easily configured, and in particular, the "red" display mode is selected, which is not selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode when losing. Therefore, after the "red" display mode appears as a "pending change notice", the target variable production does not develop into the "super reach" production mode, and the variation production ends with only the "normal reach" production mode. In that case, the “jackpot display” is confirmed at that point. The "red" display mode of the "pending change notice" is configured to be easily selected in the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode, so the player should When the display mode is recognized, the occurrence of a "super reach" performance mode or the like in which a "super reach" performance element occurs after a "normal reach" performance element is performed is predicted. However, contrary to this prediction, by making a "jackpot display" appear in the "normal reach" performance element, it is possible to perform a surprising performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, if the "Normal Reach" performance element is executed while the "Red" display mode is appearing, the "Jackpot Display" will be displayed when the variable performance ends with the "Normal Reach" performance element. Therefore, during the execution of the "Normal Reach" performance element, the player creates a gameplay in which he or she is wondering whether or not the variable performance will end without developing into the "Super Reach" performance element, etc. can improve the interest of

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes are selectable for the "super reach" performance mode at the time of a jackpot: "none," "blue," "green," and "red." The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with this.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "pending change notice" in the "super reach" production mode at the time of a jackpot is "0 to 9" for the display mode of "none", The values are "10-19" for the "blue" display mode, "20-59" for the "green" display mode, and "60-99" for the "red" display mode.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" performance mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the display mode of "Pending Change Notice" is "None" for 10%, the "Blue" display mode is 10%, and the "Green" display mode is displayed for 10%. is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "super reach" presentation mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the "green" or "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "super reach" presentation mode when a loss occurs (respectively) 10% → 40%). In other words, even with the same "Super Reach" performance mode, the selection rate of the "pending change notice" is changed when you lose and when you hit a jackpot, and in particular, when you win a jackpot, the "green" or "red" display mode is changed when you lose. Configure to make selection easier. Then, by displaying the "green" or "red" display mode and executing the "super reach" production mode that can expect a "big win display" more than the "normal reach" production mode, the "pending change notice" is displayed. Together with the display content, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful about the "big win display", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes are available for selection, ``None,'' ``Blue,'' ``Green,'' and ``Red'' for the "Special Reach" performance mode at the time of a jackpot. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with this.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "pending change notice" in the "special reach" performance mode at the time of a jackpot is "0 to 9" for the display mode of "none", The values are "10-29" for the "blue" display mode, "30-69" for the "green" display mode, and "70-99" for the "red" display mode.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" performance mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the display mode of "Pending change notice" is "None" for 10%, the "Blue" display mode for 20%, and the "Green" display mode. is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the display mode of "red" is selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the "green" or "red" display mode is more likely to be selected than the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a loss (respectively). 20% → 40% or 30%). In other words, even with the same "Special Reach" performance mode, the selection rate of the "pending change notice" is changed when you lose and when you hit a jackpot, and in particular, when you win a jackpot, the "green" or "red" display mode is changed when you lose. Configure to make selection easier. Then, after displaying the "green" or "red" display mode, by executing the "special reach" production mode in which a "jackpot display" can be expected from the "normal reach" production mode or the "super reach" production mode. , together with the displayed content of the "pending change notice" can make the player feel hopeful about the "big win display" and can improve the interest of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, there are four selectable display modes for the "special variation" presentation mode at the time of a jackpot: "none," "blue," "green," and "red." The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with this.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the pending change counter 223d and the "pending change notice" in the "special variation" production mode at the time of a jackpot is "0 to 69" for the display mode of "none", The values are "70-79" for the "blue" display mode, "80-89" for the "green" display mode, and "90-99" for the "red" display mode.

In other words, when the "special fluctuation" performance mode is selected at the time of a jackpot (if you win the "2R guaranteed strange jackpot"), the display mode of "pending change notice" is 70% "none" and "blue". The display mode is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, the "green" display mode 10%, and the "red" display mode 10%.

Therefore, for the "pending change notice" that is selected when the "special fluctuation" performance mode is selected at the time of a jackpot, the display mode of "none" is likely to be selected (70%), and the display mode of "blue," "green," or "red" is likely to be selected. Since the display modes of are set to be selected equally (10%), it is difficult for "pending change notice" to occur, but when it occurs, it is set to be selected almost equally.

In this way, the audio lamp control device 113, when receiving the held pitch number command from the main control device 110, grasps the propriety and production mode of the fluctuating effect indicated by the held pitch number command, and based on the propriety and production mode. Accordingly, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the "pending change notice" and the display mode for the pending symbol, which is the main pending display. With this configuration, the result of the variable performance is suggested to the player by the pending symbol before the variable performance is executed, and until the variable performance is executed, the variable performance that has been held by the player is By predicting whether or not there will be a jackpot, the interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when receiving the dummy hold command from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the same pre-reading process as when receiving the hold ball number command on the hold symbol that is the dummy hold display, and The system is configured to determine whether or not to execute "pending change notice" and the display mode. With this configuration, in a series of "slump effects", before executing the effect element corresponding to the dummy hold display, the result of the effect element is suggested to the player by the hold symbol, and the effect element is executed. Until then, the interest in the game can be increased by having the player predict whether or not one performance unit of the pending "slump performance" will be a jackpot.

Furthermore, by executing the same "pending change notice" for the fluctuation performance and the "slump performance", it is difficult to distinguish between the fluctuation performance and the "slump performance", and the results obtained by executing the "slump performance" are made difficult. To make it difficult for a player to distinguish between a variable performance and a "slump performance" even when the dynamic performance time of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the fluctuation time of the variable performance. In this way, the effect of performing the "slump effect" can be maintained.

Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. The pending display information storage area 223e is an area for storing pending change information indicating the display mode of the "held change notice" of the pending symbols and executed symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)). be.

Here, details of the hold display information storage area 223e will be described with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending display information storage area 223e. As shown in FIG. 19, the pending display information storage area 223e has six areas: an execution pending display area 223e0 and first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5. Execution pending display area 223e0 and first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 (hereinafter, execution pending display area 223e0 and first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are referred to as "each pending display area 223e0 to 223e5") (in some cases) stores the presence or absence of a fluctuating effect or a "slump effect" and pending change information indicating the display mode of a "pending change notice."

The execution pending display area 223e0 is an area that stores pending change information corresponding to the currently executed variable effect or "slump effect." Further, the first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are areas for storing pending change information corresponding to up to five pending variable effects and "slump effects," respectively.

Specifically, the execution pending display area 223e0 is an area corresponding to the currently executing fluctuating effect or "slump effect." Further, the first pending display area 223e1 is an area corresponding to the first temporally suspended variable presentation or "slump effect" among the suspended variable effects or "slump effects." Further, the second pending display area 223e2 is an area corresponding to the second oldest suspended variable performance or "slump performance" in terms of time among the suspended fluctuation performances or "slump effects." Further, the third pending display area 223e3 is an area corresponding to the third oldest suspended variable presentation or "slump effect" in terms of time among the suspended variable effects or "slump effects." Further, the fourth pending display area 223e4 is an area that corresponds to the fourth oldest suspended variable performance or "slump performance" in terms of time among the suspended fluctuation performances or "slump effects." Further, the fifth pending display area 223e5 is an area corresponding to the fifth oldest pending variable presentation or "slump effect" in terms of time among the suspended variable effects or "slump effects."

As described above, when receiving the held pitch number command from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the propriety and production mode of the fluctuating effect indicated by the held pitch number command, and adjusts the propriety and production mode accordingly. Based on this, it is configured to determine and store whether or not the "reservation change notice" can be executed and the display mode for the reservation symbol that is the main reservation display. In addition, when receiving the dummy hold command from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the same pre-reading process as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command on the hold symbol that is the dummy hold display, and reads " The system is configured to determine and store whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed and the display mode.

Specifically, when receiving a held pitch number command, the value of the sub held pitch number counter 223b is updated based on the number of held balls included in the held pitch number command, and when a dummy held pitch command is received, the value of the sub held pitch number counter 223b is updated based on the number of held balls included in the held pitch number command, and when a dummy held pitch command is received, the value of the sub held pitch number counter 223b is updated based on the number of held balls included in the held pitch number command. The value of the counter 223c is updated. Then, based on the reservation change table 222e and the value of the reservation change counter 223d, reservation change information is extracted to determine the display mode of the "reservation change notice", and the extracted reservation change information is The total value of the value of the number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reserved ball counter 223c is stored in one of the first to fifth reservation display areas 223e1 to 223e5.

In addition, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command that mean the start of a variation effect from the main control device 110, or when it recognizes that it is the start timing of a "slump effect", each Shift processing is executed in the pending display areas 223e0 to 223e5.

In other words, the number of units of performance of the suspended fluctuation performance or "slump performance" is reduced by one, and the execution of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" that was suspended first in terms of time starts. The pending change information stored in the first pending display area 223e1 corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" that has been executed is displayed in the execution pending display area 223e0 corresponding to the variable effect that is being executed (starting execution) or the "slump effect". move it to

Also, the pending change information stored in the second pending display area 223e2 is moved to the first pending display area 223e1, and the pending change information stored in the third pending display area 223e3 is moved to the second pending display area 223e2. , move the pending change information stored in the fourth pending display area 223e4 to the third pending display area 223e3, and move the pending change information stored in the fifth pending display area 223e5 to the fourth pending display area 223e4. let

As a result, the execution pending display area 223e0 stores pending change information regarding the fluctuating effect or "slump effect" that is being executed (to be executed), and the first pending display area 223e1 stores the pending change information regarding the currently executed (executed) variation effect or "slump effect". Pending change information corresponding to the oldest suspended variation performance or "slump performance" is stored, and the second suspension display area 223e2 corresponds to the second oldest temporally suspended variation performance or "slump performance". Pending change information is stored, and the third pending display area 223e3 stores pending change information corresponding to the third oldest temporally pending variation effect or "slump effect", and the fourth pending display area 223e4 stores pending change information corresponding to the third oldest suspended variation effect or "slump effect". is stored with pending change information corresponding to the 4th oldest pending variation performance or "slump performance", and the fifth pending display area 223e5 stores the 5th oldest pending variation performance in terms of time. Alternatively, pending change information corresponding to "slump effect" is stored.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "slump state", in order to execute the "slump performance" in which the number of performance units is greater than the number of times the fluctuating performance has been executed, the execution of the fluctuating performance is suspended (i.e., " 1") and the maximum pending number (i.e., "4") (i.e., "5"), the number (i.e., "6" which is the maximum number of executions of each production unit in a series of "slump productions") 223e0 to 223e5 are provided, and only information regarding the display mode of pending symbols and executed symbols (ie, pending change information) is stored in each pending display area 223e0 to 223e5. Based on the information stored in each of the pending display areas 223e0 to 223e5, the executed symbols and pending symbols are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)). With this configuration, a greater number of variable effects are executed than the actually obtained variable effects, giving the player the illusion that he or she is getting many lottery opportunities, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can do. In addition, since the executed symbols and the reserved symbols can be displayed while being consistent with the number of performances, the dynamic performance state on the third symbol display device 81 can be extended and the player does not feel any discomfort. We can provide performances.

Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. The sub-slump flag 223f is a flag for determining whether or not the audio ramp control device 113 is in a "slump state." By turning on the sub-slump flag 223f, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can determine that the device is in a "slump state." Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command related to a variable effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the setting status of the sub-slump flag 223f, and displays a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. or "slump effect".

This sub-slump flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 receives a slump command, which will be described later, from the main control device 110, it sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON (see S1202 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, when the "slump effect" (fluctuation effect) is executed for the first time in the "slump state", that is, when the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 with the sub-slump flag 223f on, The sub-slump flag 223f is set to OFF (see S1405 in FIG. 39).

In this way, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 uses the sub-slump flag 223f to determine the "slump state." Then, when the MPU 221 receives a command related to the variation effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 determines whether to execute the variation effect or the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the determination result, it is possible to perform effect control to be executed.

The slump effect timer 223g is a timer for measuring the effect time after the "slump effect" is started. By referring to the value of this slump effect timer 223g, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 grasps the overall effect time of a series of "slump effects" and also determines the first effect unit after the start of the "slump effect". (In other words, the "first performance."Hereinafter, the performance unit of the "slump performance" performed after the "first performance" will be referred to as the "second performance," and from then on, the n-th (n is a natural number) The unit of performance of the "slump performance" to be performed is referred to as the "nth performance").

This slump effect timer 223g is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 at the start of the "slump effect", that is, in the "slump state", a value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the slump effect timer 223g.

Specifically, when the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 in a "slump state", that is, in a situation where the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the MPU 221 determines that the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is " It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern includes "reach display". In the case of a variation pattern that does not include "reach display", an extension time is drawn by lottery in order to set an additional performance time as a "slump performance". Then, a value corresponding to the extended time obtained by lottery is set in the slump effect timer 223g (see S1408 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that includes "reach display", since it is a relatively long variation pattern that includes "reach display", there is no need to perform additional effects. ”, no extra time is drawn and no value is set in the slump effect timer 223g (see S1406: Yes in FIG. 39).

Next, the MPU 221 adds the variation time of the obtained variation pattern to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, regardless of the presence or absence of the "reach display" (see S1410 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g set with the extension time and the variable time, a slump effect table 222f, which will be described later, is referred to, and a ``pseudo series'' effect or a ``gase pseudo series'' effect in the ``slump effect'' is performed. /Or select "development possibility production". The selected "slump effect" is stored in a slump effect storage area 223h, which will be described later. Note that details will be described later.

In addition, during the "slump effect", that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0", when there is a new start winning prize in the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a, the MPU 221 controls the "slump effect". The elapsed situation is determined, and if a performance other than the extended time in the "slump performance" is being performed, the value for the extended time is subtracted from the value of the slump performance timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

The reason for performing the above control is that when a new starting prize occurs during a series of "slump effects", an additional "slump effect" effect unit is performed for the currently executing "slump effect" effect unit. This is because, in order to match each performance element, the extension time set for performing an additional performance element is once reset, and the performance content of the performance element is newly set. In addition, in performing the above control, the reason why it is limited to the execution of performances other than the performances during the extended time is that even if the performance other than the performance during the extended time, that is, the performance in the preceding stage of the performance based on the extended time, For example, even if the part of the performance corresponding to the acquired extension time has not been executed and the extension time is reset and the performance content of "slump performance" is set again, there will be no discrepancy in the performance content. be.

In addition, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is determined after setting the ``slump effect'' based on the set value of the slump effect timer 223g when the fluctuation pattern acquired in the ``slump state'' includes ``reach display''. , is configured to be cleared to "0" (see S1413 in FIG. 39). This is because the variation pattern that includes "reach display" is performed for a relatively long variation time, so there is a possibility that a new prize will be won during that variation time. Therefore, until such a case, there is little need to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the winnings in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a, so a variation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, after setting the "slump effect" based on the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is initialized and the "slump state" is not entered until the "slump state" is entered again. The subsequent performance is performed as "normal state". In addition, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this stage, there is no need to grasp the progress status of the "slump effect", and there is no need to perform shift control of the pending symbols including the dummy pending display. The control burden on the MPU 221 can be reduced. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern that does not include "reach display" has an execution time of only 15 seconds at maximum, and ends in a relatively short time, so there is a possibility that a new starting prize will occur during that time. is low, so if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance that first started winning in a "slump state" was a "non-reach" mode that did not include "reach display", the "slump state" would continue to be maintained and additional Even if a starting winning occurs, the system is configured to execute a performance that matches a series of "slump performances" (that is, an additional "slump performance").

On the other hand, when a value is set in the slump effect timer 223g, that is, when the slump effect timer 223g is a value larger than "0", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is set to the main value of the audio lamp control device 113. Each time 1 millisecond passes in the process (see S1101: Yes in FIG. 36), it is subtracted by 1 (S1110 in FIG. 36).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the subtracted value of the slump effect timer 223g reaches a predetermined value (in the first embodiment, "10000" is subtracted from the set value), When a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display is displayed, that is, when the value of the dummy pending ball counter 223c is larger than "0", one performance unit in a series of "slump performances" (i.e., "false pseudo The system is configured to decrement the value of the dummy pending pitch counter 223c by 1 and execute a shift process in the pending display information storage area 223e. With this configuration, by displaying the start and end of one performance unit in a series of "slump effects" and the shift display of pending symbols and executed symbols in a consistent manner, it is as if the fluctuating effects were completed once. It is possible to perform a ``slump performance'' which is composed of performance elements that are performed more times than the actual number of fluctuating performances without feeling strange.

The slump performance storage area 223h is an area for storing performance information regarding the performance content and stop symbol information regarding the stop symbols for each performance unit (performance element) constituting the entire series of "slump performance". be. The MPU 221 determines the production contents of each production unit in a series of "slump productions" and the stop symbols (temporary stop symbols) for each production unit based on the starting winnings in the special symbol winning holes 77a and 78a during the "slump state". (including) is determined, and information regarding the determined contents (namely, performance information and stop symbol information) is stored in this slump performance storage area 223h. Note that the production unit in the "slump production" means that each third symbol displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stopped display). (The same applies hereinafter.) It refers to the unit of performance from when the fluctuation starts from the state where it is, until the fluctuation stops and the third symbol is stopped and displayed again on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, details of the slump effect storage area 223h will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the slump effect storage area 223h. As shown in FIG. 20, the slump effect storage area 223h has seven storage areas from a first effect area 223h1 to a seventh effect area 223h7.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to perform a "slump effect" based on a starting prize winning from the "slump state" to the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a. The fluctuation performance based on the starting prize is a "non-reach (long)" performance mode of losing, and the fluctuation time of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" performance element + "low-speed fluctuation" performance element" is "15 seconds". ”, and the fluctuation performance based on the next starting prize during the “slump performance” is a “Special Reach” performance mode where the jackpot is a “high-speed fluctuation (long)” performance element + “pseudo fluctuation” performance element + The total time of "55 seconds" which is the variation time of "High-speed variation (short)" production element + "Pseudo variation" production element + "Special reach" production element + "Re-variation" production element" This is the maximum possible production time for "slump production". Further, in the first embodiment, when executing the "slump effect", each effect unit is configured to be within "10 seconds". Therefore, in order to configure a series of "slump effects" that can be executed for a maximum of 70 seconds, the slump effect storage area 223h stores the entire series of "slump effects" (i.e., the first to seventh effects). ), first to seventh performance areas 223h1 to 223h7 are provided to respectively store performance information of seven performance units and each stop symbol information.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 is an area corresponding to the "first performance" that is executed first in the "slump performance", and the performance contents of the first performance ("Gase pseudo-ren" performance, " Performance information regarding "Pseudo consecutive performance", "Development possibility performance", or "Which reach" (the same applies hereinafter), and the stop symbols in the performance content (false chance pattern, chance pattern, loss pattern, jackpot) Any one of the symbols (the same applies hereinafter)) is stored. In addition, the second performance area 223h2 is an area corresponding to the "second performance" performed after the "first performance", and includes performance information regarding the performance content of the "second performance" and stops in the performance content. Stop symbol information related to symbols is stored. Furthermore, the third performance area 223h3 is an area corresponding to the "third performance" to be performed after the "second performance", and includes performance information regarding the performance content of the "third performance" and stops in the performance content. Stop symbol information related to symbols is stored. In addition, the fourth performance area 223h4 is an area corresponding to the "fourth performance" that is performed after the "third performance", and contains performance information regarding the performance content of the fourth performance and information regarding the stop symbols in the performance content. The stop symbol information is stored. Furthermore, the fifth performance area 223h5 is an area corresponding to the "fifth performance" to be performed after the "fourth performance", and includes performance information regarding the performance content of the "fifth performance" and stops in the performance content. Stop symbol information related to symbols is stored. In addition, the sixth performance area 223h6 is an area corresponding to the "sixth performance" to be performed after the "fifth performance", and contains performance information regarding the performance content of the "sixth performance" and stops in the performance content. Stop symbol information related to symbols is stored. Furthermore, the seventh performance area 223h7 is an area corresponding to the "seventh performance" to be performed after the "sixth performance", and includes performance information regarding the performance content of the "seventh performance" and stops in the performance content. Stop symbol information related to symbols is stored.

As described above, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the "slump state", it sets the value of the slump effect timer 223g, and also sets the value of the set slump effect timer 223g. , and the slump effect table 222f, and determine the performance status at the time of receiving the variable pattern command based on the starting prize (for example, whether the "slump performance" is already being executed, whether it is the extended time part of the "slump performance", etc.) ) and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command (i.e., whether or not it includes the variation time and the "reach display"), determine the content of the "slump effect" and the stop symbol, and determine the determined detection. It is configured to store information regarding contents and stop symbols (namely performance information and stop symbol information) in the first to seventh performance areas 223h1 to 223h7 of this slump performance storage area 223h in the order of execution of the performance.

Here, the slump effect table 222f and the "slump effect" selected based on the slump effect table 222f will be explained with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24.

FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the slump effect table 222f.

Moreover, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation effect and the "slump effect" when a variation pattern command is received in the "slump state", and FIG. FIG. 22(b) is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when the variable performance of the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is acquired based on winning a prize. is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when the variable performance of various reach is acquired based on the starting prize in the "slump state".

Further, FIG. 23 shows a variable performance and a "slump performance" when a variable pattern command is received at a timing when a "slump performance" is being executed and the "slump performance" is a performance other than a performance based on the extension time. ", and FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship with "non-reach (long)" performance mode, and FIG. FIG. 23(b) is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" in the case of ``slump performance''. It is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the fluctuating performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when the fluctuating performance is acquired.

Further, FIG. 24 shows a variable effect and a ``slump effect'' when a variable pattern command is received at the timing when a ``slump effect'' is being executed and the ``slump effect'' is an effect based on an extended time. FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship with the above, and FIG. 24(a) is a case where a fluctuating performance with a "non-reach (long)" performance mode is acquired based on a starting prize during a "slump performance" based on an extended time. 24(b) is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variable performance and the performance time of the "slump performance", and FIG. It is a timing chart showing the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance and the performance time of the "slump performance" when the performance is acquired.

As described above, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the "slump state" or "slump effect", the audio lamp control device 113 adjusts the value of the slump effect timer 223g based on the fluctuation pattern command. is set (updated), and with reference to the value of the slump performance timer 223g and the slump performance table 222f, the performance contents and stop symbols of the "slump performance" are determined. As shown in FIG. 21, the slump performance table 222f is divided into groups based on the performance status at the time of reception of the fluctuation pattern command, and for each group, based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) based on the fluctuation pattern command. The entire production content of ``slump production'' is associated with it.

Specifically, the production status at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command is "slump state", which is in a "slump state", and "slump state", which is in a "slump state", and "slump state", which is in a "slump state", and a production other than the extended time is in progress. It is divided into ``during slump effect (other than extended time)'' and ``during slump effect (during extended time)'', which is during ``slump effect'' and the effect based on the extended time is being executed. Then, for each divided group, the performance mode ("Non-reach (long)" production mode, "Normal reach" production mode, "Super reach" production mode, or "Special reach" production mode) based on the received variable pattern command is set. A series of performance contents of "slump performance" are associated with each "performance mode".

In addition, in the first embodiment, if the received variation pattern command indicates a "special variation" effect mode, the "slump effect" is not executed. There is no "slump effect" item corresponding to the "fluctuation" effect mode. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the "non-reach" performance mode acquired during a "slump state" or during execution of a "slump performance", the number of pending pitches of the variable performance is "0" or "1". Therefore, it is configured to always be in a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 21, the ``slump performance'' in the variation pattern including the ``pseudo-connection'' performance and the ``re-variation'' performance mode only increases the number of performance elements; ``Slump effect'' corresponding to the variation pattern excluding the effect and the effect mode of ``Re-variation'' will be explained.

First, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the setting contents of the "slump effect" when a variation pattern command is received during the "slump state" will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(a), the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump presentation table 222f, and "5 seconds" is selected as the extension time. In this case, the total performance time is "20 seconds" and the value of the slump performance timer 223g is set to "20000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the first "Gase Pseudo Series 1" is set in the "First Effect", and the "Gase Pseudo Series 2" is set in the "Second Effect". Set.

Specifically, in the first performance area 223h1 of the slump performance storage area 223h, "Gase pseudo series 1" (that is, the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation". The same applies hereinafter) ), and stop symbol information regarding false chance symbols (for example, "788". The same applies hereinafter) are stored. In addition, the second performance area 223h2 stores performance information regarding "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and stop symbol information regarding the false chance symbols.

Then, a "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first and second effect areas 223h1 and 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h (see FIG. 43(a)), and the acquired The stop symbol of the fake chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the fluctuating production ("loss display" because it is a "non-reach (long)" production mode), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump" "Production" ends (see FIG. 43(f)). While this "slump performance" is being performed, if a new starting prize occurs in the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a, the state will transition to the "normal state", while no new starting winning will occur. If it does, it will go into a "slump state" again.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at a stage when approximately "6 seconds" have elapsed since "Gase pseudo-sequence 1" of "slump effect" was executed (i.e., before execution of "Gase pseudo-series 2") Step), the ball held in the above-mentioned holding device 73 is configured to win into the dummy winning port 75, and in conjunction with the winning, the held symbol, which is a dummy held display, is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6(b) )) (see FIG. 43(a)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a larger number of pending symbols in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) than the number of executions of the acquired variation effect, and also to display a number of pending symbols greater than the number of executions of the obtained variation effect. Even when the ``slump performance'' is performed with a large number of executions of the performance unit, consistency can be maintained between the performance units in the ``slump performance'' and the reserved symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance unit in which the winning/failure lottery is performed is performed more times than the number of acquired variable performances without causing any discrepancy in performance. Hereinafter, when "Fake Pseudo Series 1" in the "Slump Effect" is executed, the same effects and controls as in the above-mentioned "Fake Pseudo Series 1" are executed, so the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each performance unit of the series of "slump performances" is composed of "10 seconds" units, and among them, a "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element of "5 seconds" and a "pseudo fluctuation" production element. Therefore, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the obtained fluctuation performance ends (that is, when "15 seconds" have passed since winning 1), the performance of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" of "Gase pseudo series 2" in "slump performance" It is configured such that when the element ends, the variation of the third symbol in the left symbol row Z1 stops (hereinafter referred to as "first stop"). That is, it is configured such that the end timing of the variable performance and the first stop timing of "Gase pseudo series 2" are synchronized. Therefore, the stop timing of any third symbol (i.e., the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1) of the "slump effect" performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are determined. The stop timing can be synchronized. That is, in the "normal state", the stop timing of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and the stop timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are synchronized and related. It is configured. Therefore, just as the variable performance and dynamic display in the "normal state" are synchronized, the "slump performance" of the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are synchronized in the "slump state" as well. It is possible to make them relevant (synchronized), and it becomes possible to make the player recognize the end of the variable performance even while the "slump performance" is being executed. Hereinafter, the effect and control will be executed so that the timing of the first stop of "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" in the "slump effect" is synchronized with the end timing of the variable effect, but the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(a), the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump presentation table 222f, and "10 seconds" is selected as the extension time. If selected, the total performance time will be "25 seconds" and the value of the slump performance timer 223g will be set to "25000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, "Gase pseudo series 1" is set in the "first effect", "Gase pseudo series 2" is set in the "second effect", In the "third performance", a "development possibility performance" corresponding to the performance time (ie, "5 seconds") of the remaining "slump performance" is set.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 of the slump performance storage area 223h stores performance information regarding "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and stop symbol information regarding the false chance pattern. In addition, the second performance area 223h2 stores performance information regarding "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and stop symbol information regarding false chance symbols. Furthermore, the third performance area 223h3 contains performance information regarding a performance that fails to develop into the next performance (hereinafter referred to as "development failure"), which is a performance element of the "development possible performance", and a fake chance. Stop symbol information regarding symbols is stored.

Then, a "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h (see FIGS. 46(a) to 46(e)). ), the stop symbol of the fake chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the acquired variable production stop symbol ("loss display" because it is a "non-reach (long)" production mode), is finally stopped and displayed, The series of "slump performances" ends.

Note that since the performance time of the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development failure as the "third performance" is "5 seconds", the "second development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development success/failure performance" of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not appear to crack and stops displaying the "second performance" "false pseudo series 2". The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed as the fake chance symbol, is confirmed and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(b), when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump presentation table 222f, the total presentation time is "20 seconds" and the slump "20000" is set to the value of the production timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the first "pseudo series 1" is set in the "first effect", and the effect element of "Which one is reach" is set in the "second effect". is set.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 of the slump performance storage area 223h contains "pseudo series 1" (that is, the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the performance element of "pseudo fluctuation". The same applies hereinafter. ) and stop symbol information regarding a chance symbol (for example, "778". The same applies hereinafter) are stored. In addition, in the second performance area 223h2, performance information regarding the performance element of "Which way reach" and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable performance (stop symbol corresponding to "loss display" or "jackpot display") are stored. The corresponding stop symbol (the same applies hereinafter) is stored.

Then, a "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first and second effect areas 223h1 and 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and corresponds to the acquired stop symbol of the variable effect. The "loss display" or "jackpot display" that appears is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fluctuating performance obtained based on the starting winning of the ball into the special figure winning holes 77a, 78a in the "slump state" is a performance mode including the "reach display". In this case, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy prize opening 75. By configuring in this way, in the "slump effect", when performing a "pseudo continuous" effect that does not consume the pending symbols, instead of a "false pseudo continuous" effect that consumes the pending symbols, it is possible to perform the actual fluctuating effect. Even when the same number of ``slump effects'' are performed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the number of times the ``slump effect'' is performed and the number of pending symbols. As a result, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable without causing any inconsistency in the performance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, even if you win the "jackpot display" in the "slump effect", in the case of a variable effect including the "reach display", the extension time is not obtained and the series of "slump effects" The presentation time is the same as the variation time of the obtained variable presentation. That is, the end timing of the variable performance and the end timing of the "slump performance" are synchronized. Therefore, even if a command (i.e., opening command) related to a jackpot-related performance (i.e., opening performance) is transmitted from the main controller 110 at the end timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, In the 3-symbol display device 81, it becomes possible to match the end of the "slump performance" with the start of the jackpot performance, and it is possible to provide a performance that does not feel strange from the end of the "slump performance" to the start of the jackpot performance. .

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(b), when the "super reach" presentation mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump presentation table 222f, the total presentation time is "30 seconds", "30000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, "pseudo series 1" is set for the "first effect", "pseudo series 2" is set for the "second effect", and "pseudo series 2" is set for the "second effect". A production element of "Which one is reach" is set in "3 Production".

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 of the slump performance storage area 223h stores performance information regarding "Pseudo-Run 1" and stop symbol information regarding chance symbols. Furthermore, the second performance area 223h2 stores performance information regarding "Pseudo-Run 2" and stop symbol information regarding chance symbols. Further, the third performance area 223h3 stores performance information related to the performance element of "Which one is reach" and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable performance.

Then, a "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and corresponds to the obtained stop symbol of the fluctuating effect. The "loss display" or "jackpot display" that appears is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22(b), when the "special reach" performance mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump performance table 222f, the total performance time is "40 seconds", "40000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, "pseudo series 1" is set for the "first effect", "pseudo series 2" is set for the "second effect", and "pseudo series 2" is set for the "second effect", and "pseudo series 2" is set for the "second effect". ``Pseudo-Run 3'' is set in ``3 Effect'', and the effect elements of ``Which Reach'' are set in ``4th Effect''.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 of the slump performance storage area 223h stores performance information regarding "Pseudo-Run 1" and stop symbol information regarding chance symbols. Furthermore, the second performance area 223h2 stores performance information regarding "Pseudo-Run 2" and stop symbol information regarding chance symbols. Furthermore, the third performance area 223h3 stores performance information regarding "Pseudo-Run 3" and stop symbol information regarding chance symbols. Further, the fourth performance area 223h4 stores performance information regarding the performance element of "Which one is reach" and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable performance.

Then, a "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h (see FIG. 44(a)), and the obtained information is The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stop symbol of the variable performance is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIG. 44(f)).

As described above, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command during the "slump state", it extracts the extension time (including the presence or absence) based on the variation pattern command, and extracts the extension time and the variation based on the variation pattern command. The performance time of the entire "slump performance" is set based on the variable time based on the pattern command. Then, the detailed performance contents and each stop symbol of the "slump performance" are set based on the overall performance time of the "slump performance", and the "slump performance" is executed based on the set contents. There is. With this configuration, the "slump effect" is performed longer than the variable time of the acquired variable effect, the effect time performed on the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, and the effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to reduce the number of situations in which the game is not played, and to prevent players from becoming disinterested.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 23, a "non-reach (long) )" production mode (the "non-reach (long)" production mode executed based on squid, winning 1 is referred to as ""non-reach (long) 1")") and extension time of "5 seconds" were selected. If a "slump effect" (i.e., "Gase Pseudo Series 1" and "Gase Pseudo Series 2") is in progress, and the "slump effect" is in progress other than the effect based on the extended time. The setting contents of the "slump effect" when a new fluctuation pattern command is received at the timing (that is, the first half of "false pseudo series 1" or "false pseudo series 2") will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23(a), in the slump effect table 222f for ``during slump effect (other than extended time)'', the effect other than the extended time of the ``slump effect'' being executed based on winning 1 During execution (in the example of FIG. 23(a), during "Gase Pseudo-Ren 2"), a "Non-Non-Run" is made based on a new starting prize (hereinafter referred to as "Winning 2") in the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a. When a variable performance of "Reach (Long)" (hereinafter referred to as "Non-Reach (Long) 2") is acquired, "Non-Reach (Long) 2" is additionally acquired based on the winning 2. The effect time is "15 seconds", and "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on Prize 1, since the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed, each In order to match the performance time of the "slump effect" with the fluctuation time of the obtained variable effect, the extension time set based on winning 1 is reset once, and the effect is based on the "slump effect" based on the extension time. It is configured to reset the performance contents of the subsequent "slump performance" with respect to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance obtained based on the winning 1 and the winning 2 without executing the element. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value for the extension time set based on the winning number 1 (ie, "5000" or "10000") from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). Furthermore, the MPU 221 adds the value for the variable time (ie, "15000") acquired based on the winning prize 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(a), the total performance time of the entire "slump performance" calculated from the start of the first performance element of the "slump performance" is "30 seconds", and the total performance time of the "slump performance" is "30 seconds". The total setting value of the slump effect timer 223g calculated from the start is "30000". Then, "false pseudo series 3" is additionally set in the "third performance" as a performance unit of a series of "slump performances" corresponding to the value of the slump performance timer 223g.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the third performance area 223h3 stores the performance information regarding "Gase Pseudo-Run 3" and the stop symbol information regarding the false chance symbols. In addition, the reserved symbol corresponding to the production element of "Gase Pseudo-Run 3" is displayed in the cockpit display area Db at the timing when the winning prize 2 occurs.

Then, the "slump effect" continues to be performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating effect. The stop symbol of the fake chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol ("non-reach (long) 2", so "lost display"), is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23(b), in the slump effect table 222f for ``during slump effect (other than extended time)'', the ``slump effect'' that is being executed based on the winning number 1 in the ``slump state'' is displayed. If a fluctuating performance with the "Normal Reach" performance mode is acquired based on Winning 2 during execution of a performance other than the extended time of ``, the additional performance time acquired based on Winning 2 will be ``20 seconds''. Yes, "20000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the winning prize 1, since the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "false pseudo series 2" is being executed), In order to perform additional "slump effects" based on Winning 2 from this state, in order to ensure consistency between each "slump effect", if a "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired (Figure 23(a) ), the extension time set based on the first prize is reset once, and the performance contents of the subsequent "slump performance" are reset based on the first prize and the second prize. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value for the extension time set based on the winning number 1 (that is, "5000" or "10000") from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). . Furthermore, the MPU 221 adds the value for the variable time (ie, "20000") acquired based on the winning prize 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(b), the total performance time of the entire "slump performance" converted from the start of the "slump performance" is "35 seconds", which is calculated from the start of the "slump performance". The total setting value of the slump effect timer 223g is "35000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "false pseudo series 1" and the currently executed "false pseudo series") are set. In addition to ``2''), a ``development possibility effect'' is set as a ``third effect,'' and a performance element of ``Which one is more likely to reach'' is set as a ``fourth effect.''

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, the remaining performance time of the "slump performance" is "15 seconds". Therefore, first of all, in the fourth performance area 223h4 where the stop symbols are finally displayed, performance information regarding the performance element of "Which da reach" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbols corresponding to the obtained variable performance are provided. information is stored. Then, as the remaining "5 seconds" of production, the third production area 223h3 is a production element of "development possibility production", which is a production element of "Which way is reach"? Performance information regarding a successful performance (hereinafter referred to as "successful development") and stop symbol information regarding reach-forming symbols that suggest development into the next performance are stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development success as the "third performance" is performed for "5 seconds", the "second development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development success/failure performance" of the development success, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the "second performance", "false pseudo series 2" is stopped and displayed. The false chance pattern that was given is replaced with a reach formation pattern (for example, "788" → "7○7 (○ is changing)"), and the production element of "Which one is reach" which is the "4th effect" Develop.

Then, the "slump performance" is continued based on the performance information and stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth performance areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump performance storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating performance is The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23(b), in the slump effect table 222f for ``during slump effect (other than extended time)'', the ``slump effect'' that is being executed based on the winning number 1 in the ``slump state'' is displayed. If a variable performance of the "Super Reach" performance mode is acquired based on Winning 2 during execution of a performance other than the extended time of ``, the additional performance time acquired based on Winning 2 is ``30 seconds''. Therefore, "30000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the winning prize 1, since the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "false pseudo series 2" is being executed), From that state, in order to perform an additional "slump effect" based on Winning 2, a "non-reach (long)" effect mode or a "normal reach" effect mode was acquired in order to ensure consistency between each "slump effect." As in the case (see FIG. 23(a) or FIG. 23(b)), the extension time set based on Prize 1 is reset once, and the subsequent "slump effect" is performed based on Prize 1 and Prize 2. It is configured to reconfigure the contents. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value for the extension time set based on the winning number 1 (that is, "5000" or "10000") from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). . Further, the MPU 221 adds the value for the variable time (ie, "30000") acquired based on the winning prize 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(b), the total performance time of the entire "slump performance" converted from the start of the "slump performance" is "45 seconds", which is calculated from the start of the "slump performance". The total setting value of the slump effect timer 223g is "45000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "false pseudo series 1" and the currently executed "false pseudo series") are set. 2), ``Development Possibility Effect'' is set as the ``Third Effect'', ``Pseudo-Ren 1'' is set as the ``Fourth Effect'', and furthermore, ``Which?'' is set as the ``Fifth Effect''. The production elements of ``Da Reach'' are set.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, the remaining performance time of the "slump performance" is "25 seconds". Therefore, first, in the fifth performance area 223h5 where the stop symbols are finally displayed, performance information regarding the performance elements of "Which da reach" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbols corresponding to the obtained variable performance are provided. information is stored. Next, as a performance for the remaining "15 seconds", the fourth performance area 223h4 contains performance information regarding "Pseudo Ren 1" to be performed for "10 seconds" and performance elements for the next performance (i.e., "Which way reach"). ) is stored, as well as stop symbol information regarding reach-forming symbols that suggest that the reach formation symbol will develop. Then, as a performance for the remaining "5 seconds", the third performance area 223h3 contains performance information regarding the "development success/failure performance" of successful development, and a suggestion that it will develop into the next performance (i.e., "pseudo series 1"). Stop symbol information regarding the chance symbol to be played is stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development success as the "third performance" is performed for "5 seconds", the "second development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development possibility performance" of the development success, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially cracked, and the "second performance" "false pseudo series 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol that was created is replaced with a chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See Figures 46(e) and (f).), and goes to "pseudo series 1" which is the "4th effect". (See Figure 47(c)).

Then, the "slump performance" continues to be performed based on the performance information and stop symbol information stored in the first to fifth performance areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump performance storage area 223h, and the "slump performance" is continuously performed based on the additionally acquired fluctuating performance. The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 23(b), in the slump effect table 222f for ``during slump effect (other than extended time)'', the ``slump effect'' that is being executed based on the winning number 1 in the ``slump state'' is displayed. If a variable performance of the "Special Reach" performance mode is acquired based on Winning 2 during execution of a performance other than the extended time of ``, the additional performance time acquired based on Winning 2 is ``40 seconds''. Therefore, "40000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on winning prize 1, since the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, "false pseudo series 2" is being executed), From this state, in order to perform additional "slump effects" based on Winning 2, in order to ensure consistency between each "slump effect", we will select the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, or the "super reach" mode. "Similar to the case where the production mode is acquired (see FIG. 23(a) or FIG. 23(b)), the extension time set based on prize 1 is reset once, and the extension time set based on prize 1 and prize 2 is The content of the ``slump effect'' is reset. Therefore, at this stage, the value for the extension time set based on the winning number 1 (ie, "5000" or "10000") is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23(b), the total performance time of the entire "slump performance" converted from the start of the "slump performance" is "55 seconds", which is calculated from the start of the "slump performance". The total setting value of the slump effect timer 223g is "55000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "false pseudo series 1" and the currently executed "false pseudo series") are set. 2), ``Development Possibility Effect'' is set as the ``Third Effect'', ``Pseudo-Run 1'' is set as the ``Fourth Effect'', and furthermore, ``Pseudo-Run 1'' is set as the ``Fifth Effect''. "Run 2" is set, and the production element "Which one is reach" is set as the "sixth production".

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, the remaining performance time of the "slump performance" is "35 seconds". Therefore, first, in the sixth performance area 223h6 where the stop symbols are finally displayed, performance information regarding the performance element of "Which da reach" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbols corresponding to the obtained variable performance are provided. information is stored. Next, as the remaining "25 seconds" of production, the fifth production area 223h5 contains production information regarding "Pseudo Ren 2" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and production elements of the next production (i.e., "Dochida Reach"). ) is stored, as well as stop symbol information regarding reach-forming symbols that suggest that the reach formation symbol will develop. Next, for the remaining "15 seconds" of performance, the fourth performance area 223h4 contains performance information regarding "Pseudo Series 1" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and development for the next performance (i.e., "Pseudo Series 2"). Stop symbol information regarding chance symbols that suggest that the game will occur is stored. Then, as a performance for the remaining "5 seconds", the third performance area 223h3 contains performance information regarding the "development success/failure performance" of successful development, and a suggestion that it will develop into the next performance (i.e., "pseudo series 1"). Stop symbol information regarding the chance symbol to be played is stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development success as the "third performance" is performed for "5 seconds", the "second development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development success/failure performance" of the development success, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the "second performance", "false pseudo series 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol that was created is replaced with a chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See Figures 46(e) and (f).), and goes to "Pseudo-Run 1" which is the "4th effect". (See Figure 47(c)).

Then, the "slump effect" continues to be performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to sixth effect areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating effect is The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to control the sound ramp control device 113 in the "slump performance" that is executed based on the winning number 1 in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", except for the extended time of the "slump performance". If a variable performance is acquired based on a new winning 2 to the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a during the execution of the performance, a "slump performance" other than the extended time based on the winning 1 is being executed. For this reason, in order to make the additional "slump effect" based on win 2 consistent with each "slump effect", we will reset the extension time set based on win 1, and The content of the subsequent "slump effect" is reset based on 2 and 2. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new starting prize in the middle of a "slump effect," the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized. , it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable without causing any discrepancy in the performance. As a result, when executing a ``slump effect'' based on a starting prize in a ``slump state'', there will be a gap between the end timing of a series of ``slump effects'' and the end timing of the obtained fluctuating effect; Even if a new starting prize occurs during the performance, the content of the performance can be consistent, so even if the ``slump performance'' is executed for a longer time than the fluctuating time of the acquired fluctuating performance, the performance It becomes possible to execute a performance that is longer than the variation time of the acquired variation performance while configuring the system so that no discrepancy occurs in the content.

In addition, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and furthermore, when resetting, The remaining time that is less than the execution time of the first production element (i.e., less than "10 seconds") is a production that does not create a sense of discomfort even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and the production time is flexible. (There is a wide range) Set it to compensate for the "development possibility". With this configuration, even if a variable effect is added due to a new starting prize in the middle of a "slump effect," the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be changed. It is possible to synchronize the performances, and to provide a performance that does not make the player feel strange without causing any inconsistency in the performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 24, "slump effect" (i.e., " "Gase Pseudo Series 1" and "Gase Pseudo Series 2") are being executed, and the "slump effect" is at the timing when the performance based on the extended time is being executed (i.e., the latter half of "Gase Pseudo Series 2"). The setting contents of the "slump effect" when a new fluctuation pattern command is received will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(a), in the slump effect table 222f for "during slump effect (during extended time)", based on the winning number 1 in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" During the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the ``slump effect'' being executed (in the example shown in FIG. 24(a), when ``4 seconds'' of the extended time has elapsed during the ``Gase Pseudo Series 2''), When a variable effect of "Non-reach (Long) 2" is acquired based on a new prize 2 entered into the winning slots 77a and 78a, "Non-reach (Long)" is additionally acquired based on the winning 2. The production time of "2" is "15 seconds", and the value "15000" of the slump production timer 223g is added (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on Prize 1, the "slump effect" is being performed during the extra time, so the effect based on the extra time has already been performed, and from that state, based on Prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect," the remaining amount of the extra time obtained based on winning 1 is stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). The content of the "slump effect" is then reset based on the variable time obtained based on the winning number 2. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the variable time obtained based on the winning prize 2 (ie, "15000") to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24(a), the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the time of winning 2 is "19 seconds", and at the time of winning 2, the remaining "slump effect" " has a remaining time of "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance obtained based on the winning prize 2 is "15 seconds", "15000" is added (set) to the value of the slump performance timer 223g at this point. Then, as a "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), a "development possibility effect" is added to the "third effect", and a "false effect" is added to the "fourth effect". "Pseudo-association 3" is additionally set.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, since the remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the currently running "Gase Pseudo Series 2" is the same as the above residual value, when "Gase Pseudo Series 2" ends, the remaining "Slump Effect" The value is determined to be "14000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "15000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets a "slump effect" to be performed after the "third effect" for "10 seconds" in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed. Performance information of the "Gase Pseudo Series 3" to be performed and stop symbol information regarding the Gase Chance symbols are stored. Then, as the remaining "4 seconds" of performance, in the third performance area 223h3, there is a performance element of "development success/failure performance" in which the development to the next performance (i.e., "Gase Pseudo-Run 3") fails. Performance information regarding development failure and a false chance pattern indicating that the next performance will not develop are stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development failure as the "third performance" is performed for "4 seconds", the "second development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development success/failure performance" of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not appear to crack and stops displaying the "second performance" "false pseudo series 2". The false chance symbol that was given continues to be displayed as is.

Then, the "slump effect" continues to be performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating effect is The stop symbol of the fake chance symbol, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol ("non-reach (long) 2", so "lost display"), is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends. .

With this configuration, even if a variable effect is added due to a new starting prize in the middle of a "slump effect," the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" will be the same. can be synchronized, and a performance that does not make the player feel strange can be provided without causing discrepancies in the performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(b), in the slump effect table 222f for "during slump effect (during extended time)", the winning number 1 in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is determined. During the execution of the performance based on the extension time of the "slump performance" that is currently being executed (in the first embodiment, during "Gase pseudo-ren 2"), based on the new prize winning 2 to the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a. When a variable performance with the "Normal Reach" performance mode is acquired, the performance time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "20 seconds", and the value of the slump performance timer 223g "20000" is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on Prize 1, the "slump effect" is being executed during the extra time, so the effect is already performed based on the extended time, and from that state, based on Prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect," the remaining amount of the extra time obtained based on winning 1 is stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). The content of the "slump effect" is then reset based on the variable time obtained based on the second prize. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the variable time obtained based on the winning prize 2 (ie, "20000") to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24(b), the ``slump effect'' performed from the start time of the ``slump effect'' to the time of winning 2 is ``19 seconds'', and at the time of winning 2, the remaining ``slump effect'' is " has a remaining time of "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance obtained based on the winning prize 2 is "20 seconds", "20000" is added (set) to the value of the slump performance timer 223g at this point. Then, as a "slump performance" corresponding to the value of the slump performance timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e. "1000"), "development possible performance" is added to the "third performance", and "Which one is selected" is added to the "fourth performance". The production elements of ``Da Reach'' are additionally set.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, since the remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the currently running "Gase Pseudo Series 2" is the same as the above residual value, when "Gase Pseudo Series 2" ends, the remaining "Slump Effect" The value is determined to be "19000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "20000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets a "slump effect" to be performed after the "second effect" for "10 seconds" in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed. Performance information regarding the performance elements of "Which way reach" to be performed and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable performance are stored. Then, as a performance for the remaining "9 seconds", the third performance area 223h3 contains performance information regarding the "development success/failure performance" of successful development, and development to the next performance (i.e., the performance element of "Which one reaches"). Stop symbol information regarding reach-forming symbols that suggest this is stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development success as the "third performance" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development success/failure performance" of the development success, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially cracked, and the "second performance" "false pseudo series 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol that was given is replaced with a reach formation symbol (for example, "788" → "7○7 (○ is changing)". See Figures 46 (d) to (f).), "4th effect" This develops into a production element of ``Dochida Reach'' (see Figure 47(e)).

Then, the "slump effect" continues to be performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating effect is The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(b), in the slump effect table 222f for "during slump effect (during extended time)", the winning number 1 in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is determined. During the execution of the performance based on the extension time of the "slump performance" that is currently being executed (in the first embodiment, during "Gase pseudo-ren 2"), based on the new prize winning 2 to the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a. When a variable performance with the "Super Reach" performance mode is acquired, the performance time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "30 seconds", and the value "30000" of the slump performance timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on Prize 1, the "slump effect" is being executed during the extra time, so the effect is already performed based on the extended time, and from that state, based on Prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect," the remaining amount of the extra time obtained based on winning 1 is stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). The content of the "slump effect" is then reset based on the variable time obtained based on the second prize. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the variable time obtained based on the winning prize 2 (ie, "30000") to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24(b), the ``slump effect'' performed from the start time of the ``slump effect'' to the time of winning 2 is ``19 seconds'', and at the time of winning 2, the remaining ``slump effect'' is " has a remaining time of "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance obtained based on the winning prize 2 is "30 seconds", "30000" is added (set) to the value of the slump performance timer 223g at this point. Then, as a "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), a "development possibility effect" is added to the "third effect", and a "pseudo effect" is added to the "fourth effect". The effect elements of ``Run 1'' and ``Which way is reach'' are additionally set in the ``5th effect''.

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, since the remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the currently running "Gase Pseudo Series 2" is the same as the above residual value, when "Gase Pseudo Series 2" ends, the remaining "Slump Effect" The value is determined to be "29000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "30000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets a "slump effect" to be performed after the "second effect" for "10 seconds" in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop symbol is finally displayed. Performance information regarding the performance elements of "Which way reach" to be performed and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable performance are stored. Next, as the remaining "19 seconds" of production, the fourth production area 223h4 contains production information regarding "Pseudo Ren 1" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and production elements of the next production (i.e., "Which way reach"). ) is stored, as well as stop symbol information regarding reach-forming symbols that suggest that the reach formation symbol will develop. Then, as a performance for the remaining "9 seconds", the third performance area 223h3 contains performance information regarding the "development success/failure performance" of successful development, and a suggestion that it will develop into the next performance (i.e., "pseudo series 1"). Stop symbol information regarding the chance symbol to be played is stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development success as the "third performance" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development success/failure performance" of the development success, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially cracked, and the "second performance" "false pseudo series 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol that was created is replaced with a chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See Figures 46(d) to (f).), and goes to "Pseudo-Run 1" which is the "4th effect". (See Figure 47(c)).

Then, the "slump effect" continues to be performed based on the effect information and stop symbol information stored in the first to fifth effect areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating effect is The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 24(b), in the slump effect table 222f for "during slump effect (during extended time)", the winning number 1 in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is determined. During the execution of the performance based on the extension time of the "slump performance" that is currently being executed (in the first embodiment, during "Gase pseudo-ren 2"), based on the new prize winning 2 to the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a. When a variable performance of the "Special Reach" performance mode is acquired, the performance time additionally acquired based on the winning prize 2 is "40 seconds", and the value "40000" of the slump performance timer 223g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on Prize 1, the "slump effect" is being executed during the extra time, so the effect is already performed based on the extended time, and from that state, based on Prize 2. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect," the remaining amount of the extra time obtained based on winning 1 is stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then , the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). The content of the "slump effect" is then reset based on the variable time obtained based on the second prize. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the variable time obtained based on the winning prize 2 (ie, "40000") to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24(b), the ``slump effect'' performed from the start time of the ``slump effect'' to the time of winning 2 is ``19 seconds'', and at the time of winning 2, the remaining ``slump effect'' is " has a remaining time of "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". After holding the value of the slump effect timer 223g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0". Next, since the fluctuating time of the fluctuating performance obtained based on the winning prize 2 is "40 seconds", "40000" is added (set) to the value of the slump performance timer 223g at this point. Then, as a "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the remaining value (i.e., "1000"), a "development possibility effect" is added to the "third effect", and a "pseudo effect" is added to the "fourth effect". "Sequence 1", "Pseudo series 2" for "Fifth production", and "Which way reach" production elements are additionally set for "Sixth production".

Specifically, the first performance area 223h1 and the second performance area 223h2 of the slump performance storage area 223h have already been filled with the performance information of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1" and "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" and the stop symbols related to the Gase Chance eye symbols. At this stage, the "20 seconds" performance has already been set. Therefore, since the remaining value from the time of winning 2 until the end of the currently running "Gase Pseudo Series 2" is the same as the above residual value, when "Gase Pseudo Series 2" ends, the remaining "Slump Effect" The value is determined to be "39000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "40000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 first sets a "slump effect" to be performed after the "second effect" for "10 seconds" in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop symbol is finally displayed. Performance information regarding the performance elements of "Which way reach" to be performed and stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable performance are stored. Next, as the remaining "29 seconds" of production, the fifth production area 223h5 contains production information regarding "Pseudo Ren 2" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and production elements for the next production (i.e., "Which way reach"). ) is stored, as well as stop symbol information regarding reach-forming symbols that suggest that the reach formation symbol will develop. Then, as the remaining "19 seconds" of performance, the fourth performance area 223h4 contains performance information regarding "Pseudo Series 1" that will be performed for "10 seconds" and will develop into the next performance (i.e., "Pseudo Series 2") Stop symbol information related to chance symbols indicating that this is the case is stored. Next, as a performance for the remaining "9 seconds", the third performance area 223h3 contains performance information regarding the "development success/failure performance" of successful development and a suggestion to develop into the next performance (i.e., "pseudo series 1"). Stop symbol information regarding the chance symbol to be played is stored.

Note that since the performance element of the "development success/failure performance" of the development success as the "third performance" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development success/failure performance" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development success/failure performance" of the development success, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially cracked, and the "second performance" "false pseudo series 2" is stopped and displayed. The fake chance symbol that was created is replaced with a chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See Figures 46(d) to (f).), and goes to "Pseudo-Run 1" which is the "4th effect". (See Figure 47(c)).

Then, the "slump performance" continues to be performed based on the performance information and stop symbol information stored in the first to sixth performance areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump performance storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired fluctuating performance is The "loss display" or "jackpot display" corresponding to the stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the extension time of the "slump effect" in the "slump effect" that is executed based on the winning number 1 in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state". If a variable performance is acquired based on a new prize 2 to the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a while the performance based on the winning number 1 is being executed, a "slump performance" of an extended time based on the winning 1 is being executed. For this reason, in order to perform an additional "slump effect" based on win 2, in order to ensure consistency between each "slump effect", we first store the remaining amount of the extra time obtained based on win 1 ( (See S1422 in FIG. 39), and then clears the value of the slump effect timer 223g to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). The content of the "slump effect" is then reset based on the variable time obtained based on the second prize. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new starting prize in the middle of a "slump effect," the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized. , it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable without causing any discrepancy in the performance.

In addition, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and furthermore, when resetting, The remaining time that is less than 1 production unit is compensated for with a "developable production" that does not create a sense of discomfort even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and that has flexibility (with a range) in production time. Set it as follows. Further, the maximum performance time of this "development possibility performance" is configured to be equal to the obtainable extension time. With this configuration, in a situation where a "slump effect" that is longer than the obtained variable effect is being executed, that is, when a "slump effect" based on the extended time is being executed, a new Even if variable effects are added due to start-up winnings, it is possible to maintain consistency in the effect time by using the "development possibility effect" that can be executed within a width equal to or less than the extension time, and the obtained variable effects can be Since the end timing and the end timing of the entire ``slump performance'' can be synchronized, there is no discrepancy in the performance, and it is possible to provide a performance that the player does not feel strange about.

Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. The pending information storage area 223i contains information for performing pre-reading processing, that is, a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter, which is acquired from the counter buffer 203b upon starting winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the pending pitch number command. This area is for storing the values of C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1.

The audio lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform a prefetch process (hold display setting process). (See Figure 38)).

The execution information storage area 223j contains information for performing a variable performance on the third symbol display device 81, that is, the jackpot information acquired from the counter buffer 203b upon starting winnings in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the pending ball number command. This is an area for storing each value of a random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable effect, the MPU 221 of the above-mentioned pending information storage area 223i (FIG. 25 The information (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the variable performance area 223j is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j.

Here, details of the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j.

The execution information storage area 223j includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223j1 where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223j2 where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. At least a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223j3 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223j4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

In addition, the pending information storage area 223i has four areas, the first to fourth areas for storing pending information, and each of the first to fourth areas for storing pending information has a jackpot like the execution information storage area 223j. A jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1 where the value of the random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223i2 where the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, and a stop pattern selection counter where the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored. At least a storage area 223i3 and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223i4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223j is an area corresponding to the currently running variation effect, and the first pending information storage area is the area corresponding to the variation effect that was suspended first in terms of time among the suspended variation effects. The second area for storing pending information is an area corresponding to the performance, and the second area for storing pending information is the area corresponding to the second oldest suspended variable performance in terms of time among the suspended variable performances, and the third area for storing pending information is This area corresponds to the third oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, and the fourth area for storing pending information corresponds to the fourth oldest suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances. This is an area that supports variable production.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number of pending balls command from the main control device 110, it inputs each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the number of pending balls command. Extract. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 applies the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the number of reserved pitches command among the first to fourth reservation information storage areas. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223i4.

Specifically, if the number of pending pitches included in the pending pitch number command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects that are pending at that point is X, and the number of pending pitches included in the pending pitch number command is The values of each of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the Xth temporally suspended variable performance among the suspended variable performances, so the values of each counter storage area of the Xth pending information storage area The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223i1 to 223i4 are stored. At this time, the main controller 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number of reserved balls command in the reserved ball Xth area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. In other words, the same values as the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the X-th reservation area of the main control device 110 are stored in the X-th reservation information storage area.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a prefetch process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage X area. ), and the suspension change information generated based on the result of this prefetching process is stored in the aforementioned suspension display information storage area 223e (see FIG. 19). That is, information regarding the fluctuating performance is stored in the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j, and the performance information and stop symbol information of the "slump performance" are stored in the above-mentioned slump performance storage area 223h. The number of holds and hold change information of ``performance'' are stored in the hold display information storage area 223e.

On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a variation effect from the main control device 110, it executes a shift process in the pending information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j. In other words, the number of suspended variable effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the first temporally suspended variable effect is started, so the first pending information storage area corresponding to the first suspended variable effect is The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the respective storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed.

In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second pending information storage area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the first pending information storage area, and The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second pending information storage area, and The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third pending information storage area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223j stores the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110. In addition, the same values as the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110 are stored in the holding information storage areas 1 to 4, respectively. will be done. That is, in the audio lamp control device 113, counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects being executed and on hold in the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223j and the pending information storage area 223i. Ru.

In the audio lamp control device 113, when performing the pre-reading process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)), the number of variable performances held (the number of held balls) is grasped from the sub-held ball number counter 223b. Then, based on the number of pending balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area where the variable production is pending among the first to fourth pending information storage areas are read in advance, and the variable production, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there will be a jackpot in one performance unit (namely, the last performance element executed) in the "slump performance", the fluctuation time, etc. For example, if the value of the sub-pending pitch counter 223b is "1", the number of pending pitches in the variable performance is one, so for the first pending information storage area, each of the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 Read ahead the value and make a judgment. Furthermore, if the value of the sub-pending ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of pending balls in the variable performance is 4, so regarding the fourth pending information storage area, each of the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 Read ahead the value and make a judgment.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that commands are sent only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 is configured to access the RAM 203, etc. of the main controller 110. I can't. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 provides a hold information storage area 223i, and stores each counter C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable effects held in the main control device 110 in the audio lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, by referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in this pending information storage area 223i, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process.

In other words, if the suspended variable effect or "slump effect" is executed, what will be the result of the variable effect or "slump effect" (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). The audio ramp control device 113 can make a judgment before executing the variable effect or the "slump effect" and execute control related to determining the execution of various effects.

Note that the above-mentioned shift processing in the holding information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j is based on the number of held balls when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received (updating based on reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command is performed). Based on the value of the sub-pending pitch counter 223b before the ball is released, data is moved (shifted) only for the area corresponding to the pending variable performance among the first to fourth pending information storage areas.

For example, when the variable pattern command and the stop type command are received, the value of the sub-held pitch counter 223b before update is "4", and all areas of the held information storage area 223i (the first to fourth areas for holding information storage ) has data stored in it. In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j, the data in the second pending information storage area is shifted to the first pending information storage area, and the data in the third pending information storage area is held. The data in the fourth area for storing pending information is shifted to the third area for storing pending information.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-held pitch counter 223b before update when receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command is "2", the data in the first holding information storage area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. , the data in the second pending information storage area is shifted to the first pending information storage area, and the data shifting is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the third and fourth pending information storage areas where no variable effects are pending, so the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first to fourth pending information storage areas is shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller (the execution information storage area 223j or the first to third pending information storage areas). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (on hold) in each of the first to fourth holding information storage areas, so it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 17, the explanation will be continued. The performance conversion flag 223k is a flag for changing the 1st "fake pseudo-connection" performance in the "slump performance" to the performance element of the "development possible performance" in the on state. In the first embodiment, when a series of "slump effects" are performed, when no balls are held in the holding device 73, no balls are entered into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbols that are dummy holding displays are not displayed. . For this reason, if you execute a ``slump effect'' that includes a ``false pseudo-run'' effect that uses 1 pending symbol, the number of effects in the ``slump effect'' will not match the number of pending symbols. . Therefore, when a ball is not placed in the dummy prize opening 75 based on the fact that the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the ``Gase Pseudo-Ren'' effect, which is a ``slump effect'' in which one held symbol is consumed, is held. It is configured to perform a series of ``slump effects'' by converting the design into an undigested ``development possibility effect'' effect element.

This performance conversion flag 223k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When a pending rank up command is received from the main control device 110 to increase the display mode of the pending symbol or executed symbol by one rank, that is, if the starting prize in the "slump state" (the previous starting prize (winning 1), (including any subsequent starting winnings (winning 2)), and the variable pattern of the variable performance based on the starting winnings includes a "reach display", or when the ball is not held in the holding device 73. , this effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

On the other hand, the effect conversion flag 223k is configured to be set to OFF after setting the effect contents in the "slump effect" in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) (see S1418 in FIG. 39).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when setting the performance content of the "slump performance" based on the start winning in the "slump state", in a situation where the performance conversion flag 223k is set to ON, the start When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance obtained based on winning does not include "reach display", the performance information of the 1 "Gase pseudo-ren" performance set in the slump performance storage area 223h is changed to "Development possible or not". The information is configured to be converted into performance information of performance elements of ``performance''. By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain consistency between the number of performances (number of performance units) of the "slump performance" and the number of reserved symbols, and it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. can.

In addition, this performance conversion flag 223k is turned on when no balls are held in the holding device 73, and is also turned on when the ball is not held in the hold device 73, and is also turned on when the hold rank up is output when the fluctuation pattern of the obtained variable performance includes "reach display". Since it is also set to on when a command is received (see S1205 in FIG. 37), it is initialized ( In other words, it is configured to be turned off). Specifically, in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39), if the variation pattern of the obtained variation effect includes a "reach display", and in a "slump effect" where the "gase pseudo-ren" effect is not executed. Even if the fluctuation pattern of the obtained fluctuation performance does not include "reach display" and it is a "slump performance" in which a "gase pseudo-relationship" performance is executed, the "slump performance" ” is configured to be turned off after setting the presentation content (see 1418 in FIG. 39). With this configuration, even if a new starting prize (i.e., prize 2) occurs during the execution of the "slump effect" and the contents of the "slump effect" are additionally changed (updated), Since the setting contents of the effect conversion flag 223k are initialized at that timing, when resetting the effect contents based on the new starting prize (i.e., winning 2), the setting contents of the effect conversion flag 223k are initialized. It is possible to set a consistent effect without being affected by the settings of the "slump effect" based on the ``slump effect''.

The RAM 223 also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 37) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process reads The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, setting a command for the display control device 114, etc.) is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 displays a variable effect related to the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and “ It controls the ``slump performance'' or the ``pending change notice'' in the pending symbols and executed symbols.

This display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240, 241. ing.

The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 instructs the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 through the input port 238. Commands are received from the audio lamp controller 113. Also connected to the input port 238 are an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, and an image controller 237 via a bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is also connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different jackpot lottery probability or a different number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot, there are models with exactly the same pattern configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on commands input from the audio lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs.

The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area (not shown) in which image data of each sprite, such as a pattern (background pattern or decorative pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, is stored. In the character storage area, the above image data is stored in compressed format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression is approximately 1024 megabytes, and the approximately 1024 megabytes of image data is compressed to approximately 768 megabytes and stored in the character storage area.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having a frame buffer area for storing one frame of images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for two frames.

The image controller 237 generates one frame of image data according to the drawing list and writes it into one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and also generates one frame of image data written into the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. By reading out the read image data and outputting the read image data to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed image data) of the sprite specified in the drawing list from the character storage area (not shown) in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and decompresses ( Then, processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the drawing list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list.

The writing of one frame's worth of image data to one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame's worth of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. do. When the reading of one frame's worth of image data from the other frame buffer area is completed, the reading of the previously written one frame's worth of image data from the one frame buffer area is subsequently performed, and during that time, the other frame buffer area is read out from the other frame buffer area. Image data for the next frame is written into the frame buffer area.

In this way, by writing image data and reading image data alternately between one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 34. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on (see FIG. 33), main processing that is executed after the startup processing (see FIG. 34), and periodic processing (see FIG. 34). In this case, there is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) that is started at a 4-millisecond period) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then startup processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and main processing, commands to be sent to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, a command for the number of reserved balls set in a starting winning process (see FIG. 27) to be described later is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 28) and the variation start process (FIG. 29), which is a process of the variation process, are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal set when a ball is launched in a launch control process (see S110 in FIG. 26) to be described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then a jackpot process is executed to execute the process when the first symbol (third symbol) hits the jackpot (S103). .

Next, a second symbol control process is executed to perform a process related to variable display of the second symbol and drive control of the electric accessory 79 (S104). To explain briefly, a variable display of the second symbol is performed on the second symbol display device 83 on the condition that the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67, and as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, the second symbol is displayed. When a winning symbol (for example, an "○" symbol) appears and becomes a winning state, the electric accessory 79 is driven open for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the states of the various switches 208 and 73g connected to the main control device 110 are read, the states of the switches 208 and 73g are determined, and detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. In addition, based on the detection information of the held ball detection switch 73g, it is recognized whether or not a ball is held in the holding device 73, and then the start winning process (S108) and the holding device control process (S111), which will be described later, are executed. Execute.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value is The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hit random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in the first embodiment, , "899", "99", "99", "199", "99"), respectively, are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot random number counter C4. The initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

Next, a start winning process is executed in response to a winning in the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a (S108). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the process for dynamically displaying the first symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S108). 81, a variation process for setting a variation pattern (performance pattern) of the third symbol variation effect or "slump effect" is executed (S109). Note that details of the variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the variation process (S109), a firing control process is executed (S110). This firing control process (S110) is performed under the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Then, when the ball launch is on, in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112, information on the ball launch signal is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

After executing the launch control process (S110), a holding device control process is executed (S111). In the holding device control process, processing is performed to determine whether or not to release (release) the ball held in the holding device 73 based on the settings of the holding device drive flag 203f and the value of the holding device drive timer 203g. be exposed. The details of the holding device control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

After executing the holding device control process (S111), a dummy winning process is executed (S112). In the dummy winning process, a prize ball command is set for the payout control device 111 and a dummy hold command is set for the audio lamp control device 113 depending on whether a ball has entered the dummy winning hole 75 or not. The details of the dummy winning process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

After executing the dummy winning process (S112), other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S108). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a, and if there has been a winning, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (reserved) ) Execute the process. It also executes a process for transmitting the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this starting winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting winning) in the special map winning openings 77a, 78a (S201). Here, a special drawing ball opening switch (not shown) is read in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt processing (see S105 in FIG. 26) and detects the ball entering (winning) into the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a. Based on the output signal of , the ball entering the special figure winning holes 77a, 78a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (there has been a starting winning) (S201: Yes), the 3 prize balls instruct the payout control device 111 to pay out 3 prize balls. A command is set (S202), and the process moves to S203. The 3 prize balls command set in the process of S202 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. Inside, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the number of prize balls in the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a and the dummy winning hole 75 is the same, three. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the prize into the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a or the dummy winning hole 75 based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. Therefore, the player can determine whether the performance being performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a fluctuating performance in a "normal state" or a "slump performance" in a "slump state" based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. ”, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game even if a “slump effect” is performed that lasts longer than the actual variable time of the variable effect. can do.

In the process of S203, the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number N of reserved balls in operation of the dynamic display of the first symbol (variable effect of the third symbol) reserved in the main control device 110) reaches the upper limit (the first In the embodiment, it is determined whether the number is less than "4" (S203). Then, even if there is a winning in the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a, if the number of pending balls N<4 is not reached (S203: No), this starting winning process (S108) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26 Reference).

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N<4 (S203: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the active pending ball number counter 203a (the active pending ball number N) (S204). Then, the process moves to S205.

In the process of S205, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8), and the values are read out from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8), and are read out from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8). Of the first to fourth reservation areas, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the reservation ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the area 203c4 (S205).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S204 is "1" based on the winnings in the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a, each storage area of the reserved first area The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in 203c1 to 203c4, respectively. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", it is stored in each storage area 203c1 to 203c4 of the reserved second area, and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3", the reserved ball is reserved. If the value of the reserved balls counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in each of the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the fourth reserved area. Value is held.

Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S204 (the number of active reserved balls N), the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203c in the process of S205. In order to transmit a held ball number command including the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to the audio lamp control device 113, the held ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. (S206). As a result, the held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) to be executed next.

Note that the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 to be included in the held ball count command in the process of S206 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203b in the process of S205, or the values of the held balls stored in the process of S205 may be used. A read value stored (on hold) in the area 203c may be used.

After executing the process of S206, it is determined whether the starting prize is a starting prize during the "slump state", that is, whether the value of the main slump counter 203e is greater than "0" (S207). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is not larger than "0" (S207: No), that is, if the value of the main slump counter 203e is "0", the relevant starting prize is awarded. is not a start-up win during a "slump state" but a start-up win in a "normal state." Therefore, since there is no need to perform control related to the "slump effect" based on the starting prize, the starting winning process (S108) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S207, if it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0" (S207: Yes), the starting winning is a starting winning during the "slump state", so the "slump" The process moves to S208 in order to perform control related to the effect.

In the process of S208, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the main slump counter 203e (S208), and then it is determined whether or not the held ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209). As a result of the determination, if the held ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209: Yes), since the ball is held in the holding device 73, a held symbol consistent with the "slump effect" is then displayed. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the variation pattern is such that the reserved ball is won into the dummy winning hole 75, the process moves to S210.

In the process of S210, it is determined whether or not "reach display" is included in the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance acquired based on the starting winning, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern counter acquired this time. Based on the values of C3 and the variation type counter CS1, it is determined whether the selected variation performance is a "normal reach" production mode, a "super reach" production mode, a "special reach" production mode, or a "special variation" production mode. (S210).

As a result of the determination, if the variation pattern does not include the "reach display" (S210: No), each production unit of the series of "slump effects" to be executed from now on will be determined based on the number of executions of the obtained variation effect (number of pending symbols). Since the "Gase Pseudo-Run" effect will be executed one more number of times (that is, twice), in order to maintain consistency in the display of the pending symbols, the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON (S211), and the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON (S211). The value of the device drive timer 203g is set to "1500" (S212), and this startup winning process (S108) is ended. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the balls held in the holding device 73 to flow into the dummy prize opening 75 and to display the held symbols, which are dummy held displays, and to control the production unit in a series of "slump effects". It is possible to maintain consistency between the number of presentations and the number of pending symbols. Note that after the start winning process ends, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

In addition, in the process of S209, if the held ball detection switch 73g is not turned on (S209: No), since no balls are held in the holding device 73, there are no balls to be flowed into the dummy prize opening 75. Without performing the processing of S210 to S212, a pending rank up command is set (S213), and this starting prize winning processing (S108) is ended.

In addition, in the process of S210, if the fluctuation pattern includes "reach display" (S210: Yes), a "pseudo series" is performed in which the pending symbols are not consumed in the "slump effect", and a "reach" is displayed. Since the performance element is executed, in this case as well, the processing in S211 and S212 is not performed, and the subsequent gaming state is first returned to the "normal state" and the "slump performance" is set based on the additional starting winning. To prevent this, the value of the main slump counter 203e is cleared to "0" (S214). Then, as in the case where no balls are held in the holding device 73, a holding rank up command is set (S213), and this starting winning process (S108) is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending rank up command, if the variation pattern includes the "ready-to-reach display", the number of performances of the "slump effect" and the number of displayed pending symbols are displayed. Since they match, the ``slump effect'' is executed with the originally set effect contents. On the other hand, if the variation pattern does not include "reach display", the number of performances of "slump effect" and the number of displayed pending symbols do not match, so in the initially set performance content, " It is configured to execute a series of ``slump effects'' by changing the effect of ``false pseudo series'' to the effect element of ``development possibility effect'' in which the first pending symbol is not consumed. With this configuration, it is possible to match the number of times the "slump effect" is performed and the number of pending symbols displayed, and even if the "slump effect" is performed for a longer time than the actual fluctuation time, it will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to provide a performance that is not available.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the fluctuation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this variation processing. This fluctuation processing controls the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 and the fluctuation performance performed on the third symbol display device 81, and also controls the fluctuation performance performed on the third symbol display device 81. This is used to set the demo display and the "slump state".

In this fluctuation process (S109), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not there is currently a jackpot (S301). During a jackpot game, the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 during a jackpot game and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends are included. As a result of the determination, if it is a jackpot (S301: Yes), the fluctuation process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

If it is not a jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamic display. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 was stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). As a result, the stopped symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the stopped symbols can be visually recognized by the player. can.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S303, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the movement of the first symbol held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number of pending pitches (N) for target display (variable effect) is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display of the first symbol (fluctuation effect of the third symbol), and first, The value of the reserved pitch counter 203a is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display of the first symbol (variation effect of the third symbol) is started by the variation start process (S307) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first symbol decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S306). This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the pending ball storage area 203c toward the pending ball execution area 203d, from the first pending area to the pending ball execution area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area 203d, second reservation area → first reservation area, third reservation area → second reservation area, fourth reservation area → third reservation area.

After the data shift process in S306, a fluctuation start process is executed for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the data shift process. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). Note that the fluctuation start process (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (number of active reserved balls N) is "0" (S304: No), a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S308). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of active held balls N) is greater than "0". The period between the two is determined to be a demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it sends a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 sends a demo command to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Performs control to display effects.

Here, the demonstration command is set when, as described above, there is no held ball when a predetermined period of time has passed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the variation effect is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the variation is stopped, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that if it is determined in the process of S308 that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether a second predetermined time period longer than the predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Thereby, when there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration performance immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S308, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S308: Yes), then after the demo is in progress, the maximum extension time (i.e. , after entering the demonstration period (S310). As a result of the determination, if the maximum extension time has elapsed (S310: Yes), the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "2" in order to set the gaming state from the "normal state" to the "slump state". (S311). Here, by setting the value of the main slump counter 203e to "2", it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the game is in a "slump state" at the timing of subsequent start winnings. Then, in order to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that it has entered a "slump state," a slump command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) is performed. return. Note that since the audio ramp control device 113 can recognize the occurrence of a "slump state" by receiving the demo command, it may be configured not to set the slump command itself.

The slump command set in the process of S312 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio ramp control device 113 receives the slump command, it sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON, and while the sub-slump flag 223f is set to ON, the audio ramp control device 113 side also performs an operation according to the "slump state". This makes it possible to perform different processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S310, if it is determined that the maximum extension time has not elapsed after entering the demo (S310: No), the processes of S311 and S312 are skipped, and the "slump state" is set. This variation processing (S109) is ended without performing the above.

This means that in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the series of "slump effects" are executed during the maximum extended time ( That is, it is configured to be executed for a maximum of 10 seconds). Therefore, among a series of "slump effects", during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, that is, during the demo period, at the timing when a new starting prize occurs, a new "slump effect" is added as a "slump state". ”, a setting process is required to ensure consistency with the “slump effect” being executed, and there is a risk that the setting process for ensuring consistency may become complicated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump effect" is started, the main control device 110 side will restart the "slump state" until the extension time in the "slump effect" ends. Changes to ``slump state'' when a series of ``slump effects'' are completed without making any settings. In other words, while a series of "slump effects" are being executed, the variable time of the variable effect has elapsed, and even if it is internally in the demo effect state, it will change to the "slump state" for a while. is awaited. Therefore, the main control device 110 is configured to complete a series of "slump effects" and then enter the "slump state" and set the "slump effect" again. There is no need to perform complicated control regarding consistency with the "slump effect," and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced even when performing the "slump effect."

Next, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed. (S313). The display time during the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this dynamic display If the time (variable time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

In the first embodiment, in the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37, for example, the center segment of the 7-segment display 37b blinks until a variable time period elapses after dynamic display is started. The display mode is set.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol will be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is set (S315). The stop symbols are set in advance by a variation start process (S307) which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the process of S306, and if it is a jackpot, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, After hitting the jackpot, it is determined whether the symbol is a ``15R probability variable jackpot'', a ``15R normal jackpot'', or a ``2R probability variable jackpot''.

In the first embodiment, when it becomes a "15R definite strange jackpot" after the jackpot, the symbol "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, and when it becomes a "15R normal jackpot", the 7-segment display 37b A symbol of "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, and in the case of a "2R guaranteed strange jackpot", a symbol of "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Furthermore, in the case of a loss, only the center segment of the 7-segment display 37b is displayed (ie, "-").

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable production in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b in the first symbol display device 37. In order to confirm the display in synchronization with the display, a confirmation command is set (S316), and this variation processing (S109) is ended. The confirmation command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to confirm and display the variable performance being executed.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it sends a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 if it is the end timing of the "normal state" or "slump effect", and executes the "slump effect". If the timing is mid-way (that is, during execution of "Gase pseudo-sequence 2"), the first display stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

The display control device 114 is configured to stop the fluctuating performance of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a determined manner by receiving the display confirmation command. On the other hand, by receiving the first stop command for display, the left symbol row Z1 of the "slump effect" of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped, and with this stop, the "slump effect" is in progress. It is configured to indicate the end of the fluctuation performance in . In this way, by creating a relationship between the end of the fluctuating performance and the content of the "slump performance", it is possible to make the player aware of the end of the fluctuating performance even while the "slump performance" is in progress. becomes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the variation start process (S307), which is one process of the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S307).

In this fluctuation start process (S307), a jackpot or loss lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the held ball execution area 203d, and a dynamic display is performed on the first symbol display device 37. The dynamic pattern and stop type of , as well as the fluctuation pattern and stop type of the fluctuation performance performed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

In this fluctuation start process (S307), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)). A jackpot lottery (judgment determination) process is performed to determine whether or not the game is successful (S401).

Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at the time. As mentioned above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307 , 582'' is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a jackpot. Specified as a random value.

In the process of S401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot is determined. It is determined that As a result of the processing in S401, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 9(b)) Based on this, the display mode (type of jackpot) at the time of jackpot is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, that is, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, is changed to a "probability fluctuation state". Either the "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to the "time reduction state" after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, or the "probability variable state" that shifts to the "probability variable state" after the maximum number of rounds hits the jackpot of 2 rounds. It is determined whether the transition is a "2R probability-variable jackpot" or not. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the light emitting diode 37a) at the time of a jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is set.

In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type as a display result of the variable effect or "slump effect", the jackpot type (``15R certain variable jackpot'', ``2R certain variable jackpot'') , "15R normal jackpot") is set as the stop type as it is, the display mode at the time of jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S403), and the process moves to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d. A performance mode is selected based on the selected performance mode, and a fluctuation time of the variable performance is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11 or 12) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the process of S402, when the jackpot type is set as "15R probability variable jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot", the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4) is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d. The performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of the "normal reach" performance mode, the "super reach" performance mode, or the "special reach" performance mode is selected (see FIG. 12(a)).

Specifically, when the "Normal Reach" performance mode is set as the performance mode, the ball is stored in the held ball execution area 203d in the "E6: Normal Reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "20 seconds" of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach", "25 seconds" of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" ” + “Re-variation””, “30 seconds” “High-speed fluctuation (long)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Pseudo fluctuation” + “Normal reach””, or “35 seconds” The variation pattern of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Pseudo variation" + "High-speed variation (short)" + "Pseudo variation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-variation" is selected (see Figure 14). . Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 14).

In addition, when the "super reach" production mode is set as the production mode, the "E7: super reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14) is stored in the held ball execution area 203d. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" for "30 seconds", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "35 seconds" ``Super Reach'''', ``40 seconds'' of ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Super reach'''', or ``45 seconds'' A variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' + 'Pseudo variation' + 'High-speed variation (short)' + 'Pseudo variation' + 'Super reach' + 'Re-variation'" is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 14).

In addition, when the "Special Reach" performance mode is set as the performance mode, the "E8: Special Reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14) is stored in the held ball execution area 203d. A fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" of "40 seconds", "High speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "45 seconds" ``Special Reach'''', ``50 seconds'' of ``High-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``High-speed fluctuation (short)'' + ``Pseudo fluctuation'' + ``Special reach'''', or ``55 seconds'' A variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' + 'Pseudo variation' + 'High-speed variation (short)' + 'Pseudo variation' + 'Special reach' + 'Re-variation'" is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 14).

In addition, when "2R probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, in the selected stop pattern table 202d (E table 202d5), the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203d is Select the presentation mode associated with the value. That is, when winning the "2R Probable Variable Jackpot", the "Special Variable" performance mode is selected without exception. Then, with reference to the selected production mode and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is selected. In the first embodiment, only "movie" is selected in this case (see FIG. 14). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 14).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a jackpot (S401: No), a display mode for a loss is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the number of reserved balls counter 203a are set. Based on the value of and the current gaming state, the performance modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 include a "non-reach (long)" production mode, a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and a "non-reach (short)" production mode. )”, “Normal Reach”, “Super Reach”, or “Special Reach”. In the first embodiment, as described above, each effect is changed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal gaming state". The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2, or C table 202d3) is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the modes is different.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss is determined (S405), and the process moves to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a variable time is determined until the symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing symbol. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal gaming state", the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, or One of the C tables 202d3 (see FIGS. 11(a) to 11(c)) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or the "probability fluctuation state", table B 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponds to the number of balls on hold at that time indicated by the number of balls on hold counter 203a. or the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(b) or FIG. 11(c)).

Then, when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is set as the production mode in the process of S404, in the group "E0: non-reach (long)" of the loss variation pattern table 202e1, the holding ball execution area 203d The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" of "15 seconds" is selected, and no other fluctuation patterns are selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, if the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is set as the production mode in the process of S404, in the "E1: non-reach (middle)" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1, the held ball execution area 203d The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only "'high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "slow-speed fluctuation"" of "10 seconds" is selected, and no other fluctuation patterns are selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In addition, if the "non-reach (short)" production mode is set as the production mode in the process of S404, in the "E2: non-reach (short)" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1, the held ball execution area 203d The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" of "5 seconds" is selected, and no other fluctuation patterns are selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

When the "normal reach" production mode is set as the production mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d in the "E3: normal reach" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13) Select the variation pattern associated with the value of . That is, in this case, ``20 seconds'' of ``high-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``low-speed fluctuation'' + ``normal reach'''' or ``30 seconds'' of ``high-speed fluctuation (long)'' + ``pseudo fluctuation'' + A variation pattern of "high-speed variation (short)" + "pseudo variation" + "normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

When the "super reach" production mode is set as the production mode, the variation type stored in the held ball execution area 203d in the "E4: super reach" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13) A variation pattern associated with the value of counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" for "30 seconds" or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" for "40 seconds" + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Super reach” fluctuation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

When the "special reach" production mode is set as the production mode, the variation type stored in the held ball execution area 203d in the "E5: Special reach" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13) A variation pattern associated with the value of counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "40 seconds" of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach"" or "50 seconds" of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + “High-speed fluctuation (short)” + “Special reach” fluctuation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a jackpot and the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a loss are judged and determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. This makes it possible to standardize programs and reduce development man-hours during development.

Next, in the process of S406, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the processes of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. (S406). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is a "15R guaranteed variable jackpot", and the "30 seconds" variation pattern of the "super reach" performance mode (i.e., "high-speed variation (long variation)" )" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach"), a fluctuation pattern command indicating a jackpot, a "15R guaranteed variable jackpot", and a "super reach" of "30 seconds" is set. In addition, if you lose the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of the "30 seconds" "Super Reach" production mode is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the loss/"30 seconds" "Super Reach" will be set. be done.

In this way, even if the variable effects have the same variation time, by setting the appropriateness of the variable effect and the general content of the variation pattern in the variable pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the effect mode including the appropriateness. By understanding the contents and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the detailed fluctuation effect or the fluctuation pattern of the "slump effect" based on that information.

Furthermore, a stop type command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in S402 or S404 (S407), and the process returns to the variation process (see FIG. 28).

Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is a "15R guaranteed strange jackpot", without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.), A stop type command is set that indicates a "15R guaranteed strange jackpot". Also, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", you can say "15R normal jackpot" without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol, etc.). Set a stop type command to indicate that

On the other hand, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Super Reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) will not be specified, and the " A stop type command is set to indicate that the performance mode is "Super Reach" (so-called front/back loss). In addition, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected, the "Normal Reach" effect at the time of loss without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "737", etc.) ” A stop type command is set that indicates that the production mode is (so-called, failure other than before and after). Furthermore, if you do not win the jackpot and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) will not be specified, and the " A stop type command is set to indicate that the performance mode is "non-reach" (so-called complete loss).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect and Based on this information, it is possible to determine the stopping result of the variable performance or "slump performance" in detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command, or a display slump fluctuation command and a display slump pattern command based on them, and controls the display. to device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the reservation device control process (S111), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the reservation device control process.

In this holding device control process (S111), as described above, during the "slump effect", the timing at which the ball held (stored) in the holding device 73 is released (flowing down) is counted, and the timing is reached. In this case, the holding device solenoid 73f is driven to release the ball held in the holding device 73 and cause the ball to flow into the dummy prize opening 75.

In this reservation device control process (S111), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the reservation device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the holding device drive flag 203f is not turned on (S501: No), the conditions for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 are not satisfied, so this holding device control The process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold device drive timer 203g (S502), and then the subtracted hold device It is determined whether the value of the drive timer 203g has become "0" (S503). By executing these processes, the conditions for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 (i.e., the start of the "slump effect", the holding of the ball in the holding device 73, and the obtained fluctuation effect) When the fluctuation pattern does not include "reach display" is established, the timing at which the balls held in the holding device 73 are made to flow into the dummy prize opening 75 can be counted.

In the process of S503, if it is determined that the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is not "0" (S503: No), the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 has not yet been reached. In order to continue counting the release timing, the process of S504 and S505 is skipped, the holding device control process (S111) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S503, if it is determined that the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is "0" (S503: Yes), it is time to release the ball held in the holding device 73. The holding device solenoid 73f is set to be driven on for “2000 milliseconds” (S504), the holding device drive flag 203f is set to OFF (S505), and this holding device control process (S111) is ended. .

In this way, by controlling the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 based on the holding device drive flag 203f and the holding device drive timer 203g, it is possible to control Before executing the performance element (i.e., "Gase Pseudo-Run 2"), a ball is caused to flow into the dummy prize opening 75, and before the execution of the corresponding performance element, a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display corresponding to the performance element is displayed. can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the dummy winning process (S112), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the dummy winning process.

In this dummy winning process (S112), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the dummy winning port 75 (winning), and if a ball has entered the dummy winning port 75, a message is sent to the payout control device 111. At the same time, a dummy hold command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set.

In this dummy winning process (S112), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has entered the dummy winning opening 75 (S601). Here, it is based on the output signal of the dummy winning hole switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering the dummy winning hole 75 (winning), which was read in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see S105 in FIG. 26). Then, the ball entering the dummy winning hole 75 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that no ball has won in the dummy winning hole 75 (S601: No), this dummy winning process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that the ball has won in the dummy winning hole 75 (S601: Yes), based on the winning in the dummy winning hole 75, the same prize as the special drawing winning hole 77a, 78a will be awarded. In order to pay out balls, a three prize balls command is set to instruct the payout control device 111 to pay out three prize balls (S602), and the process moves to S603. The three prize balls command set in the process of S602 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. Inside, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the prize into the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a or the dummy winning hole 75 based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. In addition, when playing a game, the player can check the performance (fluctuating performance, "slump performance", (symbols, etc.), and did not pay much attention to the manner in which the balls entered the special pattern winning holes 77a, 78a and the dummy winning hole 75. Therefore, based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out, the player must check whether the performance (reserved symbol) corresponding to the prize ball corresponds to the fluctuating performance in the "normal state" or "in the slump state". It is not possible to determine whether it corresponds to the production unit of "slump production". As a result, even when a "slump effect" is performed, in which the variation time is longer than the obtained variable effect and the effect elements are performed more times than the number of obtained variable effects, the player feels strange. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game without realizing it.

In the process of S603, a dummy hold command is set that instructs the audio lamp control device 113 to display a hold symbol corresponding to the dummy hold display (S603), this dummy winning process (S112) is ended, and the timer allocation is started. Return to the loading process (see FIG. 26). The dummy pending command set in the process of S603 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 26). , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the dummy holding command, it adds 1 to the value of the dummy held ball counter 223c, and compares the value of the dummy held ball number counter 223c after the addition with the value of the sub held ball number counter 223b. Based on the total value, a command for the number of held balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114, based on the reception of the number of held balls for display command, displays the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 6(b)), control is performed to display the pending symbols (and executed symbols).

With this configuration, it is possible to display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) a number of reserved symbols that are one more than the number of reserved balls in the actual variable performance, and it is also possible to display the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)). Even if the ``slump performance'' is performed more times than the number of times, the number of performance units in the ``slump performance'' can be made consistent with the reserved symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance in which a winning/failure lottery is performed is performed more times than the actual number of fluctuating performances without causing discrepancies in the performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the NMI interrupt processing executed in main controller 110 when a power outage or the like occurs. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores the power outage occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage occurrence information (S701). ), the NMI interrupt processing ends.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, the MPU 201 first executes initial setting process upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. In addition, an initial operation is performed to determine whether electronic components such as the holding device solenoid 73f operate normally. Note that even if the holding device solenoid 73f performs the initial operation, the initial operation is performed in such a manner that the ball remains held in the holding ball holding portion 73b of the holding device 73. It is configured. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (in the first embodiment, “1 second”) is performed. ) is executed (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process moves to S811. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S811 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process also moves to S811 in such a case.

Note that, as will be explained in S906 of FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S811, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S811). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S812, S813).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup process, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S812, S813) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S812, S813) is similarly executed. . In the RAM 203 initialization process (S812, S813), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S812), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S813). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Then, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, interrupts are permitted (S810). Then, the process moves to main processing (see FIG. 34), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, the MPU 201 first determines whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901). If the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S901: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S902, S903).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S902). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899", "99" in the first embodiment), , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S107 (see FIG. 26) (S903), and the process moves to S901.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 26 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals ("4 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the second ball entry opening 67, the variable display of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. Display control is performed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 depends on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. It will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process will vary depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at the time.

The processes of S902 and S903 described above, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be similarly updated randomly. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, randomness is added to the updating of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the winning random number counter C4 that use these as initial values for updating. can have.

In addition, in the process of S901, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S904 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S904), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S905). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S906), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S907), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S901 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes in S902 and S903, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the timing when various settings by timer interrupt processing are completed and the updates of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are completed. . Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S901 after the start-up process (see FIG. 33) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S801). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. As a result, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and in the main process (see FIG. 34), each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is We have explained the case where the update is executed, but the configuration is such that part or all of the processing that was executed in the timer interrupt processing is executed every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. You may. For example, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormal signal reading process (S102), the jackpot process (S103), the second symbol control process (S104), and the switch reading process (S102), which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment, S105), start winning processing (S108), fluctuation processing (S109), firing control processing (S110), reservation device control processing (S111), and dummy winning processing (S112), some or all of which are performed instead of timer interrupt processing. , may be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing.

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see FIG. 34) to determine whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process is executed every predetermined time. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for this changes, even with this configuration, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing (see FIG. 35) that is started upon power-on, and main processing (see FIG. 36) that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 35, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, the MPU 221 first executes the initial setting process associated with power-on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S1122 (see Figure 36). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1119 in FIG. 36), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1122. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1122 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1122 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process moves to S1008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process moves to S1004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1122 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process moves to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process in S1122, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1122 is executed (see S1121 in FIG. 36). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1122 is executed, so the reason why the process in S1008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1122 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), the interrupt Permission is set (S1011) and the process moves to the main process (see FIG. 36). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1004 to S1006 and then S1008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is processing to clear the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process moves to main processing (see FIG. 36).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S1008 from S1004 via the process in S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main process is executed, the MPU 221 first determines whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101). :No), the process proceeds to S1116 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1115. In the process of S1101, it is determined whether 1 millisecond has elapsed or not, whereas S1102 to S1115 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas the command determination process of S1116 This is because the variation effect processing in S1117 is a process that is preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process in S1116 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1117 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay. Furthermore, by executing the processes of S1102 to S1115 every millisecond, it is possible to accurately count various control timings.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was previously executed (S1101: Yes), the process moves to S1102. Note that if the process in S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 35, the process directly proceeds to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1103 to S1117 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1106, which will be described later (S1103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect and "slump effect" are not executed, or during the period of the "high-speed change" effect element, a process to change the stage will be performed, and the frame button operation command will be executed. Instead, a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed.

In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of a fluctuation effect or "slump effect", the expected value of the jackpot due to this change can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display" This may change the performance to one that gives the player a feeling of anticipation for a big hit, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the ready-to-reach performances presented on the screen. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1105 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/production process (S1105) is finished, a lamp editing process is then executed (S1106), and then a sound editing/output process is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81 (ie, the variable effect or "slump effect"). In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process in S1107, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process moves to S1109. In the liquid crystal performance execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance or "slump performance" performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process in S1106 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process in S1107 is also performed in accordance with the variable performance or "slump performance" performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is executed at a time synchronized with the required time.

In the process of S1109, it is determined whether the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1109). This determination is made in order to grasp the progress of the "slump performance" and to shift the pending symbols at the timing when one performance unit of the "slump performance" ends and in time with the start of the next performance unit. .

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is not larger than "0" (S1109: No), that is, if the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "0", the "slump effect" '', the process skips steps S1110 to S1115 and moves to step S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0" (S1109: Yes), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is 1 is subtracted (S1110), the value of the slump effect timer 223g is determined, and it is determined whether "10 seconds" have elapsed since the "slump effect" was started (S1111).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "slump effect" may occur when the variable effect of the third symbol is not suspended and the variable effect is not executed on the third symbol display device 81. It is. Therefore, if a fluctuating performance with a "non-reach" performance mode that does not include a "reach display" is obtained based on a starting prize during a "slump state," the performance mode of the fluctuating performance will always be "15 seconds" and a "non-reach" performance mode. "Reach (Long)" presentation mode is selected.

Here, when the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is selected based on the starting prize in the "slump state", at least the two performance elements of "Gase pseudo series 1" and "Gase pseudo series 2" are " "Slump effect" is executed. In addition, since each performance unit in "slump performance" is performed based on "10 seconds", "10 seconds" starts from the start of the first performance unit in "slump performance" (i.e. "Gase pseudo sequence 1"). '', the first performance unit ends, and the next performance unit in the "slump performance" (ie, "Gase pseudo-sequence 2") starts to be executed.

Therefore, when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is selected, it indicates the end of the first production unit in the "slump production" and the start of the next production unit, and also indicates the execution status of each production unit. In order to maintain consistency with the display contents of the pending symbols and execution symbols, the execution displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the execution status of the above-mentioned performance unit. It is necessary to erase the symbols and shift the display of the pending symbols (hereinafter, erasing the displayed execution symbols and shifting the display of the pending symbols is simply referred to as "shift display"). Therefore, in the process of S1111, the end timing of the first performance unit in the "slump performance" is measured, and when the end timing is reached, the display contents of the pending symbols and executed symbols are changed in the process of S1114.

In addition, if a production mode including a "reach display" is selected based on a starting prize in a "slump state", the pending symbols and executed symbols will be displayed as a "slump production" corresponding to the production mode including the "reach display". A “pseudo-ren” performance that does not consume is executed.

Therefore, if a production mode including "reach display" is selected, the execution status of each production unit and the display contents of the pending symbols and execution symbols will not be consumed in the production unit in "slump production". In order to maintain consistency with the performance unit, the executed symbols and pending symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed as they are in accordance with the execution status of the production unit. Continue to do so.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution status of each performance unit in the "slump performance" and the display contents of the pending symbols and execution symbols. As a result, even when a series of ``slump effects'' are performed for a longer time than the actual variable effects, it is possible to provide effects that do not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the process of S1111, whether "10 seconds" have elapsed since the "slump effect" was started is determined based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g and the acquired extension time. ing. Specifically, if the acquired variable performance is a "non-reach (long)" performance mode of "15 seconds" and the acquired extension time is "5 seconds", the slump performance timer 223g It is determined that "10 seconds" have passed since the start of the "slump effect" when the value of "10000" remains, that is, when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223g set to "20000". is configured to do so. In addition, if the acquired variable performance is a "non-reach (long)" performance mode of "15 seconds" and the acquired extension time is "10 seconds", the value of the slump performance timer 223g is When there is ``15,000'' left, that is, when 10,000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223g set to ``25,000'', it is determined that ``10 seconds'' have passed since the start of the ``slump effect''. It is configured.

Therefore, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that ``10 seconds'' have not elapsed since the start of the ``slump effect'' (S1111: No), the shift timing of the pending symbol (i.e., the shift timing of the ``false pseudo series 1'') Since the end timing (end timing) has not yet arrived, the processes of S1112 to S1115 are skipped and the process moves to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that "10 seconds" have passed since the start of the "slump effect" (S1111: Yes), then whether the value of the dummy retained pitch counter 223c is greater than "0" or not In other words, it is determined whether or not a pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, is being displayed (S1112). This means that if there is a variable pattern that includes a "reach display" or no balls are held in the holding device 73, a dummy holding command is not received from the main controller 110, and a holding symbol that is a dummy holding display is displayed. This is to avoid shifting display of pending symbols and executed symbols in such a case.

In the process of S1112, if it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is not larger than "0" (S1112: No), that is, the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is "0" and the dummy When the pending symbol, which is a pending display, is not displayed, the process of S1113 to S1115 is skipped and the process moves to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, if it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball counter 223c is larger than "0" (S1112: Yes), the reserved symbol that is the dummy reserved display is displayed, and the corresponding Since it is the shift display timing of the pending symbol, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the dummy pending ball counter 223c (S1113), and the data stored in the pending display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1114).

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 toward the execution pending display area 223e0, and includes the first pending display area 223e1→execution pending display Area 223e0, second hold display area 223e2 → first hold display area 223e1, third hold display area 223e3 → second hold display area 223e2, fourth hold display area 223e4 → third hold display area 223e3, fifth hold display area The data in each area 223e0 to 223e5 is shifted in the order of 223e5→fourth pending display area 223e4.

After the data shift process in S1114, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is set based on the value of the sub-reserved pitch number counter 223b and the reserved pitch change information stored in the reserved pitch display information storage area 223e through the data shift process. (S1115), and the process moves to S1116. The display reserved pitch count command set in the process of S1115 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1102) to be executed next. sent to.

When the display control device 114 receives the command for the number of reserved balls for display, the display control device 114 displays the number of reserved symbols indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. and the executed symbol, and also controls the display mode (display color) of the corresponding pending symbol or executed symbol based on the pending change information included in the display pending ball number command.

In the process of S1116, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1116), and the process moves to the process of S1117. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In the process of S1117, after the command determination process (S1116), the variation pattern command and stop type command received from the main controller 110 are used to display a variation effect or "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable effect process, which is a process for starting a variable effect or "slump effect", is executed. Details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, a counter update process is executed to update various counters such as the pending change counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1118), and the process moves to S1119. Specifically, in this counter update process, for example, the pending change counter 223d is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both "99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". . The pending change counter 223d updated in this way is used for executing the "pending change notice" and selecting the display mode.

In the process of S1119, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1119). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1119 (S1119: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1121), and the power-off process is executed (S1122). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1123), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1119 (S1119: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1120), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1120: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1120: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the command determination process (S1116) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. This command determination process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110, as described above.

In the command determination process (S1116), the MPU 221 first reads out and analyzes the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and then reads the first command received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a slump command has been received (S1201). If it is determined that a slump command has been received (S1201: Yes), the sub-slump flag 223f is set on (S1202), this command determination process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). The MPU 221 sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON based on reception of the slump command, thereby allowing the audio lamp control device 113 to recognize that it is in a "slump state."

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the slump command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending rank up command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1203). If it is determined that the hold rank up command has been received (S1203: Yes), the hold change information in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is displayed. Increase the rank by one (S1204).

Specifically, in the process of S1204, for example, the reservation change information corresponding to "none (white)" is stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-retention ball number counter 223b and the dummy reservation ball number counter 223c. is stored, the pending change information is updated to the pending change information corresponding to "blue". In addition, if the reservation change information corresponding to "blue" is stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub reservation ball number counter 223b and the dummy reservation ball number counter 223c, the reservation change information is stored. The pending change information is updated to correspond to "green". In addition, if the reservation change information corresponding to "green" is stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub reservation ball number counter 223b and the dummy reservation ball number counter 223c, the reservation change information is stored. The pending change information is updated to correspond to "red".

With this configuration, the display mode of the pending symbols and executed symbols corresponding to each production unit of the "slump effect" can be increased by one rank, and the number of effects of the "slump effect" and the number of pending symbols and executed symbols While maintaining consistency with the number of displays, it is possible to increase the variety of performance contents and improve the interest of the game.

After the process of S1204, the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (S1205), this command determination process (S1116) is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). By setting the production conversion flag 223k to ON based on the reception of the pending rank up command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the “Gase pseudo-ren” production that can digest the pending symbols in the “slump production”. In this case, it is possible to recognize that the reserved symbol is converted into a performance element of "development possibility performance" that is not digested. By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain consistency between the contents of the performance unit in the "slump performance" and the consumption status of the pending symbols and executed symbols, and it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the performance contents from occurring. .

In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the pending rank up command has not been received (S1203: No), then it is determined whether or not a dummy pending command has been received (S1206). As a result of the determination, if a dummy hold command has been received (S1206: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the dummy hold ball counter 223c (S1207), and then the hold display setting is set to set the display mode of the hold symbols. The process is performed (S1208), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). In this reservation display setting process, control regarding the "reservation change notice" is performed based on the value of the dummy reservation pitch number counter 223c updated in S1206 and the value of the sub reservation pitch number counter 223b at that time. Details of this hold display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In the process of S1206, if it is determined that the dummy holding command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not a holding pitch count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1209). As a result of the determination, if the held ball number command has been received (S1209: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the received held ball number command (i.e., the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the held variable performance) (S1210).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a (starting winning), so every time there is a starting winning, the process of S1210 is executed. Accordingly, the value of the sub-pending pitch counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the sub-pending pitch counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, the audio lamp control device 113 The value of the sub reserved pitch number counter 223b can be corrected to match the value of the reserved pitch number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

After the process of S1210, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the received hold pitch number command is extracted, and the hold pitch information is stored in the hold information storage area 223i. Among the first to fourth information storage areas (see FIG. 25), the reserved information is stored in the first to fourth reserved information storage areas corresponding to the value of the sub reserved ball counter 223b updated in the process of S1210 (S1211).

That is, when the value (number of reserved balls) of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b is X (1≦X≦4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 223i4 of the X-th pending information storage area, respectively.

The values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer 203b in the main controller 110 when a ball enters the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a (starting winning). If the number of held balls included in the held ball number command is X, this is the value stored in the held ball Xth area of the held ball storage area 203c of the main controller 110. That is, the same information (values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) as the held ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 is stored in the held ball storage area 223i of the audio lamp control device 113.

By referring to each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform pre-read processing in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 38), which will be described later. ing. In other words, when the suspended variable effect or "slump effect" is executed, what will be the result of that variable effect or "slump effect" (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) The audio lamp control device 113 is provided with control for determining execution of various effects by determining the execution of various effects before executing a variable effect or "slump effect", and determining whether or not to execute a "pending change notice" and the display mode. can be executed.

After the process of S1211, in order to determine the display mode of the pending symbols based on the various information indicated by the currently received pending ball count command, the pending display setting process (S1208) is performed in the same way as when the dummy pending command is received. , returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). If it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1212: Yes), a fluctuation setting process is performed to set a fluctuation effect or "slump effect" based on the fluctuation pattern command (S1213), and the main processing (Refer to FIG. 36). In this variation setting process, a variation pattern (variation time) is extracted from the received variation pattern command, and detailed production contents of the variation production or "slump production" are set based on the variation pattern. This variation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In the process of S1212, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). As a result of the determination, if a stop type command has been received (S1214: Yes), a symbol setting process is performed to set a stop symbol of a variable effect or "slump effect" based on the stop type command (S1215), Return to the main process (see FIG. 36). In this symbol setting process, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, and detailed stop symbols of the fluctuating effect or "slump effect" are set based on the stop type. This symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In the process of S1214, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1214: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1216). As a result of the determination, if a confirmed command has been received (S1216: Yes), a confirmed setting process is performed to display a fluctuating effect or "slump effect" based on the confirmed command (S1217), and the main process (Fig. 36). In this confirmation setting process, based on the received confirmation command, if a variable effect is being executed, the variable effect is confirmed, and if a ``slump effect'' is being executed, the left symbol column is displayed in the ``slump effect''. Performs a stop display of Z1. This confirmation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In the process of S1216, if it is determined that the confirmed command has not been received (S1216: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed ( S1218), the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is used for display control. A command is set to be sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command through the process of S1218, and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223. 36) to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the hold display setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process. As described above, this hold display setting process is executed when a hold ball count command or a dummy hold command is received from the main controller 110, and determines whether or not to execute a “hold change notice” in the hold symbol. At the same time, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is set according to the content of the determination.

In this hold display setting process (S1208), the MPU 221 first performs a "slump effect" that is executed based on various information indicated by the currently received held pitch count command or at the timing when the currently received dummy hold command is received. Based on the validity of the performance unit next to the performance unit of ``'', it is determined whether or not the lottery for executing the ``pending change notice'' has been won (S1301). As mentioned above, in the "normal state", the execution lottery of the "reservation change notice" is performed for each reservation information storage area X whose value of the sub-retention pitch counter 223b corresponds to Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223i1 to 223i4, the validity and presentation mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted validity and performance mode, the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e (see FIG. 18) are referred to, and whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed is determined and displayed. Determine the aspect.

In addition, if a "slump effect" is being performed based only on one starting prize (namely, one prize), the validity of the "slump effect" being executed is stored in each counter storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. The data is extracted based on the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In addition, if a "slump effect" based on an additional starting prize (i.e., prize 2) is being executed after the first starting prize (i.e., prize 1), the validity of the "slump effect" being executed will be checked. Extraction is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 and 223i1 to 223i4 of the first pending information storage area. Then, based on the extracted propriety, the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e are referred to to determine whether or not to execute the "pending change notice" and the display mode.

As a result of the processing in S1301, if the lottery for executing the "pending change notice" has been won (S1301: Yes), a display format (for example, "blue") indicating the display format (for example, "blue") that is the result of the lottery for executing the "pending change notice" is displayed. The change information is stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e indicated by the sum of the value of the sub-retention pitch counter 223b and the value of the dummy reservation pitch counter 223c (S1302), and the process moves to S1304. On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1301, if the lottery for executing the "pending change notice" has not been won (S1301: No), the pending change information (i.e., Null data) indicating that the "pending change notice" will not be executed is It is stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e indicated by the sum of the value of the sub-retention pitch counter 223b and the value of the dummy reservation pitch counter 223c (S1303), and the process moves to S1304. Thereby, it is possible to store in the pending display information storage area 223e whether or not to execute the "suspended change notice" for each performance unit of the "normal state" fluctuating performance and the "slump performance".

In addition, in the process of S1303, by writing Null data in the corresponding pending display information storage area 223e, for example, the redundant use of information regarding the "pending change notice" stored in the pending display information storage area 223e before writing is avoided. It is possible to prevent discrepancies in the performance (for example, the ``pending change notice'' is ``red'' even though it is a fluctuating performance with a ``non-reach'' presentation mode) from occurring. can.

Next, in the process of S1304, the display control device 114 displays the sum of the value of the sub-retention pitch number counter 223b and the value of the dummy reservation pitch number counter 223c, and the reservation change information stored in the reservation display information storage area 223e. A command for displaying the number of reserved pitches to be notified to is set (S1304), the reserved display setting process (S1208) is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The held pitch count command for display set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the command for the number of reserved balls for display displays the reserved symbol according to the number of reserved balls and the reservation change information indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display in the cockpit display of the third symbol display device 81. A process for displaying in area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variation setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation setting process. As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), this fluctuation setting process is performed when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the current gaming state (i.e. , "normal state" or "slump state"), the performance contents of the variable performance or the "slump performance" are set.

In this variation setting process (S1213), the MPU 221 first extracts a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern command (S1401), and moves the process to S1402. The variation pattern extracted in the process of S1401 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1402 to S1418 are performed based on the variation pattern.

In the process of S1402, it is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in S1401 is a variation pattern indicating a "2R probability variation jackpot", that is, a "special variation" performance mode (S1402). As a result of the determination, if the fluctuation pattern indicates a "2R probability strange jackpot" (S1402: Yes), the processing of S1404 to S1423 is performed in order to execute the fluctuation performance with the fluctuation pattern in any gaming state. Instead, the sub-slump flag 223f is set (initialized) to OFF (S1403), and this fluctuation setting process (S1213) is ended. After the variation setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the variation pattern does not indicate a "2R probability variable jackpot" (S1402: No), then it is determined whether or not the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404). As a result of the determination, if the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404: Yes), it means that the fluctuation pattern command was received during the "slump state", so first, the sub-slump flag 223f is set to off (S1405), Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in S1401 includes "reach display" (S1406).

In the process of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not include "reach display" (S1406: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a "non-reach (long)" production mode, the variation pattern in "slump display" The extended time is drawn (S1407), the extracted extended time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1408), and the extracted extended time is stored in the RAM 223 (S1409), and the process moves to S1410. . On the other hand, in the process of S1406, if it is determined that the variation pattern includes "reach display" (S1406: Yes), the process of S1407 to S1409 is skipped in order to perform the "slump effect" without acquiring the extension time. Then, the process moves to S1410. With this configuration, an extended time is obtained for the "slump effect" in a variation pattern that does not include the "reach display", and a dynamic effect of the third symbol is executed which is longer than the variation time of the actual variation effect. be able to.

In the process of S1410, the variation time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1401 (S1410), and the process moves to S1411. Specifically, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation time of "15 seconds" of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation", "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. , if the fluctuation pattern is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach", the fluctuation time is "50 seconds", "50000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. In the first embodiment, a series of "slump effects" are executed based on the value set in the slump effect timer 223g in S1408 and the value added to the slump effect timer 223g in S1410.

In the process of S1411, it is determined again whether the fluctuation pattern extracted in S1401 includes "reach display" (S1411). As a result of the determination, if the variation pattern includes "reach display" (S1411: Yes), in the "slump effect" that is newly set or additionally set this time, the "pseudo consecutive" effect is developed. In order to execute the "reach display", the situation at the time of winning (at the time of receiving the variable pattern command) (i.e., whether the player is in a "slump state", a "slump effect" based on something other than the extended time, or "slump effect" based on the extended time) is determined. (The same applies hereinafter.), the value of the slump effect timer 223g set (added) in the process of S1408 and/or S1410, and the value of the slump effect (extension time) in S1422, which will be described later. Based on the remaining value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 only in the case of a variable pattern command during execution, the production elements of the "pseudo-connection" performance and/or the "development possibility performance" and the "Which way reach" are determined. Each performance unit with the performance element is set in the first to seventh performance areas 223h1 to 223h7 of the slump performance storage area 223h (S1412), and the process moves to S1413. In addition, in the process of S1412, if the situation at the time of winning is in a "slump state" or a "slump effect" based on something other than the extended time is being executed, the residual value is not set, so the situation at the time of winning The contents of the "slump effect" are set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223g.

Next, in the process of S1413, since it is a "slump effect" in which a "reach display" is performed, an additional "slump effect" is set based on the reception of a new fluctuation pattern command during the execution of the "slump effect". In order to prevent this, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1413), and the process moves to S1417.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not include "reach display" (S1411: No), the winning pattern will be determined in the "slump effect" newly set or additionally set this time. The situation at the time (at the time of reception of the fluctuation pattern command), the value of the slump effect timer 223g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and/or S1410, and the fluctuation during the execution of "slump effect (extension time)" in S1422 described later Based on the remaining value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 only in the case of a pattern command, each performance unit of the performance element of "Gase pseudo-ren" performance and/or "development possible performance" is stored in the slump performance storage area 223h. Each of the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 is set (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415. In addition, in the process of S1414, if the situation at the time of winning is in a "slump state" or a "slump effect" based on something other than the extended time is being executed, the residual value is not set, so the situation at the time of winning The contents of the "slump effect" are set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223g.

Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether or not the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415). As a result of the determination, if the performance conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415: Yes), in the currently set "slump performance", the 1 "Gase Pseudo-Run" performance that consumes the reserved symbol (execution symbol) is suspended. The slump performance storage area 223h is updated by converting the design (execution design) into a performance element of "development possibility performance" that does not consume the symbol (execution design) (S1416), and the process moves to S1417. On the other hand, if the effect conversion flag 223k is not turned on (S1415: No), the process of S1416 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1417 without converting the set "slump effect". With this configuration, the number of executions of the performance unit in the "slump performance" matches the number of displayed pending symbols, and by providing a consistent performance, it is possible to create a comfortable game where the player does not feel any discomfort. You can play games.

In the process of S1417, the remaining value of the extended time stored in the RAM 223 is cleared to "0" only if it is a variation pattern command during the execution of "slump effect (extended time)" in S1422 described later (S1417), and then , the effect conversion flag 223k is set to OFF (S1418), and this fluctuation setting process (S1213) is ended. After the variation setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37). In this way, when one variation pattern command is received, by initializing the residual value and effect conversion flag 223k that were acquired (set) based on the reception of the variation pattern command, each variation pattern command received It is possible to perform accurate fluctuation effects or "slump effects" setting processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that the sub-slump flag 223f is not turned on (S1404: No), then it is determined whether the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1419). ). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0" (S1419: Yes), this means that the fluctuation pattern command has been received while the "slump effect" is being executed. The starting prize (i.e., prize 2) that was the cause of the pattern command is during the variable time (including during the final display) of the variable performance based on the previous variable pattern command (i.e., prize 1) in the "slump effect". The same applies hereinafter. .) is the starting prize or not (S1420). This determination is made when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is smaller than the value corresponding to the extension time stored in the RAM 223 in S1409 at the timing of the fluctuation pattern command received this time. It is determined that the current period is not during the variation time of the variation performance based on the variation pattern command. On the other hand, if the value of the slump production timer 223g is larger than the value corresponding to the extension time at the timing of the variation pattern command received this time, the variation production based on the previous variation pattern command in "slump production" It is determined that the period is during variable time.

As a result of the determination in S1420, if it is determined that the reception timing of the fluctuation pattern command received this time was during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect based on the previous fluctuation pattern command (S1420: Yes), the reception timing of the fluctuation pattern command received this time is determined to be during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect based on the previous fluctuation pattern command (S1420: Yes), the reception timing is based on a period other than the extended time. Since the fluctuation pattern command is received while the "slump effect" is being executed, in order to set an additional "slump effect" based on the received fluctuation pattern command, it corresponds to the extension time stored in S1409. The value (ie, "5000" or "10000") is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1421), and the process moves to S1410.

On the other hand, in the process of S1420, if it is determined that the reception timing of the currently received variation pattern command is not during the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: No), Since the fluctuation pattern command is received while the "slump effect" is being executed, in order to additionally execute the "slump effect" based on the received fluctuation pattern command, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is temporarily set. The remaining value of the "slump effect" is stored in the RAM 223 (S1422), and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423), and the process proceeds to S1410.

In the processing after S1410, first, in S1410, a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is added again to the value of the slump effect timer 223g that was reset in S1421 or S1423 (S1410), and in S1412 or S1414, etc. An additional "slump effect" is set based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g added in S1410 and the remaining value of the "slump effect" stored in the RAM 223 in S1422.

In addition, in the process of S1419, if it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is not larger than "0" (S1419: No), that is, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "0", Since the "slump state" and "slump effect" are not being executed and the state is in the "normal state," this variation setting process (S1213) is finished and the command Return to the determination process (see FIG. 37).

In this way, the value of the slump effect timer 223g, the extension time, or the remaining value of the extension time are set for each situation at the time of winning (at the time of receiving the fluctuation pattern command), and the "slump effect" is executed in common processing based on these set values. The program capacity stored in the ROM 222 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the symbol setting process (S1215) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the symbol setting process. In this symbol setting process, as described above, when a stop type command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command, and the stop type is Based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the command and the setting status of the slump performance storage area 223h, the stop symbols in the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" are set.

In this symbol setting process (S1215), first, the stop type (production mode) is extracted from the stop type command (S1501), and the process moves to S1502. The stop type extracted in the process of S1501 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1502 to S1506 are performed based on the stop type.

In the process of S1502, it is determined whether the stop type extracted in S1501 is a stop type indicating "2R probability variable jackpot", that is, a "special variation" performance mode (S1502). As a result of the determination, if the stop type indicates "2R definite variable jackpot" (S1502: Yes), the processing of S1503 to S1506 is performed in order to execute the variable effect with the stop type in any situation. First, the process moves to S1507.

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if the stop type does not indicate "2R probability-variable jackpot" (S1502: No), then it is determined whether data related to "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h ( S1503). As a result of the determination, if data related to "slump effect" is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: No), the stop type command is received in the "normal state", so the process is related to "slump effect". The process moves to S1507 without performing the processes in S1504 to S1506.

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if data related to the "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: Yes), a variation setting process is performed to set the stop symbols for each effect unit in the "slump effect". It is determined whether the variation pattern stored in the RAM 223 in S1401 (see FIG. 39) includes "reach display" (S1504).

As a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that the variation pattern includes a "reach display" (S1504: Yes), a slump effect is stored with a chance pattern according to the number of "pseudo consecutive" effects in the "slump effect". At the same time, according to the stop type extracted in S1501, the stop symbol (jackpot symbol or loss symbol) in the production element of "Which way reach" is set in the slump production storage area 223h (S1505), and the process is performed in S1507. Move to.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1504, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not include "reach display" (S1504: No), that is, if it is a variation pattern of "loss display", the "false pseudo series" effect is A fake chance pattern corresponding to the number of times is set in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1506), and the process moves to S1507. With this configuration, a stop symbol can be displayed for each production unit of the "slump effect", and even when a "slump effect" is performed, the stop symbol can be displayed according to the stop type command. can be displayed.

In the process of S1507, in the variation production process (see FIG. 42) described later, the variation in the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the settings in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) and the symbol setting process (S1215) described above. In order to start the production or "slump production", the fluctuation start flag 223a is set on (S1507), and this symbol setting process is ended. After the symbol setting process ends, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the confirmation setting process (S1217) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the final setting process. As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), this confirmation setting process is performed when a confirmation command is received from the main controller 110, and the effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the confirmation command is received. The third symbol to be stopped and displayed is set based on the situation (ie, whether it is during a fluctuating effect or a "slump effect").

In this confirmation setting process (S1217), first, it is determined whether or not the "slump effect" is being executed (S1601). This determination is made based on whether the value of the slump effect timer 223g is greater than "0". As a result of the determination, if the "slump effect" is not being executed (S1601: No), this means that a confirmation command has been received during the execution of the variable effect, so the display controller 114 is instructed to display the fixed effect of the variable effect. A final command for display is set (S1602), the final setting process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). . In the display control device 114, by receiving the display confirmation command, the variable performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped, and corresponds to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command described later. By stopping and displaying the third symbol, the third symbol in the variable performance is displayed definitively.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the "slump effect" is being executed (S1601: Yes), the "slump effect" is being executed, and the first stop timing of "Gase pseudo series 2" is Since the confirmation command is received at A stop command is set (S1603), this confirmation setting process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The first display stop command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). be done. In the display control device 114, by receiving the first display stop command, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable number in the left symbol row Z1 in the "Gase pseudo series 2" of the "slump effect" being executed. 3. Stop the symbol. After that, the "slump effect" is performed for a predetermined period of time according to the effect information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h and the stop symbols, and then the right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 and the third symbol are stopped and displayed. As a result, the third symbol in the "slump effect" is displayed definitively.

In this way, when a confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, it corresponds to the performance being performed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether a variable performance is being executed or a "slump performance" is being executed. This command can be sent to the display control device 114, and it is possible to provide a presentation that does not cause any inconsistency in the presentation content and does not feel strange.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation effect processing (S1117) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation effect processing. This fluctuation effect processing is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and includes the above-mentioned fluctuation setting processing (see FIG. 39) and symbol setting processing (see FIG. 40). Execute processing to start the variable effect or "slump effect" set by and.

In the variation effect processing (S1117), the MPU 221 first determines whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, off) (S1710: No), this means that at least a stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110. The production process is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1701: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, either the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is selected. In order to start the process, first, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off (S1702), and then the data contained in the first pending information storage area provided in the pending information storage area 223i is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. (S1703), and further shifts the data included in the second to fourth pending information storage areas provided in the pending information storage area 223i to the first to third pending information storage areas (S1704), and returns the process to S1705. Move to.

In other words, in this case, the number of pending variable effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the variable effect or "slump effect" is started based on the information regarding the first variable effect that was suspended in terms of time. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and various information (data) stored in the respective storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the first area are stored in the pending information corresponding to the fluctuating performance that is being held. It is moved to each storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second pending information storage area are transferred to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the first pending information storage area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third pending information storage area are transferred to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the second pending information storage area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 and various information (data) stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the fourth pending information storage area are transferred to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i1 of the third pending information storage area. 223i4.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223j of the audio lamp control device 113 stores the same value as each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203d of the main controller 110, and the audio In the first to fourth holding information storage areas provided in the holding information storage area 223i of the lamp control device 113, the holding information stored in the holding information storage areas 1 to 4 of the holding ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 is stored, respectively. The same value as each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 will be stored.

In the process of S1705, it is determined whether data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705), and if data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: Yes), "slump effect" The process moves to S1708 to set the slump effect storage area 223h, and if no data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: No), the process moves to S1706 to set the variable effect.

In the process from S1706, in order to execute a variable effect in the "normal state", a variation pattern of a variable effect based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j is sent to the display control device 114. A display variation pattern command is set for notification (S1706). Similarly, a display stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j (S1707). , the process moves to S1711.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1706 and the display stop type command set in the process of S1707 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command based on the variation pattern and stop symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. controls the variation effect of the third symbol.

In addition, regarding the execution of the variation effect, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are always generated and transmitted as a pair within a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the display control device 114, if only one of the display variation pattern command and display stop type command is received, the command may not be generated or transmitted normally due to noise or disconnection when executing the variation effect. Since there is no abnormality, it is recognized that some abnormality has occurred, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to an error display corresponding to the abnormality (for example, default variation) instead of a variation display, and the display control of the error display is controlled. Start.

Here, the default variation means that the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 is received. This is a variable performance that fixes a fixed special stop pattern (for example, a pattern displayed as "9", "8", and "7" in order from the left column) indicating a loss as a stop pattern in accordance with the reception of a command.

On the other hand, in the process from S1708, in order to execute the "slump effect", in order to notify the display control device 114 of each effect unit of the "slump effect" based on each effect information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, A display slump variation pattern command is set (S1708). Then, in order to notify the display control device 114 of each stop symbol of the "slump effect" based on the stop symbol information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, a display slump pattern command is set (S1709), and the slump effect is The storage area 223h is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1710), and the process moves to S1711.

The display slump variation pattern command set in the process of S1708 and the display slump pattern command set in the process of S1709 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are executed next. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

When the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, if the “slump effect” has not been started on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command. And control regarding the "slump effect" of the third symbol is performed based on the effect pattern and stop pattern indicated by the display slump pattern command. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, if the "slump effect" has already started in the third symbol display device 81, The ``slump performance'' of the third symbol is controlled while ensuring consistency between the content of the ``slump performance'' and the performance pattern and stop pattern indicated by the received display slump variation pattern command and display slump pattern command. Specifically, one performance unit being executed in "slump performance" is performed based on the previous display slump variation pattern command and display slump pattern command, and the performance unit transition from the next performance unit is performed. is configured to be performed based on the subsequent display slump variation pattern command and display slump pattern command.

Regarding the execution of the "slump effect", the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump pattern command, like the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are always paired as a pair for a predetermined period of time (e.g. , 20 milliseconds). Therefore, if the display control device 114 receives only one of the display slump variation pattern command and the display slump pattern command, when executing the "slump effect", the command may not be generated normally due to noise, disconnection, etc. Since it is not being transmitted, it is recognized that some abnormality has occurred, and the effect on the third symbol display device 81 is switched from the "slump effect" to an error display corresponding to the above abnormality (for example, default variation), and the error is displayed. Starts display control.

Next, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether the value of the dummy reserved pitch counter 223c is greater than "0" (S1711). This determination is the start timing of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance", and with the start, the reserved symbols (execution symbols) are consumed (i.e., the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 The timing of shifting and displaying the pending symbols in accordance with the corresponding variable production or "slump production" setting has been made, or the timing of displaying the pending symbols as a dummy pending display while the "slump production" is in progress. At this stage, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift display the pending symbols.

As a result of the processing in S1711, if it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is not greater than "0" (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is "0" and " Since the "slump effect" has not been executed and the pending symbols, which are dummy pending displays, are not displayed, in order to shift display the pending symbols at this stage, first, the value of the sub-held ball counter 223b is subtracted by 1 ( S1714). Then, the data stored in the pending display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1715).

This data shift process, similar to the shift process of the main process (see S1114 in FIG. 36), sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fifth pending display areas 223e1 to 223e5 toward the execution pending display area 223e0. In the process, first pending display area 223e1 → execution pending display area 223e0, second pending display area 223e2 → first pending display area 223e1, third pending display area 223e3 → second pending display area 223e2, fourth pending display The data in each area 223e0 to 223e5 is shifted in the following order: area 223e4→third pending display area 223e3, fifth pending display area 223e5→fourth pending display area 223e4.

After the data shift process in S1715, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is set based on the value of the sub-reserved pitch counter 223b and the reserved pitch change information stored in the reserved pitch display information storage area 223e through the data shift process. (S1716), this variation effect processing (S1117) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). The held pitch count command for display set in the process of S1716 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process of the main process to be executed next (see S1102 in FIG. 36). The information is then transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the command for the number of reserved balls for display, the display control device 114 displays the number of reserved symbols indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. and the executed symbol, and also controls the display mode (display color) of the corresponding pending symbol or executed symbol based on the pending change information included in the display pending ball number command.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1713, if it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is larger than "0" (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved pitch number counter 223c is "1", Since the "slump effect" is being executed and the pending symbols that are dummy pending displays are being displayed, the processing of S1714 to S1716 is skipped in order to avoid shifting the pending symbols at this stage. Then, this variation effect processing (S1117) is ended and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

In this way, when the audio ramp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command, the third symbol display device 81 determines the performance to be performed and performs a fluctuation performance or a "slump performance". However, it is possible to provide performances that are consistent between the performance contents and the reserved symbols.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, examples of execution of various effects of the variable effect or "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described.

First, each performance unit of the "slump performance" in the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 43 (see FIG. 23(a) for a time chart). FIG. 43(a) shows a state where the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81, and a state where the chance development symbol is about to appear. FIG. 43(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the false chance pattern has stopped in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" in "false pseudo series 1" from the state of FIG. 43(a), FIG. 43(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved symbols have been shifted from the state in FIG. 43(b) and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" which is "Gase pseudo series 2" has been executed. (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the false chance pattern has stopped in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" in "false pseudo series 2" from the state of FIG. 43(c), and FIG. 43(e) is FIG. 43(f) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved symbols have been shifted from the state in FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which the fake chance symbol stops in the "pseudo fluctuation" effect element in the "false pseudo series 3" from the state of (e), and the series of "slump effects" is completed. In addition, in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted (the same applies to the description in FIGS. 44 to 47 below).

As for the gaming state in FIG. 43, the previous starting prize (namely, winning 1) occurs in the "slump state", the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is extracted in the winning 1, and based on the winning 1 During the execution of "Gase Pseudo-Run 1", which is the first production unit of "Slump Production", a new starting prize (namely, Prize 2) occurs, and even in this Prize 2, "Non-reach (Long)" '' is extracted, and an additional "slump effect" is set and executed based on the winning prize 2 and the previous winning prize 1 (see FIG. 23(a)).

Specifically, in FIG. 43(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 (left symbol row Z1; the same applies hereinafter) of the main display area Dm, and the right In the display area Dm3 (right symbol row Z3. The same applies hereinafter), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the middle display area Dm2 (middle symbol row Z2. The same applies hereinafter). , a state in which the third symbol is still being moved at high speed and invisible is shown. In other words, the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are collectively referred to as During the execution of the "high-speed variation" production element), the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol are about to appear (immediately). It shows the status of.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a character pattern is displayed in a preview mode indicating that a fluctuating effect or a "slump effect" is being executed, and that a chance development pattern will appear. Displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character designs or the like are displayed.

Here, if the chance development pattern stops, the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element is started, and in the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element, the middle display area Dm2 has the same pattern as the left display area Dm1. An effect is performed in which the "7" symbol stops and a chance symbol appears, or a symbol different from the left display area Dm1 (for example, the "8" symbol) stops and a false chance symbol appears. .

In the cockpit display area Db, the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to second reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db2. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one performance unit of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the second holding symbol indicates that the holding ball of each performance unit of the "slump performance" is being executed. It shows that the number is 2 times.

Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the pending symbol displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2 are the main pending symbols that are displayed at the timing when the ball wins in the winning openings 77a and 78a. On the other hand, the pending symbol displayed in the first pending symbol display area Db1 is a dummy pending display that is displayed at the timing when a ball wins in the dummy winning hole 75. When the player recognizes this situation, the player understands that there are three production units performed on the third symbol display device 81 including the production unit currently being executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(b), from the state of FIG. 43(a), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display A fake chance pattern is displayed in a pseudo manner by the "7" symbol in the area Dm1 and the "8" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3, and the appearance of the fake chance symbol causes the main "slump effect". This suggests a situation in which the first performance unit ends with a "lost display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element ends in the main display area Dm, and one performance unit of the "slump performance" ends. I guess so.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(c), from the state of FIG. 43(b), a new variation (effect unit) is started again from the fake chance symbol of "788" which had been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. , shows a state in which all the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 are being changed at high speed and invisible.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 43(b) is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, due to the start of a new performance unit, the state shown in FIG. 43(b) is displayed. The executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 is erased, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is shifted to the executed symbol display area Db0, and is displayed as an executed symbol, and The pending symbol displayed in the pending symbol display area Db2 is shifted to the first pending symbol display area Db1 and is displayed as a pending symbol. In addition, since the pending symbols displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2 are shifted and displayed in the first pending symbol display area Db1, no pending symbols are displayed in the second pending symbol display area Db2.

That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a dummy pending display, and in the main display area Dm, a performance unit based on the dummy pending display is being executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(d), from the state of FIG. 43(c), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display A fake chance pattern is displayed in a pseudo manner by the "7" symbol in the area Dm1 and the "8" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3, and the appearance of the fake chance symbol causes the main "slump effect". This suggests a situation in which the first performance unit ends with a "lost display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 43(d), the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element ends in the main display area Dm, and one performance unit of the "slump performance" ends. I guess so.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(e), from the state of FIG. 43(d), a new variation (effect unit) is started again from the fake chance symbol of "788" which had been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. , shows a state in which all the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 are being changed at high speed and invisible.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 43(d) is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, due to the start of a new performance unit, the state shown in FIG. 43(d) is displayed. The executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 are erased, and the reserved symbols displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 are shifted to the executed symbol display area Db0 and displayed as executed symbols. In addition, since the pending symbols displayed in the first pending symbol display area Db1 are shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, no pending symbols are displayed in the first pending symbol display area Db1.

That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is the main pending display, and in the main display area Dm, the performance unit based on the main pending display is being executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43(f), from the state of FIG. 43(e), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display A fake chance pattern is displayed in a pseudo manner by the "7" symbol in the area Dm1 and the "8" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3, and the appearance of the fake chance symbol causes the main "slump effect". This suggests a situation in which the first performance unit ends with a "lost display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 43(f), the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element ends in the main display area Dm, and one performance unit of the "slump performance" ends. I guess so.

Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased after the above performance unit ends, and the series of "slump performance" ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of a plurality of "pseudo consecutive" performances performed in the "slump performance" on the third symbol display device 81 (as a time chart, the "special reach" performance shown in FIG. ). FIG. 44(a) shows a state in which the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" performance element or the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performance element is being executed in the "slump performance" on the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 44(b) is a diagram illustrating a state where the chance eye development pattern is about to appear, and FIG. FIG. 44(c) shows a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which all the symbols fluctuate again from the state of FIG. 44(b) is being executed. FIG. 44(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the "pseudo fluctuation" effect element is executed from the state of FIG. 44(c). 44(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" in which all the symbols fluctuate again from the state of FIG. 44(d) is being executed, and FIG. 44(f) is 44(e) is a diagram showing a state where a reach forming pattern is about to appear in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state shown in FIG. 44(e).

Specifically, in FIG. 44(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the "8" symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm3. This shows a state where the third symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still being moved at high speed and cannot be seen in the middle display area Dm2. That is, it shows a state in which the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed and the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol are on the verge of appearance of chance development symbols.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a character pattern is displayed in a preview mode indicating that a fluctuating effect or a "slump effect" is being executed, and that a chance development pattern will appear. Displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character designs or the like are displayed.

Furthermore, in the cockpit display area Db, the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, while the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one performance unit of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the pending symbol indicates that each of the fluctuation performance and the "slump performance" is executed. This indicates that the number of reserved pitches for each production unit is 0.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(b), from the state of FIG. 44(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display area Dm1 and The chance eye pattern is determined by the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3, and the appearance of the chance eye symbol causes the "slump effect" to develop (continue). Suggests. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 44(b), the player recognizes that the "pseudo series" does not end in the main display area Dm, and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. Note that the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 44(a), since the "pseudo combination" continues, the executed symbols are not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(c), the chance symbol "778" that had been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm starts to change again from the state of FIG. 44(b), and the entire display area Dm1 to Dm3 This shows a state in which the image is changing rapidly and cannot be seen.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a "x2" symbol is displayed in the right small region Ds3, which indicates that the second "pseudo series" performance has developed due to the appearance of the chance symbol. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute a maximum of five "pseudo-run" effects in the "slump effect", and the more times the "pseudo-run" effect is performed, the more likely it is to be selected at the time of a jackpot. By clearly displaying the number of executions of the "pseudo-continuous" effect in the right small area Ds3, it is possible to make the player constantly aware of the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the currently executed effect. can. Note that the display mode of the other sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 44(b), since the "pseudo combination" continues, the executed symbols are not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(d), from the state of FIG. 44(c), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. The third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2, and the "7" symbol of the left display area Dm1 and the middle display area Dm2, The chance pattern with the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 is confirmed again, and the appearance of the chance pattern suggests that the "slump performance" will develop (continue). Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 44(d), the player recognizes that the "pseudo series" does not end in the main display area Dm, and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. Note that the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 44(c), since the "pseudo combination" continues, the executed symbols are not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(e), the chance symbol "778" that had been stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm starts to change again from the state of FIG. 44(d), and the entire display area Dm1 to Dm3 This shows a state in which the image is changing rapidly and cannot be seen.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a "x3" symbol is displayed in the right small region Ds3, indicating that the appearance of the chance symbol has led to the development of the third "pseudo series" performance. Note that the display mode of the other sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 44(d), since the "pseudo combination" continues, the executed symbol is not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44(f), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 44(e), and the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. , the third symbol of the "7" symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still changing at high speed and cannot be seen. In other words, during the execution of the "pseudo fluctuation" production element, the reach forming symbol with the "7" symbol appears, indicating a state just before the so-called "reach display" with the "7" symbol appears. . Note that the display mode of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 44(e).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 44(f), the "reach display" appears in the third "pseudo series" performance, and multiple "pseudo series" performances are performed. By performing some kind of "reach display" above, it is possible to draw attention to the subsequent performance (i.e., "reach display") while the expectation level for a jackpot is heightened, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the production elements of the "development possibility production" performed in the "slump production" on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the "first development possibility effect" is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. ), and FIG. 45(c) shows a state in which the "second development possibility representation" is executed from the state shown in FIG. 45(b), and FIG. FIG.

Specifically, in FIG. 45(a), first, the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and then the third symbol of the "8" symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm3. 3 symbols are stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2, and the "7" symbol in the left display area Dm1 and the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed. 8'' symbol appears in a pseudo-chance pattern, and the appearance of the fake chance pattern suggests that this variation performance will be a "loss display."

In addition, on the near side of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in each display area Dm1 to Dm3, there is a pseudo crack in the liquid crystal screen in the central part of the third symbol display device 81 (mainly in the middle display area Dm2). , shows a state in which the effect element of the "first development success/failure effect" is being executed, as if the liquid crystal screen were to break.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo-cracks on the LCD screen further expand from the "first development success/failure performance" performance element to the "second development success/failure performance" described later (success). ), or the screen will pseudo-split from the state of the production element of the "first development possibility production" and develop (succeed) to the production element of "pseudo-ren" production or "Which way reach", Four performance patterns are prepared, in which the performance (that is, the ``slump performance'') ends (development fails) with the performance elements of ``1 development possible performance''.

Therefore, when the player visually confirms the state shown in FIG. To maintain players' expectations for a jackpot due to the continuation of the performance by surmising that it will develop into a performance element of ``performance'', a ``pseudo-ren'' performance, or a performance element of ``which way reach''. I can do it. Note that this "first development possibility representation" is configured so that it can be performed over a period from the beginning of the "development possibility representation" (ie, "0 seconds") to "3 seconds".

Next, in the state of FIG. 45(b), the display area of the pseudo crack is the left display area Dm1, the right display area Dm3, and the sub display area from the effect element of "first development possibility effect" of FIG. 45(a). This shows a state in which the production element of the "second development possibility production" expanded to Ds is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo crack in the LCD screen further spreads from the production element of the "second development success/failure performance" to the production element of the "third development success/failure performance" described later (success). ), or the screen will pseudo-split from the state of the production element of the "second development possibility production" and develop (succeed) to the production element of "pseudo-ren" production or "Which way reach"; Four performance patterns are prepared, in which the performance (that is, the ``slump performance'') ends (development fails) with the performance elements of ``2 development possible performance''.

Therefore, when the player visually confirms the state shown in FIG. 45(b), the player does not confirm the fake chance symbol and the performance being executed (i.e., "slump performance") is changed to "3rd development possible or not." To maintain players' expectations for a jackpot due to the continuation of the performance by surmising that it will develop into a performance element of ``performance'', a ``pseudo-ren'' performance, or a performance element of ``which way reach''. I can do it. Note that this "second development possibility performance" is configured so that it can be performed over a period range of "3 seconds" to "7 seconds" in the "development possibility performance".

Next, in the state of FIG. 45(c), the performance element of the "third development possibility performance" in which the pseudo crack display area is further expanded from the "second development possibility performance" performance element of FIG. 45(b) shows that it is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the liquid crystal screen is broken in a pseudo manner from the state of the performance element of the "third development possibility performance", and a "pseudo connection" is generated. 3.Whether it develops (succeeds) into a production or "Which way is reach" production element, or whether the production (i.e., "slump production") ends (development fails) with the production element of "Third development possibility production" Two performance patterns are available.

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 45(c), the current performance (i.e., ``slump performance'') is changed to a ``pseudo consecutive'' performance without confirming the false chance eye symbol. Alternatively, it is possible to speculate that it will develop into a performance element of ``Which one is the best?'', and it is possible to keep the player's expectations for a jackpot due to the continuation of the performance. Note that this "third development possibility performance" is configured so that it can be performed in a period ranging from "7 seconds" to "10 seconds" in the "development possibility performance".

In addition, each of the production elements of "development possibility production" in the first embodiment is configured to display cracks in the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds as if the liquid crystal screen were cracked. On the other hand, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that the cracks do not appear (do not reach or are displayed on the back side). This means that the production element of the "development possibility production" is a production that determines whether or not the stop result of the currently running "slump production" will change, and the production that is on hold (variable production or "slump production") is It is not meant to change. For this reason, the display mode of the cockpit display area Db, which cannot be changed by this "development possibility effect", should be maintained as it is even if the production element of the "development possibility effect" is successfully developed. No cracks are displayed up to the cockpit display area Db, indicating that no changes will be made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the performance elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" and the "development possibility performance" performed in the "slump performance" on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained (as a time chart, the 23(b) or FIG. 24(b)). FIG. 46(a) shows a state where the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element is being executed in the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81, and a state where the chance development symbol is about to appear. FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing whether or not the chance pattern stops in the "pseudo fluctuation" production element from the state of FIG. 46(a), and FIG. 46(c) ) is a diagram showing a state in which a false chance eye pattern appears in the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" from the state in FIG. 46(b), and FIG. FIG. 46(e) is a diagram illustrating a state in which it is suggested that the fluctuating performance ends when the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" ends and the fake chance symbol appears, and FIG. 46(e) is similar to FIG. 46(d). FIG. 46(f) is a diagram showing a state in which the "third development possibility performance" is executed from the state shown in FIG. 46(e), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a state in which a chance pattern appears.

Specifically, in FIG. 46(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the "8" symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm3. This shows a state where the third symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still being moved at high speed and cannot be seen in the middle display area Dm2. That is, it shows a state in which the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed and the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol are on the verge of appearance of chance development symbols.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a character pattern is displayed in a preview mode suggesting that a "slump effect" is being executed and a chance development pattern will appear. There is. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character designs or the like are displayed.

Furthermore, in the cockpit display area Db, the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, while the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one performance unit of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the pending symbol indicates that each of the fluctuation performance and the "slump performance" is executed. This indicates that the number of reserved pitches for each production unit is 0.

Next, in FIG. 46(b), from the state of FIG. 46(a), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the "7" symbol in the left display area Dm1 is stopped. ” symbol and the “8” symbol in the right display area Dm3, a chance development symbol is determined, and a state in which the effect element of “pseudo fluctuation” is executed in the main display area Dm is shown.

In this "pseudo fluctuation" production element, in the middle display area Dm2, the "7" symbol, which is the same symbol as the left display area Dm1, stops and a chance symbol appears, or a symbol different from the left display area Dm1 appears. (For example, the "8" symbol) stops and a fake chance symbol appears. Note that the display mode of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 46(a).

Next, the state of FIG. 46(c) shows the state immediately before the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 46(b). There is. That is, although the "pseudo fluctuation" is being executed, a so-called false chance pattern appears between the "7" symbol in the left display area Dm1 and the "8" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and right display area Dm3. It shows the state just before (immediately). Note that the display mode of the sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 46(b).

Next, in the state of FIG. 46(d), from the state of FIG. 46(c), the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stop-displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display A fake chance pattern is displayed in a pseudo manner by the "7" symbol in the area Dm1 and the "8" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3, and the appearance of the fake chance symbol causes the main "slump effect". This suggests a situation where the process ends with a "lost display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 46(d), the player assumes that the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element has ended in the main display area Dm, and that the "slump performance" has ended. .

In addition, the character design in the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the pseudo-appearance of a ``loss display'' in the ``slump effect''. Note that the display modes of the other sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as the state shown in FIG. 46(c).

Next, the state of FIG. 46(e) shows a state in which the effect element of "third development possibility effect" has been executed from the state of FIG. 46(d).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 46(e), the player does not confirm the fake chance symbol and the current performance (i.e., ``slump performance'') is changed to a ``pseudo consecutive'' performance. Alternatively, it is possible to speculate that it will develop into a performance element of ``Which one is the best?'', and it is possible to keep the player's expectations for a jackpot due to the continuation of the performance. Note that the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 46(d), with the execution symbol not being erased because the "development possibility effect" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 46(f), the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is artificially broken in the production element of the "third development possibility production" from the state of FIG. 46(e), and the broken beat is displayed. FIG. 46(e) shows a state in which the fake chance pattern (i.e., "788") displayed in the main display area Dm has been replaced with a chance pattern (i.e., "778").

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 46(f), he feels a sense of happiness because his guess in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to maintain expectations for a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the performance elements of "Pseudo fluctuation" and "Which way reach" performed in the "slump performance" on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained (as a time chart, the 23(b) or FIG. 24(b)). FIG. 47(a) shows a state in which the “high-speed fluctuation” effect element is being executed in the “slump effect” on the third symbol display device 81, and the chance eye developing pattern is just before it stops in the main display area Dm. FIG. 47(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance pattern appears in the "pseudo fluctuation" production element from the state of FIG. 47(a), and FIG. 47(c) ) is a diagram showing a state where the "pseudo fluctuation" effect element is being executed after all the symbols have changed again from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 47(d) is a diagram showing a state in which the reach-forming pattern appears from the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the reach-forming pattern is enlarged. Yes, FIG. 47(e) is a diagram showing a state in which the "Which way reach" effect element is being executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 47(d), and FIG. 47(f) is It is a diagram showing a state where a jackpot symbol appears from the state of FIG. 47(e).

Specifically, in FIG. 47(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the third symbol of the "8" symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm3. This shows a state where the third symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the third symbol is still being moved at high speed and cannot be seen in the middle display area Dm2. That is, it shows a state in which the performance element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed and the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol are on the verge of appearance of chance development symbols.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a character pattern is displayed in a preview mode indicating that a fluctuating effect or a "slump effect" is being executed, and that a chance development pattern will appear. Displayed. Specifically, the character design displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in a manner as if the character is cheering. Note that a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character designs or the like are displayed.

Furthermore, in the cockpit display area Db, the executed symbols are displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, while the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one performance unit of the fluctuation performance or "slump performance" is being executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the pending symbol indicates that each of the fluctuation performance and the "slump performance" is executed. This indicates that the number of reserved pitches for each production unit is 0.

Next, in the state of FIG. 47(b), from the state of FIG. 47(a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display area Dm1 and The chance eye pattern is determined by the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3, and the appearance of the chance eye symbol causes the "slump effect" to develop (continue). Suggests. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state shown in FIG. 47(b), the player is aware that the "pseudo fluctuation" performance element does not end in the main display area Dm, and that the "slump performance" is continuously executed. recognize. Note that the display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state shown in FIG. 47(a), since the "pseudo combination" continues, the executed symbols are not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 47(c), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 47(b), and the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. , the third symbol of the "7" symbol is just before being stopped and displayed, and furthermore, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still changing at high speed and cannot be seen. In other words, during the execution of the "pseudo fluctuation" production element, the reach forming symbol with the "7" symbol appears, indicating a state just before the so-called "reach display" with the "7" symbol appears. .

However, in the sub-display area Ds, a "x2" symbol is displayed in the right small region Ds3, which indicates that the second "pseudo series" performance has developed due to the appearance of the chance symbol. Note that the display modes of the other sub display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as the state shown in FIG. 47(b).

Next, in the state of FIG. 47(d), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 47(c), and the third symbol of the "7" symbol is displayed. This shows a state in which the "reach display" has been finalized and the effect element "Which is reach" is being executed in the main display area Dm. In this "Which one is reach" effect element, first, the entire main display area Dm is displayed in a manner as if it had been enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol that is being stopped and displayed is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is displayed at low speed in a visually recognizable manner (e.g. , low-speed scrolling from the "6" symbol to the "7" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the occurrence of the "Which way reach" production element, and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are no longer visible. It is in a state of

This is because the sub-display area Ds mainly has the function of indicating whether or not the "reach display" will occur in the fluctuating effect or "slump effect" in the main display area Dm. ” occurs, the significance of the existence of the sub-display area Ds diminishes. Furthermore, when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the player pays attention to whether the result of the "reach display" is a "jackpot display" or a "loss display." Therefore, attention to the display content of the sub-display area Ds, which suggests the occurrence of a "reach display", is diminished. Therefore, when a "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content in the main display area Dm is enlarged to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player focuses on. The sub-display area Ds is configured to be displayed and erased as the sub-display area Ds is enlarged.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(d), a "x2" symbol is displayed in the portion corresponding to the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, similar to the display state shown in FIG. 47(c). Therefore, similar to FIG. 47(c), this shows that the second "pseudo-ren" performance has developed.

This is because the "x2" symbol indicates to the player the expectation of a jackpot in the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" that is currently being executed, and the "x2" symbol is used during the fluctuating performance or "slump performance". By making the player check, the player is able to predict whether or not the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" that is being executed will be a jackpot, and the player is provided with entertainment based on the prediction.

In addition, the cockpit display area Db is a display that suggests how many variable effects or "slump effects" are pending, and in the currently executing variable effect or "slump effect," the "reach display" where you can expect a jackpot is displayed. If this occurs, the player is more concerned about whether the currently running variable effect or slump effect will be a jackpot display or whether it will be a ``loss display'' than how many variable effects or slump effects are on hold (standby). We are focusing on what will happen.

For this reason, the player does not pay attention to the pending symbols and executed symbols that indicate the number of pending balls in the variable effect or the "slump effect," but uses the cockpit display area Db to display the pending symbols and executed symbols during the execution of the "reach display." If displayed, the player may not be able to concentrate on the "reach display" performance, and the player may feel bothered by the display of the pending symbols and executed symbols.

Furthermore, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relationship to the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" that is being executed. . Furthermore, the pending symbols displayed in the first to fifth pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are separate from the display control of the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" (i.e., the fluctuating performance process (see FIG. 42)) that is being executed. The display is controlled by system processing (in the audio lamp control device 113, the hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)). While "reach display" is being executed, many additional effects are performed on many sprites by making various character designs appear and displaying many effects on each character design. The processing load for display control is increasing. In such a situation, if you control the display of multiple pending symbols that are not directly related to the fluctuating effect or "slump effect" that is being executed, the number of sprites of each pending symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The processing load related to overall display control increases, and there is a risk that display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Furthermore, the executed symbols displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db take over (inherit) the display mode of the pending symbol that was changed by the "pending change notice" and are displayed in the executed symbol display mode. In order to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot of the fluctuating performance, it has a direct relationship with the fluctuating performance or "slump performance" that is currently being executed. However, the "pending change notice" suggests the degree of expectation that the "jackpot display" will appear, as well as the degree of expectation that the "reach display" will appear. Therefore, when the "ready-to-reach display" appears, the indication of the degree of expectation for the appearance of the "ready-to-reach display" as a "pending change notice" has been fulfilled. In addition, when the "reach display" appears, it is a state in which the indication of the appearance expectation degree of the "jackpot display" is satisfied to a certain degree (for example, half). Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the "reach display" appears, the player focuses on the performance content of the "reach display" and becomes less interested in the display format of the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol. There is.

Therefore, while the "reach display" is being executed, the pending symbols and executed symbols that have a low attention level by the player are deleted, and the "reach display" effect is mainly performed on the display screen, thereby encouraging the player to "reach display". It is possible to draw attention (concentration) to the performance. In addition, by erasing pending symbols and executed symbols that have a low level of player attention, the burden of display control can be removed in advance, thereby eliminating the need for players to feel strange about the game, such as dropped frames, etc. Display abnormalities can be prevented from occurring.

Next, in FIG. 47(e), from the state of FIG. 47(d), an effect is executed in the main display area Dm to determine whether it will be a "jackpot display" or a "loss display" in the "which is it" effect. It shows the state of being.

In this "Which way effect" effect, the "7" symbol that makes up the "jackpot display" and the "8" symbol that makes up the "loss display" push each other out of the display area. Ru. Then, in the performance of the "Which one effect", if the "7" symbol forming the "jackpot display" pushes the "8" symbol out of the display area, and the "7" symbol is displayed in the center of the display area. It is set so that it becomes a jackpot and a "jackpot display" appears as the display result. On the other hand, if the "8" symbol that makes up the "loss display" pushes the "7" symbol out of the display area and the "8" symbol is displayed in the center of the display area, it will be a loss, and the display result will be the "loss display". is set to appear.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 47(e), the reach-forming symbol of the "7" symbol that caused the production element of "Which one is reach" is displayed in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a reduced size. is displayed. "Which effect" indicates whether the currently executed "slump effect" will be a "jackpot display" or a "loss display", but since it is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), If the player performs "Which is a reach" in a state where no formed symbols are displayed, the player may forget which third symbol caused the "reach display" to occur. On the other hand, if the reach-forming symbol is displayed in a large size during the execution of "Dochida Reach", the "Dochida Effect" becomes difficult to see, and the third symbol obstructs the "Dochida Effect" itself. There is a risk of it getting lost.

Therefore, while the "Which way effect" is being executed, the reach-forming symbol of the third symbol that caused the "Which way reach" is displayed in a small size in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. . By configuring this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that a ``reach display'' has occurred without interfering with the ``which direction effect'', and also to indicate the type of the third symbol that caused the ``reach display'' to the player. It is possible to make clear suggestions to the person concerned.

In the state of FIG. 47(e), the portion corresponding to the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds has a "x2" symbol as in the display states of FIGS. 47(c) and 47(d). is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 47(f), from the state of FIG. 47(e), the "7" symbol, which is the same as the reach forming symbol, is displayed in "Which way reach", and the "7" symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. This shows a state in which a "jackpot display" has appeared. Therefore, the player can feel happy and satisfied with the appearance of the "jackpot display" as a result of the "slump effect".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is designed to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from performing a variable performance of the third symbol as much as possible. When the variable effect of the third symbol is executed based on winning to the left special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a for the first time from the slump state where the variable effect is not performed, the time of the actual variable effect is The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a long "slump effect". By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the performance time performed on the third symbol display device 81, reduce situations where no performance is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and prevent players from becoming disheartened. I can do it.

Furthermore, based on the winning in the dummy winning opening 75, the dummy pending display is displayed in the same manner as the actual main pending display, and when the "slump effect" is executed, the dummy pending display is extinguished (erased). . With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the first symbol (third symbol) is actually drawn by the ball entering the left special symbol prize opening 77a or the right special symbol prize opening 78a, or whether the dummy prize opening 75 While making it difficult to identify whether the first symbol (third symbol) is not actually drawn due to the ball entering the ball, the "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81 causes the third symbol to be drawn The presentation time performed on the display device 81 can be made longer than the actual variable presentation time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a larger number of performances than the actually obtained variable performances, and to improve the interest of the game by the number of performances. In addition, since the number of executed symbols and pending symbols can be displayed while matching the number of performances to be executed, the dynamic performance state on the third symbol display device 81 can be extended and the player can It is possible to provide a performance that does not make you feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a "slump effect", in order to match the displayed execution symbols and pending symbols with the number of executions of the "slump effect" effect unit, special symbols are used. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ball started winning into the winning holes 77a and 78a and the "slump effect" started, the ball held in the holding device 73 is made to enter the dummy winning hole 75, and a dummy holding display is displayed. Display the pending symbols. Then, each time the performance unit of the first "slump effect" ends, the executed symbol is erased, the pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, is moved to the executed symbol, and the next "slump effect" is started based on the moved executed symbol. By starting the performance unit ", the performance is performed as if the variable performance had been completed once. By configuring in this way, the dynamic performance of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is performed for a period longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable performance while executing the performance unit for the number of executions of the acquired fluctuating performance. By lengthening the time and reducing the number of situations in which the third symbol is not dynamically produced on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be prevented from losing interest and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the performance mode of the variable performance obtained by starting winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" performance mode, the variation time of the obtained variable performance is The extended time for performing an additional performance is acquired by lottery, and the ``slump performance'' is executed during the total time of the acquired variable time and extended time. With this configuration, even if it is a variable performance that does not give a jackpot, the dynamic performance time of the third symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable performance. However, by reducing the number of situations in which the third symbol is not dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disheartened.

Furthermore, the performance mode of the variable performance obtained by starting winning in the "slump state" is a production mode that executes "reach display" (i.e., "normal reach" production mode, "super reach" production mode, or "special reach" production mode) ), the extended time is not drawn, and one or more "pseudo-connection" performances are executed according to the obtained variable time, and the "Which one is reach" performance element is executed. As a result, when a "reach display" with little need to extend the performance time is obtained, by configuring it so that the lottery and acquisition of the extension time is not performed, the processing burden related to extracting the extension time is reduced, and , it becomes easier to manage the performance time of the "slump performance".

In addition, if the performance mode of the variable performance obtained by starting winning during the "slump performance" is the "non-reach (long)" performance mode, the extension time will not be drawn, and the " It is configured so that the production time for "slump production" is added. This is because the extension time has already been obtained for the "slump effect" that is already being executed, and if an additional extension time is acquired in that state, the production time of the "slump effect" will be longer than necessary. At the same time, the management of the performance time becomes complicated. Therefore, if a fluctuating effect is acquired during a ``slump effect,'' by configuring the system so that additional extended time is not extracted, the processing load related to extracting the extended time can be reduced, and the ``slump effect'' This makes it easier to manage performance time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the performance time (variable time) of all the performance elements of the variable performance that can be executed in the "normal state" is an integral multiple of the performance time in units of "5 seconds" (i.e., " 5 seconds," 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, or 50 seconds. Furthermore, in the ``slump state'', the performance time of all performance elements except the performance element of ``development possibility performance'' is also configured as an integral multiple of the performance time in units of ``5 seconds''. The extension time selected in the "slump state" is also made up of integral multiples of the presentation time in units of "5 seconds". By configuring in this way, when performing a "slump performance" composed of multiple performance units in relation to one acquired fluctuating performance, the fluctuation time (and extension time) of the fluctuating performance and the "slump performance" ”, even if multiple “slump effects” are executed in relation to one variable effect (and extended time), the variable time (and extended time) This allows for consistency with the production time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 does not provide variations in the number of variation patterns of the "pseudo series" effect, but only provides a variation pattern in which the number of "pseudo series" effects is one. Even in the case of a ``slump effect,'' it is possible to execute a variable pattern of ``pseudo consecutive'' effects multiple times, so it is possible to reduce the ROM capacity and increase the variety of effects, increasing the game's performance. You can improve your interest.

In addition, during the execution of the "slump effect", the balls held in the holding device 73 are made to enter the dummy prize opening 75 according to the establishment of a predetermined condition, and based on the winning, the held symbol, which is a dummy held display, is displayed. By displaying them in the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to display in the cockpit display area Db a number of reserved symbols that are one more than the number of reserved balls of the obtained variable performance. Furthermore, even if the performance unit of the "slump performance" is performed more times than the number of executions of the acquired variable performance, the number of times of the performance unit of the "slump performance" can be made consistent with the pending symbols. As a result, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance in which a winning/failure lottery is performed is performed more times than the actual number of fluctuating performances without causing discrepancies in the performance.

Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute a prefetch process based on the dummy hold command received from the main control device 110, as in the case of receiving the held pitch count command. In the look-ahead processing based on the dummy hold command, it is determined whether or not the "slump effect" to be executed is appropriate, and based on the suitability, whether or not to perform a "pending change notice" by referring to the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e. will be selected by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the "pending change notice" even for the pending symbols related to the "slump effect", thereby enriching the variations of the effect.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, multiple performance units are executed in the "slump performance", but the "pending change notice" of the "slump performance" determines the multiple performance units at once. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to draw a lottery for "pending change notice" for each production unit of "slump performance", and the control regarding "pending change notice" during "slump performance" can be simplified. This makes it easier to create programs and reduces the processing load.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable performance obtained based on the starting winning of the ball into the special symbol winning holes 77a, 78a in the "slump state" was a performance mode including a "reach display". In this case, since there is no need to display additional pending symbols, there is no need to display additional pending symbols, instead of a "pseudo-continuous" performance that consumes pending symbols, a "pseudo-continuous" performance that does not consume pending symbols. The ball is configured so as not to flow into the dummy prize opening 75. By configuring this way, a "pseudo series" performance that does not consume reserved symbols is performed in the "slump performance", and the performance unit of the "slump performance" is performed the same number of times as the actual performance unit (variable performance). Even in this case, it is possible to maintain consistency between the number of performances of the "slump performance" per performance unit and the number of pending symbols. As a result, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable without causing any inconsistency in the performance.

In addition, in the first embodiment, even if you win the "jackpot display" in the "slump effect", in the case of a variable effect including the "reach display", the extension time is not obtained, and the series of "slump effects" The presentation time is the same as the variation time of the obtained variable presentation. That is, the end timing of the variable performance and the end timing of the "slump performance" are synchronized. Therefore, even if a command regarding a performance related to a jackpot (that is, an opening performance) is sent from the main control device 110, it is possible to match the content of the performance, and from the end of the "slump performance" to the start of the jackpot performance. It is possible to provide a presentation that does not feel strange at the start.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable performance obtained based on the starting winning of the ball into the special symbol winning holes 77a, 78a in the "slump state" was a performance mode including a "reach display". In this case, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy winning hole 75, and the holding symbol or execution pattern is not displayed as a dummy holding display, and instead, a “holding change notice” is displayed. The display mode is configured to increase the display mode by one rank (for example, change from a display mode of "none" to a display mode of "blue"). Here, if the display mode of the pending symbol or the executed symbol is increased by one rank, the display mode will be a display mode indicating that "reach display" etc. is confirmed (i.e., "green" or "red" display mode). In this case, if the reserved symbols corresponding to the performance mode in which the "reach display" does not appear are increased by one rank, there is a risk that a discrepancy will occur in the performance contents. Therefore, for the reserved symbols or executed symbols that correspond to the "slump effect" when losing, even if the display mode is increased by one rank, there will be no discrepancy in the production content (i.e., "None (white)"). By displaying the reserved symbols or the executed symbols in the display mode (display mode), it is configured so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player.

In addition, the MPU 221 of the first embodiment, during the "slump effect", that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0", when there is a new starting prize in the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a, It is configured to determine the progress status of the "slump performance" and, if the "slump performance" is being performed other than the extended time, the value corresponding to the extended time is subtracted from the value of the slump performance timer 223g. . With this configuration, if a new starting prize occurs during a "slump performance", each "slump performance" will be added to the current "slump performance". In order to ensure consistency, the extension time set for performing the additional performance can be reset once, and the content of the "slump performance" can be newly set. This means that if a performance element other than the performance element during the extended time, that is, a performance element in the previous stage of the performance element based on the extended time, is executed, the performance element corresponding to the acquired extended time will not be executed. This is because even if the extension time is reset once and the performance contents of a series of "slump effects" are set again, there will be no discrepancy in the performance contents.

Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern acquired in the "slump state" includes "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is determined after setting the "slump effect" based on the set value of the slump effect timer 223g. , is configured to be cleared to "0". This is because the variation pattern that includes "reach display" is performed for a relatively long variation time, so there is a possibility that a new prize will be won during that variation time. Therefore, until such a case, there is little need to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the winnings in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a, so a variation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, after setting the "slump effect" based on the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223g is initialized and the "slump state" is not entered until the "slump state" is entered again. The subsequent performance will be performed as "normal state". In addition, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223g at this stage, there is no need to grasp the progress status of the "slump effect", and there is no need to perform shift control of the pending symbols including the dummy pending display. The control burden on the MPU 221 can be reduced. In addition, when a relatively long variable time is obtained based on a starting prize in a "slump state," the method of not executing an additional "slump effect" based on subsequent starting winnings is limited to the above control content. First, any control content may be used as long as the additional "slump effect" is not executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "10 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect", when a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display is displayed, that is, when the dummy pending ball counter When the value of 223c is larger than "0", it is regarded as the end timing of one performance unit in the "slump performance (that is, the "false pseudo series" performance)", and the value of the dummy held ball counter 223c is subtracted by 1. At the same time, it is configured to execute shift processing in the pending display information storage area 223e. With this configuration, by displaying the start and end of the "slump effect" and the shift display of pending symbols and executed symbols in a consistent manner, it is possible to create an effect as if the fluctuating effect had been completed once. The ``slump effect'' can be executed a greater number of times than the actual number of fluctuating effects without any discomfort.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment is configured to control the "slump effect" in the "slump effect" which is executed based on the previous start-up winnings to the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a in the "slump state". If a variable effect is acquired based on a new starting prize in the special drawing prize openings 77a, 78a during the execution of a presentation based on the extended time of It is. For this reason, in order to perform an additional "slump effect" based on a new starting prize, in order to ensure consistency between each "slump effect", the remaining extension time obtained based on the previous starting prize will be (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then clears the value of the slump effect timer 223g to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). The content of the "slump effect" is then reset based on the variable time obtained based on the new starting prize. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new starting prize in the middle of a "slump effect," the end timing of the obtained variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized. It is possible to synchronize the end timing of the variable performance and the end timing of the "slump performance" without performing complicated control.

Furthermore, when setting an additional "slump effect", the configuration is such that each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect" is reset, and furthermore, when the setting is reset, The remaining time that is less than 1 production unit is compensated for with a "developable production" that does not create a sense of discomfort even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and that has flexibility (with a range) in production time. Set it as follows. Further, the maximum performance time of this "development possibility performance" is configured to be equal to the obtainable extension time. With this configuration, in a situation where a "slump effect" that is longer than the obtained variable effect is being executed, that is, when a "slump effect" based on the extended time is being executed, a new Even if variable effects are added due to start-up winnings, it is possible to maintain consistency in the effect time by using the "development possibility effect" that can be executed within a width equal to or less than the extension time, and the obtained variable effects can be Since the end timing and the end timing of the entire ``slump performance'' can be synchronized, there is no discrepancy in the performance, and it is possible to provide a performance that the player does not feel strange about.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the number of prize balls in the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a and the dummy winning hole 75 is the same, three. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the prize into the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a or the dummy winning hole 75 based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. Therefore, the player can determine whether the performance being performed on the third symbol display device 81 is a fluctuating performance in a "normal state" or a "slump performance" in a "slump state" based only on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. ”, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game even if a “slump effect” is performed that lasts longer than the actual variable time of the variable effect. can do.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump effect" is started, the main control device 110 side will restart the "slump state" until the extension time in the "slump effect" ends. Changes to ``slump state'' when a series of ``slump effects'' are completed without making any settings. In other words, while a series of "slump effects" are being executed, the variable time of the variable effect has elapsed, and even if it is internally in the demo effect state, it will change to the "slump state" for a while. is awaited. Therefore, the main control device 110 is configured to complete a series of "slump effects" and then enter the "slump state" and set the "slump effect" again. There is no need to perform complicated control regarding consistency with the "slump effect," and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced even when performing the "slump effect."

In addition, when receiving a confirmation command from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether the production status on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of receiving the confirmation command (i.e., whether it is in a fluctuating production or a "slump production" ”), the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is set. Specifically, if the "slump effect" is not being executed when the confirmation command is received, the confirmation command is received while the fluctuation effect is being executed, so the display control device 114 is instructed to display the confirmation of the change effect. Set the display confirmation command for. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "slump effect" is being executed when the confirmation command is received, the confirmation command is received at the first stop timing of "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" while the "slump effect" is being executed. Therefore, a first stop command for display is set to instruct the display control device 114 to make the first stop of the "Gase pseudo series 2" of the "slump effect" (that is, stop the left symbol row Z1). . In this way, when a confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, it corresponds to the performance being performed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether a variable performance is being executed or a "slump performance" is being executed. This command can be sent to the display control device 114, and it is possible to provide a presentation that does not cause any inconsistency in the presentation content and does not feel strange.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if an additional starting winning occurs while the "slump effect" is being executed and the number of pending variable effects becomes "2" or more, the "slump effect" is executed. The system is configured to perform a variable performance without executing a "performance". With this configuration, it is possible to execute a variable effect without executing a ``slump effect'' in a situation where the effect of executing a ``slump effect'' is poor (that is, a state where a certain number of pending variable effects have accumulated). Since there is no need to perform complicated processing to maintain the consistency of the "slump effect," the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a of the first embodiment is formed to have a sharp inclined surface, so that when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted toward the front passage wall 72a, The inclined surface is configured to come into surface contact with the front passage wall 72a of the distribution ball entry opening 72. With this configuration, when the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening/closing plate 73a can be tilted more towards the front passage wall 72a side of the sorting ball entrance port 72, It is possible to reliably guide the balls flowing into the holding device 73.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the balls flowing into the sorting ball entry opening 72 are made difficult to collide with the upper surface side of the tip portion of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a, and the slope of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is By configuring the ball to collide with the surface (that is, the upper right surface of the tilted holding device opening/closing plate 73a, see FIG. 5(c)), the impact when the ball collides with the holding device opening/closing plate 73a is alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding device opening/closing plate 73a from being damaged.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the holding device 73 is configured to hold one ball, and the one ball is entered into the dummy winning hole 75 to be given a predetermined gaming value, while the "slump effect" is performed. By combining it with the performance (display of reserved symbols that are dummy reservation displays), it not only simply adds gaming value, but also enriches the variation of the game by linking the winning to the dummy winning hole 75 with the performance. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned interest can be achieved with a configuration in which one ball is held in the holding device 73, the structure of the holding device 73 can be made more compact compared to a conventional holding device in which a plurality of balls must be held. can. Therefore, the installation area of the reservation device 73 in the gaming area can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in designing the board in the gaming area can be increased.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred. For example, the numerical values listed in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to employ other numerical values.

Furthermore, it is naturally possible to configure any of the configurations of the modified examples shown below by combining the configurations of the above embodiments. Furthermore, it is naturally possible to configure any of the configurations of the following modified examples by combining each configuration of one or more other modified examples. In these cases, additional effects can be achieved by applying each configuration. The following explanation will be based on the reference numbers of parts used in the explanation of the first embodiment, but it is of course possible to replace them with the reference numbers of the same type or similar parts in other embodiments.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, regarding the alternate sorting unit 71, the sorting ball entrance 72, the holding device 73, the board return opening 74, the dummy prize opening 75, the sorting device 76, the left route 77, the right route 78, and the left side special figure prize. The opening 77a, the right-side special drawing winning opening 78a, etc. were configured by unitizing them into one alternate distribution unit 71. On the other hand, each of the members 72 to 78a may be configured as a separate member, or each of the members 72 to 78a may be configured as a unit so as to be different from the alternate distribution unit 71. With this configuration, although the number of parts increases, it becomes easy to replace each member 72 to 78a in the event of a failure, and the efficiency of maintenance work for the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 2>
In the embodiment described above, one ball can be held in the holding device 73. On the other hand, it may be configured such that two or more balls can be held. In this case, the configuration is such that when a release condition for the held balls is met (for example, a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the start of the "slump effect"), all the held balls are released at once. Alternatively, a plurality of held balls may be released one by one. In this case, it becomes possible to display a plurality of pending symbols that are dummy pending displays in the "slump performance", increasing the number of performance units that can be executed in the "slump performance", and enriching the variations of the performance.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, in the "slump state", if a ball starts winning in the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a, the "slump effect" is executed regardless of whether the variable effect based on the starting winning is appropriate or not. was. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "slump effect" is not performed when the obtained variable effect is a jackpot, and the "slump effect" is performed only when it is a loss. The jackpot fluctuation pattern has performance elements that are not present in the loss fluctuation pattern, such as the "re-fluctuation" performance element. Therefore, when a "slump effect" is performed to match the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, the processing becomes complicated and the control burden may increase. Therefore, by configuring the system so that the "slump effect" is performed only when the obtained variation effect is a loss variation pattern, there is no need to match it with the jackpot variation pattern, which simplifies the process and controls the control. The burden can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the fluctuating performance obtained based on the starting winnings in the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is a jackpot, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0". ” and at the same time, the “slump effect” is not performed and the fluctuation effect is performed.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiment, in the "slump state", if a ball starts winning in the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a, regardless of whether the variable performance based on the starting winning is appropriate or not, and even if it is a "reach display". It was configured to perform a ``slump effect'' even when the camera was in use. On the other hand, if the obtained fluctuating performance is a performance mode that executes "reach display", "slump performance" is not performed, and "slump performance" is performed only when it is a "non-reach" performance mode. It may be configured as follows. Variation patterns including "reach display" include various "reach display" production elements, and the variation patterns are wide-ranging. Therefore, when performing a "slump effect" to match a variation pattern including a "ready-to-reach display", the processing becomes complicated and the control burden may increase. Therefore, by configuring the ``slump effect'' to be performed only when the obtained variation effect is a variation pattern of the ``non-reach'' effect mode, consistency with the variation pattern of the effect mode that executes the ``reach display'' is achieved. Since it is no longer necessary to take , the processing becomes simpler and the control burden can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the fluctuating performance obtained based on the starting winnings in the special drawing prize openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is a performance mode including "reach display", the main slump The configuration may be such that the value of the counter 203e is cleared to "0" and a "slump effect" is not performed, but a variable effect is performed.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when a ball wins in the dummy winning hole 75, the pending symbol is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(b)) as a dummy pending display. On the other hand, if the ball enters another winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 63), enters the out opening 66, passes through the second ball entrance 67, etc., the reserved symbol is displayed as a dummy reserved symbol. may be configured to be displayed in the cockpit display area Db. In addition to winning (inflow) of balls, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the "slump effect", or when a predetermined effect (for example, dividing a reserved symbol into multiple effects) is performed in the "slump effect". Therefore, the pending symbol may be displayed as a dummy pending display. With this configuration, the holding device 73 and the dummy prize opening 75 are not required, so the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the "slump performance" was not mentioned regarding the variation pattern including the "pseudo-connection" performance and the "re-fluctuation" performance element, but the fluctuation pattern including the "pseudo-continuation" performance and the "re-fluctuation" performance element. The pattern may be configured to perform a "slump effect".

<Modification 7>
In the embodiment described above, the production element of the "development possibility performance" is always configured to start from the "first development possibility performance". On the other hand, the performance element of the "development possibility performance" may be configured to start from the "second development possibility performance" or the "third development possibility performance". With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the embodiment described above, in the production element of "development possible/impossible effect", in proportion to the passage of time, the process progresses from "first development possible/impossible effect" → "second development possible/impossible effect" → "third development possible/impossible effect". It was designed to change. On the other hand, it may be configured to change in a manner that is not proportional to the passage of time. Specifically, for example, a pattern that maintains the state of "first development possibility performance" all the time, or a pattern that changes to "second development possibility performance" and then changes to "first development possibility performance". , a pattern in which the "first development possibility performance" suddenly changes to the "third development possibility performance", or a pattern in which the "first development possibility performance" changes to the "second development possibility performance" in "2 seconds", and then " An example is a pattern that changes from "second development possibility performance" to "third development possibility performance" in "1 second". With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In the above-mentioned embodiment, the degree of development (content) of the "development possibility performance" is set in accordance with the remaining time of the "slump performance". On the other hand, the degree of development and change pattern of the "probability of development performance" may be selected depending on the expectation level of jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and to change the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the development content of the "development possibility performance", thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 10>
In the embodiment described above, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be simulated to break as the "development possibility performance" having a time adjustment function in the "slump performance". On the other hand, a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable even if the execution time of the performance changes variably may be adopted as a performance for time adjustment in the "slump performance." Specifically, for example, a blackout effect in which the liquid crystal screen goes dark, a freeze effect in which the liquid crystal screen remains frozen on the same screen, and a freeze effect that makes it appear as if the third symbol display device 81 is broken is used to create a "development success or failure effect." It may be configured to perform the following. In addition, there are also performances that allow players to predict that a specific performance will be repeated, such as a performance in which a fluctuating symbol temporarily stops and continues to oscillate on the spot until it stops, or a performance in which it repeatedly moves back and forth. It may also be configured to perform a "development possibility" based on the following. By configuring it in this way, even if the ``development possibility effect'' suddenly starts or is interrupted and is replaced with another effect, the time spent in the ``slump effect'' is maintained so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. It may be configured to adjust.

<Modification 11>
In the above-mentioned embodiment, the "development possibility effect" and the "which reach" are configured as effect elements exclusively for the "slump effect." On the other hand, it may be configured such that the "development possibility effect" and the "which way is the reach" can be selected even in the variable effect of the "normal state". With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 12>
In the embodiment described above, once the game is in a "slump state", the game is configured to change from the "slump state" to the "normal state" by starting and winning a prize. On the other hand, once the game is in a "slump state," it may be configured to maintain the "slump state" for a predetermined period of time (for example, a predetermined number of seconds or until the next jackpot).

<Modification 13>
In each of the above embodiments, in the special symbol lottery, only one of the jackpots of "15R probability variable jackpot", "15R regular jackpot", or "2R probability variable jackpot" is awarded. On the other hand, there are jackpots that are different from the above-mentioned jackpots (for example, "non-probable jackpots", "latent probability jackpots", so-called "sudden probability-variable jackpots (2R probability-variable jackpots)"), and "small wins" that are different from jackpots. It may be configured to perform the following. With this configuration, when a player wins a jackpot, the game value given to the player is different, thereby creating variations in the game and realizing diverse gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, when a "small win" is provided in a special symbol lottery, when a small win is won, the opening/closing mode of the big prize opening 65a, etc. should be the same as or similar to the jackpot in which a "latent probability fluctuation state" is given. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the "normal gaming state" and the "latent probability variation state." With this configuration, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows players to guess which game state the game is in, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the "small win" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the big prize opening 65a etc. is executed, but unlike the "15R probability variable jackpot" and "2R probability variable jackpot", the transition of the gaming state is not executed.

<Modification 14>
In each of the embodiments described above, when a ball wins in the special drawing winning slots 77a, 78a, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. are obtained based on the winning timing and a jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, instead of the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a, a plurality of predetermined winning areas are provided, and when a ball flows into the winning area, a gaming value corresponding to the winning area is awarded. Good too. Specifically, for example, there is a first winning area in which a first gaming value (for example, "7R time-saving jackpot") is awarded when balls flow in, and a first winning area where balls flow in to give a first gaming value higher than the first gaming value. A second winning area is provided in which a second game value (for example, "15R guaranteed strange jackpot") is awarded. Then, the driving mode of the drive accessory such as the electric accessory may be changed depending on the game state, and whether or not the ball flows down to each winning area may be configured to be different. It should be noted that the special drawing winning holes 77a, 78a and the above-mentioned winning areas may be used in combination. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and contribute to increasing the interest of the games.

<Modification 15>
Each of the above embodiments has a so-called loop type game specification in which the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the next jackpot occurs only when a "15R definite variable jackpot" or "2R definite variable jackpot" is won. . On the other hand, a so-called ST type game specification may be adopted in which a predetermined number of "probability fluctuation states" are given after the jackpot ends, regardless of which jackpot is won. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and contribute to increasing the interest of the games.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above embodiments, the second symbol is displayed variably based on the passage of the ball to the second ball entrance 67, and when a winning result is derived from the variable display, the electric accessory 79 is released for a predetermined period of time. It was configured to be the state. On the other hand, the electric accessory 79 may be configured to be displaced to the open state based on the ball entering a predetermined ball entering means. With this configuration, it is possible to create a game in which the ball enters the ball entering means in order to open the electric accessory 79, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the stop display of the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" in the "slump effect" and the final timing of the variable effect are configured to be synchronized. On the other hand, the stoppage of some symbol fluctuations (for example, the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 or the right symbol row Z3, a pseudo stop such as the ball-thumping effect in the "reach display") is synchronized with the finalization timing of the fluctuation effect. It may be configured as follows.

<Modification 18>
In the embodiment described above, the "slump effect" and the acquired variable effect are synchronized only by the stop display of the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase pseudo series 2" in the "slump effect" and the final timing of the variable effect. Relatedly, the content of the fluctuating performance was not suggested in the "slump performance" until the final stop symbol appeared. On the other hand, when the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" in the "slump effect" is stopped and displayed, a result suggestion display indicating the result of the fluctuating effect etc. may be performed. Specifically, when the result of the variable effect is a "reach display" or "jackpot display", when the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase Pseudo-Ren 2" stops, the symbol will perform a unique stop action (for example, a bounce stop). etc.).

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 dynamically displays the first symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol, which is a decorative effect of the dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37. It was configured to perform a three-symbol fluctuating effect or a "slump effect." On the other hand, by displaying a fourth symbol different from the first symbol display device 37 on the third symbol display device 81 and synchronizing the fourth symbol with the dynamic display and the fluctuation of the variable performance, the first symbol display device It may be configured to have the same function as No. 37. With this configuration, a series of symbols can be produced using only one display device (third symbol display device 81), and the number of parts can be reduced. In addition, this fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display of each special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the fluctuation of the variable display of each special symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so the player can: For example, even if the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stopped, blacked out, or frozen, by checking the execution mode of this fourth symbol, the variation effect (dynamic display ) is currently being executed. In addition, even when the "slump effect" is in progress, the fluctuation of the fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display, so you can check the fourth symbol even while the "slump effect" is in progress. , it becomes possible to recognize the start and end of dynamic display. Furthermore, by displaying the number of reserved balls of the third symbol as the fourth symbol, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of reserved balls of the variable performance obtained by the starting winning.

<Modification 20>
In the above embodiment, the system is configured such that, based on the entry of the ball into the dummy winning hole 75, the reserved symbols, which are dummy reserved symbols, are added and displayed without fail. On the other hand, it may be configured to additionally display a pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, only when balls are continuously being fired, a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display is displayed based on the ball entering the dummy prize opening 75, or a predetermined preview effect is displayed. When winning the execution lottery, it may be configured such that a pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, is displayed simultaneously with the appearance of the preview performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of performance modes such as appearance patterns of reserved symbols that are dummy reserved displays, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, when executing the "slump effect", the ball held in the holding device 73 is released at the timing when "6 seconds" have elapsed after the "first effect" of the "slump effect" was started. Then, the ball is entered into the dummy winning hole 75, and a pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, is displayed. On the other hand, the timing at which a prize is entered into the dummy prize opening 75 may be delayed from the above-mentioned timing, but may be configured to be at a timing before the "second performance" of the "slump performance" is started. If the pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, is displayed early, the player will stop firing the ball (so-called stop shot) due to the display of the pending symbol, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease. There is a risk that it will happen. Therefore, when displaying a pending symbol, which is a dummy pending display, by displaying it just before the second performance corresponding to the pending symbol is executed, the player can prevent the player from hitting the stop, and the pachinko machine 10 can be operated. The decline can be prevented.

<Modification 22>
In the embodiment described above, when the third symbol display device 81 does not perform a variable performance, the transition is made to a "slump state", and during the "slump state", based on the starting winnings to the special symbol winning holes 77a and 78a, It was configured to perform a "slump effect." On the other hand, in a situation where a special condition different from the above conditions is established, the system is configured to shift to a "slump state" and execute a "slump effect" based on the starting winnings in the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a. Good too. Specifically, for example, it may shift to a "slump state" every predetermined period of time after the start of the game, or it may shift to a "slump state" when the gaming state is changed, or it may shift to a "slump state" at the same time as the gaming state is changed. It may be configured to shift to a "slump state" upon winning a prize in the winning opening. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 23>
In the above embodiment, the lottery information of the first symbol (third symbol) which is one special symbol is acquired due to the winning of a game ball to the left special symbol winning hole 77a or the right special symbol winning hole 78a, Based on the lottery information, the first symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device 81) was configured to display the lottery result of the first symbol (third symbol). On the other hand, it is configured to be able to dynamically display a plurality of special symbols (fluctuating performance), acquire the lottery information of the first special symbol due to winning in the left special symbol winning hole 77a, and It may be configured such that lottery information of a second special symbol different from the first special symbol is obtained due to a winning in the winning hole 78a, and a lottery is performed for each of them. In addition, as a lottery method for multiple special symbols, there is a lottery method in which the lottery for one of the special symbols is executed preferentially (so-called priority fluctuation), and a lottery method in which the lottery is executed in the order of the acquired special symbols (so-called , winning order variation), or a lottery method in which the acquired special symbols are drawn simultaneously and in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation).

<Modification 24>
In the embodiment described above, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to additionally reset the "slump effect" when a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the "slump effect" is being executed. was. On the other hand, the configuration is such that the additional "slump effect" is reset at the stage when the command for the number of reserved balls outputted from the main control device 110 is output when a new starting prize is won while the "slump effect" is being executed. You may. Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, at the stage of receiving the pending pitch number command (i.e., pre-reading process), the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the pending pitch number command and stored in the pending information storage area 223i is Based on the above, control similar to S1418 to S1423 in the fluctuation setting process (see FIG. 39) is performed to set additional contents of the "slump effect". With this configuration, the contents of a series of "slump effects" can be reset when a new starting prize (i.e., prize 2) occurs during the "slump effect", and when a fluctuation pattern command is received. The control burden can be reduced.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" is set without considering the fixed display time of the variable effect (that is, the fixed display time of the variable effect is set to "0"). On the other hand, the fixed display time of the variable effect may be set to a predetermined time (for example, "1 second"), and the "slump effect" may be set based on the fixed display time. In this case, by considering the fixed display time when executing the variable effect, it may be difficult to adjust the execution time and extension time of the effect elements of the variable effect and the execution time of each effect of the "slump effect". By executing "Development Possibility Effect" for adjusting the remaining time, it becomes possible to adjust the variable time and extension time of the variable effect including the fixed display time and the execution time of the effect unit of the "slump effect". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as interruptions (freezing) of the presentation contents during execution of the "slump effect." Here, the fixed display time of the production unit in the "slump production" and the fixed display time in the normal variable production are set to be the same or similar (for example, within ±0.5 seconds, which is difficult for humans to notice the difference). This makes it easier to recognize the performance unit of the "slump performance" as the execution of one variable performance. In this case, a plurality of variations (for example, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, and 2 seconds as the final display time) may be provided in the final display time in the variable performance.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, an extension time is added to the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation performance, and during the total time of the fluctuation time and the extension time, the third symbol display device 81 performs a "slump performance" instead of the fluctuation performance. It was configured to run. On the other hand, an extension time is obtained for a performance that can be executed (for example, a jackpot performance, a variable display of normal symbols, a performance based on a small hit, etc.), and the above performance is performed during the total time of the performance time and the extension time. It may be configured to perform different alternative effects. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a performance for a longer time than the acquired execution time even in the variable display of normal symbols, jackpot performance, and small hit performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can It is possible to increase the interest of the game by configuring the period during which the performance is executed to be long. In this case, a plurality of variations may be provided in the variable display times of the jackpot effect, small win effect, and normal symbols.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, the main hold display and the dummy hold display are displayed using the execution symbols and the hold symbols, and the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display is indicated to the player based on the number of symbols. On the other hand, the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display may be indicated to the player by numbers. By configuring in this way, there is no need to secure a display area for displaying symbols to suggest the number of main pending display and dummy pending display, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen composition of the third symbol display device 81 is increased. can be improved.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" is performed across a plurality of variable effects. On the other hand, it may be configured to perform a series of effects such as a "slump effect" spanning one variable effect and other effects. Specifically, for example, a series of performances may be performed spanning variable performances and jackpot performances, a series of performances may be performed spanning fluctuating performances and demonstration performances, or a series of performances may be performed spanning fluctuating performances and small winning performances. A series of performances may be performed across the performances. In this case, in the jackpot performance or the small win performance, a plurality of opening time variations are provided, and a series of performance times is changed according to the opening time. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

<Modification 29>
In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 manages the drive timing of the holding device 73, and based on the control of the main control device 110, the holding balls stored in the holding device 73 are released to enter the dummy prize opening 75. I was letting it happen. On the other hand, an arrangement may be made in which the sound lamp control device 113 manages the driving timing of the holding device 73 and the holding balls stored in the holding device 73 are released based on the control of the sound lamp control device 113. good. In this case, for example, the out balls are stored in the holding device 73, and the ball is configured to enter a ball entry port other than the winning port that generates the prize ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform performances using the reserved balls stored by the audio lamp control device 113, which has fewer restrictions than the main control device 110, increasing the degree of freedom in performances and increasing the interest of the game. can be achieved.

<Modification 30>
In the above embodiment, as the driving timing of the holding device 73, when a starting winning occurs in a "slump state", the balls stored in the holding device 73 are set at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed (6 seconds after starting winning). The configuration was such that the player was released and the dummy prize opening 75 was entered into a prize. On the other hand, the drive timing of the holding device 73 is such that the balls stored in the holding device 73 are released at the timing when a starting prize occurs or the timing immediately after the winning occurs, or the timing when a predetermined effect occurs (for example, a specific It may be configured such that the balls stored in the holding device 73 are released at the timing when a notice, "reach display", etc.) occurs.

<Modification 31>
In the embodiment described above, the executable time of the "development possibility performance" is shorter than the execution time (i.e., 10 seconds) of the "pseudo connection" performance or the "false pseudo connection" performance (a time longer than 0 seconds and shorter than 10 seconds). ). On the other hand, the executable time of the "development possibility performance" may be configured to be executable for a period similar to or longer than that of the "pseudo-connection" performance or the "falsified pseudo-connection" performance. By configuring it in this way, a "pseudo-association" performance or a "falsified pseudo-association" performance can be replaced with a "development possibility performance", or a "development possibility performance" can be replaced with a "pseudo-association" performance or a "falsified pseudo-association" performance. This makes it possible to replace (change) the game with a rich variety of presentations and improve the interest of the game. In addition, there are rules (constraints) based on the execution of "Pseudo-Ren" performances and "Gase Pseudo-Ren" performances, for example, a rule that if a "Pseudo-Ren" performance is performed two or more times, a "reach display" will always be executed. There is also a rule that if a "Pseudo-Reach" effect is performed three or more times, a "Super Reach" or better effect will always be executed, and a "Gase Pseudo-Reach" effect cannot be performed more than three times in a row. If such rules exist, by replacing the "pseudo-related" production or the "false pseudo-related" production with the "development possible production", a consistent production can be performed without violating the production rules. Can be done.

<Modification 32>
In the embodiment described above, the condition for the occurrence of the "slump state" is set when a period of 10 seconds in which no variable performance is performed after entering the demonstration performance has elapsed. On the other hand, the condition for entering the "slump state" may be such that it occurs immediately after entering the demonstration performance, or it may occur on the condition that the frame button 22 is operated by the player. In this case, by setting the pachinko machine 10 to a "slump state" on the condition that the player gets tired of the current performance state such as volume change, light intensity change, brightness fluctuation, character selection, background selection, etc. and operates the frame button 22, the current state is changed. For players who are tired of the performance state, it is possible to perform a performance different from the usual performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 33>
In the embodiment described above, in order to synchronize the driving of the holding device 73 by the main controller 110 and the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81 by the audio lamp controller 113, based on the command from the main controller 110, The audio lamp control device 113 was configured to execute a "slump effect". On the other hand, when an abnormality such as a command transmission error occurs, all the commands related to the "slump effect" from the main controller 110 cannot be received accurately, and the commands related to the "slump effect" are only partially received. Even in a situation where no command is received (for example, only a slump command), the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute control regarding the "slump effect." In this case, for example, even if a dummy hold command has not been received, display control regarding the dummy hold display may be performed, or conversely, if a dummy hold command has not been received, the hold display may be The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to adjust and change the contents of the "slump effect", such as replacing and executing a "pseudo-relationship" effect that consumes one pending display with a "development possible effect" that does not consume a pending display. You may. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent discrepancies in the presentation contents, prevent the production from breaking the rules due to discrepancies in the presentation contents, and prevent players from misunderstanding.

<Modification 34>
In the embodiment described above, when a "slump effect" is performed, the last effect element in the "slump effect" is determined, and then the remaining effect elements are sequentially determined. On the other hand, the content of the "slump effect" may be determined in descending order of the importance of the effect elements.

<Modification 35>
In the above embodiment, the main hold display and the dummy hold display are each displayed as one individual hold display. On the other hand, the main pending display is composed of the main display of one character symbol, the dummy pending display is composed of the secondary (auxiliary) display of the one character symbol, and the main pending display and the dummy pending display are composed of the main display of one character symbol. The pending display may be displayed by forming a pattern. Further, the dummy suspension display may be displayed using a decorative display related to the main suspension display. The decorative display related to this pending display is, for example, a design that is reminiscent of a character design, a design that is attached to a character design, or a design that can remind one of a character. Any form may be used as long as it exists.

<Modification 36>
In the above-mentioned embodiment, the dummy hold display is exhausted in the "slump effect", so that the hold display is shifted at a timing different from the hold shift timing of the actual variable effect. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the hold display is performed at a timing other than the "slump effect" but also at a timing different from the hold shift timing of the actual variable effect.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. Commands may also be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Alternatively, the display control device 114 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that the display control device 114 sends commands to the audio lamp control device 113 instructing the output of each audio and lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By incorporating these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the variation that results in a jackpot during the variation performance of the third symbol (special symbol) that is suspended and executed after the ball enters the special symbol winning holes 77a and 78a (starting prize winning) or during the "slump performance" The case where a "pending change notice" is performed in the executed symbol and the pending symbol to determine whether or not there is a production or a "slump production" has been explained. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 (starting winning), there is a variable display of the second symbol that is held and executed that becomes a hit (stops at the "○" symbol). Using the second symbol holding lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., it is determined whether or not there is a variable effect or "slump effect" that becomes a jackpot during the variable effect of the third symbol. Alternatively, the player may be notified instead. This allows the player to know whether there is a winning variable display among the variable displays of the second symbols that are on hold, or among the variable displays of the second symbols that are being executed and on hold. . Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether or not the second symbol will be a hit before executing the variable display of the second symbol. Some gaming machines enhance the gameplay depending on whether or not the second symbol hits, and this is particularly effective in such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbol to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, but it is not necessarily limited to this. , a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed executes a "suspended change notice" which is one form of continuous notice effect, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The machine 10 is provided with a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81, and in conjunction with the variable production or "slump production" executed by the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol display device is provided with a fourth symbol display device. By displaying a symbol, a continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as a "hold change notice") that is executed across multiple fluctuating effects or ``slump effects'', unlike a ``pending change notice'' or ``pending change notice''. (referred to as "continuous preview performance"). In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, by providing the pachinko machine 10 with an accessory that is different from each movable accessory that operates according to various performances, and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner in conjunction with a variable performance or "slump performance", continuous notice can be made. You may also perform a performance. Furthermore, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with a variable effect or a "slump effect."

As a result, each time a variable effect or "slump effect" (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device. , the accessory operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination parts 29 to 33 light up or flash, giving the player a feeling of anticipation of a jackpot. You can have it. In addition, although the player usually continues playing the game by watching the third symbol display device 81 where a fluctuating effect or “slump effect” is performed, a fourth symbol display that is different from the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Since a continuous notice performance is performed by displaying symbols by the device, operating accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player is given a notice that is different from normal. It is possible to easily recognize that the performance has been performed. In addition, continuous notice performances can be easily performed continuously by simple controls such as displaying symbols on the fourth symbol display device, operating accessories, outputting audio from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking the illumination sections 29 to 33. A preview performance can be performed.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that when starting a winning prize, By causing the main control device 110 to perform the correctness judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform a continuous notice performance, and by causing the display control device 114 to perform a fluctuation performance or "slump performance", When the pachinko machine 10 performs a continuous preview performance, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required of the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, the display of the symbols for continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbols for continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined manner, and the sound from the audio output device 226. A continuous preview performance may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and controlling each in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous preview effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice performance (display on the third symbol display device 81, display on the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , or a combination thereof), the continuous preview performance is selected according to the game status after the end of the continuous preview performance ("15R definite strange jackpot", "15R regular jackpot", "2R sure strange jackpot", miss). A plurality of modes may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of pending balls that has been added by "1" when there is a winning (starting winning) in the special drawing winning slots 77a and 78a. A case has been described in which the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b due to the starting prize are included as they are in response to the pitch count command, and are sent to the audio lamp control device 113, but the pending pitch count command The types of counters included in the table may be part of counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the values of each of these counters is included in the held ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command other than the held pitch count command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Another command may be a dedicated command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in conjunction with a start-up winning, or a command that sends other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command by voice. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may include the values of each counter acquired in conjunction with the winning start. As another command, when notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is specified in the fluctuating effect corresponding to which number of holds. Information indicating whether this is the case may also be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 stores each of the hold information areas included in the command in any of the first to fourth hold information areas corresponding to the hold count, based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. Counter values can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winnings to the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a and the passage through the second ball entering hole 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is four times. The number of times is not limited to , and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for a variable effect or "slump effect" based on winnings in the special drawing winning holes 77a and 78a can be displayed numerically or in four divided areas on a part of the third symbol display device 81. may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light-emitting member It may be configured to notify the number of pitches.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display or "slump effect" which is a variable display of the third symbol is one in which the symbol as identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be performed by moving the symbols horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. In addition, the variable display of a symbol is not limited to a variable display of a symbol; for example, a display in which one or more characters are displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes together with the symbol or separately from the symbol. This also includes display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variation effect or a "slump effect", a case has been described in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such high speed that the player cannot see them. Instead of displaying high-speed fluctuations, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed reduced to the extent that they cannot be seen, or all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a snow noise-like manner in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. It may also be displayed as an image.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine from the above embodiment. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected jackpot value until you hit the jackpot once and hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after a jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machine, and a so-called gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.
<Group A: Execute dynamic performance for longer than the set variable time>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of incoming balls is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the interest of the game, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a jackpot appears, the symbols are changed again in the dynamic display and the dynamic display is executed again. There are devices that perform a pseudo-effect that makes it appear as if a specific display result has been displayed (so-called "pseudo-relationship" effect), and then execute an effect that shows whether or not a specific display result will appear (for example, Patent Document 1 (Unexamined Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-134027)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the contents of the dynamic display are monotonous, and it is not possible to create surprises in the presentation contents. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of group A have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a selection means (for example, selecting the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the fluctuating effect of the third symbol) performed on the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means; For example, a fluctuation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the execution time selected by the selection means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
Execution determination means (for example, main slump counter 203e or demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the display means determines that the execution time is longer than the execution time selected by the selection means. The game machine A0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specific performance execution means (for example, a slump performance storage area 223h) that executes a specific performance (for example, a "slump performance") instead of the dynamic display of time.

According to the gaming machine A0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects an execution time for dynamic display of the identification information to be performed in the display means, and the dynamic display execution means Accordingly, dynamic display is performed on the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means. When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the specific effect execution means determines the execution time selected by the selection means in the display means. A specific effect is executed instead of a dynamic display for a longer period of time. This has the effect that by increasing the execution time of the performance on the display means, it is possible to reduce the number of situations where no performance is performed on the display means and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, specific effects include, for example, effects that are the same, approximately the same, or related to the dynamic display, effects that are the same, substantially the same, or related to the demonstration effects, and effects that are the same or approximately the same as the jackpot effect or the small win effect. Examples include effects that are the same or related to the dynamic display, and effects that are completely different from or unrelated to the dynamic display.

In gaming machine A0,
The specific performance execution means is
an extension time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) when executing the specific performance;
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223g) for executing the specific effect during the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means; A gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is equipped with the following.

According to gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when executing a specific performance, a predetermined extension time is selected by the extension time selection means provided in the specific performance execution means. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means during the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. . As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect for more than the execution time of the selected dynamic display, and by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, the situation where the effect is not performed on the display means is reduced, and the game It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a judgment performance for determining whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, a "loss display", a false chance pattern, etc.) appears. (For example, when all symbols are stopped, such as a "low speed fluctuation" performance element, a "pseudo series" production, a "false pseudo series" production, or a "normal reach" production element),
The specific performance execution means is
In the specific performance, a plurality of execution means (for example, a first performance and a second performance in a "slump performance") for performing the determination performance in a number greater than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. The performance is executed. Then, in the specific performance, a plurality of times execution means provided in the specific performance execution means executes a number of determination performances that are greater than the number of lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. As a result, in a specific performance, a larger number of determination performances than the number of dynamic displays actually obtained are executed, giving the player the illusion that he or she has obtained many lottery opportunities, thereby improving the game. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine A2,
The plurality of times execution means includes:
a first performance execution means that executes a first performance (for example, "Gase Pseudo Series 1") including the judgment performance of No. 1;
After the first performance is performed by the first performance execution means, a second performance execution means again executes a second performance (for example, "Gase pseudo-ren 2") that includes one of the judgment performances; Equipped with
The first performance execution means is
Ending the first performance within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means,
The second performance execution means is
A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the second performance is ended when the total time of the execution time selected by the selection means and the extension time selected by the extension time selection means has elapsed.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first performance execution means provided in the multiple times execution means executes the first performance including one judgment performance, and the second performance execution means also provided in the multiple times execution means executes the first performance. After the first performance is performed by the execution means, the second performance including the first determination performance is performed again. Here, the first performance execution means performs the first performance so as to end within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means, and the second performance execution means performs the first performance for the execution time selected by the selection means. The second performance is performed so as to end when the total time of this and the extension time selected by the extension time selection means has elapsed. As a result, based on the establishment of the first dynamic display execution condition, the first performance and the second performance, each including a judgment performance, are executed in the specific performance, and the number of dynamic displays is greater than the number of dynamic displays actually obtained. You can perform a number judgment performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player the illusion that he or she is getting many lottery opportunities.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
Based on the execution time selected by the selection means, a predetermined performance element (for example, "high-speed fluctuation" + "low-speed fluctuation", "false pseudo series" performance, "pseudo series" performance, or "normal reach" performance element) etc.) for selecting at least one performance element (for example, S1708 of the variable performance processing (S1117));
The plurality of times execution means includes:
A gaming machine A4 characterized in that, in the specific performance, a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selection means is executed.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means selects at least one performance element from among the predetermined performance elements based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Then, the plurality of times execution means executes a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selection means in the specific performance. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been performed, giving the illusion that the player is getting many lottery opportunities. By making the player think, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "same or similar" refers to things that have the same time and content, things that have the same time but slightly different content (slightly in color, composition, size, etc.), or things that have the same content but slightly different time ( For example, if the performance element has content and time that can be associated with the standard performance element, it falls into the category of the above-mentioned "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines A2 to A4,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means,
In each of the plurality of display areas of the display means, an individual area variation means (for example, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The plurality of times execution means includes:
Timing synchronization means (for example, a "non-reach" The game machine A5 is characterized in that the timing for deciding the performance mode of "Long)" and the stop timing of the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase Pseudo-Run 2" are synchronized.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is varied or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area variation means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific performance execution means. Then, the timing synchronization means provided in the plurality of times execution means synchronizes the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means and the stop timing of the identification information of any display area in the specific performance. Ru. As a result, it is possible to make a specific effect executed instead of a dynamic display have a relationship with the dynamic display, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even while the specific effect is being executed. This has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific performance and the dynamic display.

In gaming machine A5,
The timing synchronization means
In the second performance by the second performance execution means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol) in the display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second performance A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the stop timing of column Z1) is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second performance by the second performance execution means, the timing synchronization means causes the timing at which the identification information in the display area other than the display area where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second performance to match the execution time of the dynamic display. is synchronized with the end timing of As a result, the stop timing of the identification information of the display area that is stopped at a time other than the end timing of a specific effect is related to the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display is recognized even while the specific effect is being executed. This has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific performance and the dynamic display.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A6,
The specific performance execution means is
The game apparatus is characterized by comprising a failure execution means (for example, S1405 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that executes the specific performance when the determination means determines that the specific identification information is not displayed. Game machine A7.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determining means determines that the specific identification information will not appear, the specific performance is executed by the losing execution means provided in the specific performance execution means. As a result, even if no gaming value is given due to the specific identification information not appearing in the dynamic display, the specific performance is performed on the display means for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time, and the dynamic display on the display means By reducing the number of situations where no performance is being performed, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disheartened.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The extension time selection means includes:
A gaming machine A8 characterized in that it is provided with an extension non-obtaining unit (for example, S1405: Yes of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) that makes the extension time non-obtainable when the specific identification information appears. .

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the extension non-obtainment means provided in the extension time selection means is configured such that the extension time is not obtained when the specific identification information appears. When specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, immediately after the dynamic display ends, a special gaming state (for example, jackpot) in which a predetermined gaming value is given is entered, and notifications are made according to the special gaming state. It must be made. Therefore, if an extended time is obtained even in a dynamic display in which specific identification information appears, and a specific performance is executed based on the extended time, the specific performance will be interrupted midway with the start of the special gaming state. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the content of the performance. Therefore, according to the gaming machine A8, in the case of a dynamic display in which specific identification information appears, the extension time is configured not to be obtained. With this configuration, even when a specific performance is performed, it is possible to synchronize the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the end timing of the specific performance, without causing any discrepancies in the performance. This has the effect of being able to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine A8,
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection means (e.g., , a stop pattern selection counter C3),
The means for not obtaining an extension is
A gaming machine A9 characterized in that when the preceding stage selection means causes the preceding stage identification information to appear in the dynamic display, the extended time is not acquired.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. When the preceding stage selection means causes the preceding stage identification information to appear in the dynamic display, the extension non-obtaining means is configured to set the extension time to non-obtainable. In a dynamic display that includes pre-stage identification information, it is common that a judgment effect is performed to determine whether specific identification information or non-specific identification information appears. A relatively long dynamic display execution time is selected. In such a case, there is a possibility that lottery information is newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, in such a case, there is little need to perform a specific performance that is performed for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time. Therefore, the gaming machine A9 is configured so that when the execution time of the dynamic display that makes the previous stage identification information appear is selected, the extended time is not acquired. By configuring the game in this manner, it is possible to prevent the presentation time on the display means from being longer than necessary and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Group B: Converting the fluctuating effect of loss into a chance-up effect>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of the ball entering the ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the interest of the game, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a jackpot appears, the symbols are changed again in the dynamic display and the dynamic display is executed again. By performing a pseudo effect (so-called "pseudo-ren" effect) that makes it appear as if the game has been hit, and executing a special effect that makes it appear as if the judgment has been made in multiple dynamic displays, expectations for a jackpot are amplified. There are some (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-134027)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, if a predetermined performance lottery is not won, even special performances such as the above-mentioned "pseudo-ren" performance are not performed, and the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, making it impossible to create surprises in the content of the performance. There wasn't. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of group B have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a selection means (for example, selecting a performance pattern for dynamic display of identification information (for example, fluctuating performance of the third symbol) performed on the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means; For example, a fluctuation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113) that executes the dynamic display on the display means based on the performance pattern selected by the selection means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
When the specific identification information appears, a predetermined event effect (e.g., a "gase pseudo-relationship" effect, a "pseudo-relationship" effect, or a presentation element including a "reach display", etc.) is executed in the dynamic display. Possible event production execution means,
Execution determination means (for example, main slump counter 203e or demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
If the execution determining means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed and the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means does not reveal the specific identification information, the display means displays the dynamic display. A gaming machine B0 characterized in that it is provided with a specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) that executes the event effect as a specific effect (for example, "slump effect") in place of the target display.

According to the gaming machine B0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects a performance pattern for dynamic display of the identification information to be performed on the display means, and the dynamic display execution means Accordingly, dynamic display is performed on the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the event performance execution means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined event performance in the dynamic display when the specific identification information appears, and the execution determination means executes the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. It is configured such that it can be determined whether the Then, when the execution determining means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed and the lottery information acquired by the acquiring means does not reveal specific identification information, the specific effect executing means causes the display means to An event performance is executed as a specific performance instead of a dynamic display. As a result, even if, for example, specific identification information does not appear and no gaming value can be expected to be given, and even if it is missed in the lottery for executing an event production, it is determined that the dynamic display is not being executed. If so, an event production can be executed as a specific production, and the appearance of the event production can make the player expect the specific identification information to appear, and the effect is that the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

In addition, "event production" refers to production units that can be executed in dynamic displays such as production elements including "gase pseudo series" production, "pseudo series" production, or "reach display", as well as, for example, identification information and It may be an effect that a different suggestive pattern (notice pattern) appears, or an effect that changes the background pattern displayed on the display means.

In gaming machine B0,
The event production execution means includes:
As the event production, a development suggestion production (for example, a "false pseudo-sequence") that determines whether or not a development suggestion pattern (for example, a stop of a chance pattern) that suggests that the dynamic display will be executed continuously appears. A gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it executes a ``performance'' or a ``pseudo-connection'' performance).

According to gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the event performance execution means executes, as an event performance, a development suggestion performance that determines whether or not a development suggestion pattern that suggests that the dynamic display will be continuously executed appears. As a result, even if specific identification information does not appear and no gaming value can be expected to be given, it is possible to execute a development suggestion effect indicating whether or not the dynamic display will continue as a specific effect, and The appearance of the suggestive effect makes the player expect the dynamic display to continue and the specific identification information to appear, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
The specific performance execution means is
The specific production includes a plurality of execution means for executing the event production at least twice (for example, "Gase pseudo series 1" and "Gase pseudo series 2" in "slump production"). Game machine B2.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the event performance is executed two or more times as the specific performance by the plurality of execution means provided in the specific performance execution means. As a result, by performing multiple event presentations, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not specific identification information will appear depending on the appearance of each event presentation, thereby increasing the interest of the game. effective.

In gaming machine B2,
a time selection means (e.g., a variation type counter CS1) for selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on a determination result by the determination means;
The multiple execution means includes:
Pre-execution means (for example, execution of "Gase pseudo-sequence 1") for executing the previous event production within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means;
A post-execution means (for example, a "false pseudo-sequence") that executes the event production after the event production by the pre-execution means and beyond the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means. 2)).

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time selection means selects the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the previous execution means provided in the multiple execution means executes the previous event production within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means, and the subsequent execution means also provided in the multiple execution means As a result, a later event effect is executed beyond the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means. As a result, even if no gaming value is given due to the specific identification information not appearing in the dynamic display, the event performance will be performed multiple times, and the performance will be performed on the display means for a longer period than the acquired dynamic time. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming disinterested by reducing the number of situations in which dynamic performance is not performed on the display means.

In gaming machine B3,
The multiple execution means includes:
an extension time selection unit (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) when the post-execution unit executes the subsequent event production;
A total time execution means (for example, a slump) that executes the event production a plurality of times based on the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection time. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is equipped with a production timer 223g).

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the extension time selection means provided in the plurality of execution means, a predetermined extension time is acquired when the post-execution means executes a subsequent event effect. Then, based on the total time of the extended time selected by the extended time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means, the total time execution means executes the event performance a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to execute an event effect for a time longer than the selected dynamic display and more than the number of times the effect is executed, and by increasing the execution time and the number of times of execution of the effect on the display means, This has the effect of reducing the number of situations in which the event is not being played, and increasing the player's expectation of a jackpot by executing a plurality of event presentations, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In gaming machine B3 or B4,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
Based on the execution time selected by the time selection means, predetermined performance elements (for example, "high-speed fluctuation" + "low-speed fluctuation", "false pseudo series" performance, "pseudo series" performance, or "normal reach" performance) a performance element selection means (for example, S1708 of the variable performance processing (S1117)) for selecting at least one performance element from among the elements (e.g., S1117);
The multiple execution means includes:
A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it executes a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selection means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means selects at least one performance element from among the predetermined performance elements based on the execution time selected by the time selection means. Then, the performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selection means is executed by the execution means a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been performed, giving the illusion that the player is getting many lottery opportunities. By making the player think, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "same or similar" refers to things that have the same time and content, things that have the same time but slightly different content (slightly in color, composition, size, etc.), or things that have the same content but slightly different time ( For example, if the performance element has content and time that can be associated with the standard performance element, it falls into the category of the above-mentioned "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines B3 to B5,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means are
In each of the plurality of display areas of the display means, an individual area variation means (for example, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The plurality of times execution means includes:
Timing synchronization means (for example, " The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the determination timing of the "Non-reach (Long)" performance mode is synchronized with the stop timing of the left symbol row Z1 of the "Gase Pseudo-Run 2".

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is varied or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area variation means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the timing synchronization means provided in the multiple execution means determines the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means and the stop timing of any of the identification information in the event performance by the multiple execution means. are synchronized. As a result, it is possible to create a relationship between the dynamic display and the event performance by the multiple execution means, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even while the event performance is being executed by the multiple execution means. This has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the event performance by the multiple execution means and the dynamic display.

In gaming machine B6,
The timing synchronization means
In the subsequent event performance by the post-performance execution means, the stop timing of the identification information (for example, the left symbol row Z1) other than the identification information (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) that is stopped at the end of the event performance is set as described above. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that the dynamic display is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the timing synchronization means synchronizes the stop timing of identification information other than the identification information that is stopped at the end of the event production with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display in the subsequent event production by the post-production execution means. . As a result, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the event production by the multiple execution means is related to the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the dynamic display ends even when the event production by the multiple execution means is in progress. It is possible to recognize the timing, and the effect is that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event performance by the multiple execution means and the dynamic display.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B7,
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it comprises a performance changing means for changing the performance pattern selected by the selection means to the event performance.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B0 to B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance change means provided in the specific performance execution means changes the performance pattern selected by the selection means to the event performance. As a result, for example, even if the performance pattern is such that no event performance is initially performed, the event performance can be executed, and the appearance of the event performance makes the player expect the appearance of specific identification information, thereby improving the game performance. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In any of gaming machines B4 to B8,
The extension time selection means includes:
The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it is provided with an extension non-obtaining unit (for example, S1405: Yes of the variation setting process (S1213)) that makes the extension time non-obtainable when the specific identification information appears. .

According to gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B4 to B8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the extension non-obtainment means provided in the extension time selection means is configured such that the extension time is not obtained when the specific identification information appears. When specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, immediately after the dynamic display ends, a special gaming state (for example, jackpot) in which a predetermined gaming value is given is entered, and notifications are made according to the special gaming state. It must be made. Therefore, even in a dynamic display in which specific identification information appears, if an extended time is acquired and an event performance based on the extended time is executed, the event performance will be interrupted midway with the start of the special gaming state. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the content of the performance. Therefore, according to the gaming machine B9, in the case of a dynamic display in which specific identification information appears, the extension time is configured not to be acquired. With this configuration, even when a specific performance is performed, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the end timing of the event performance by the multiple execution means can be synchronized, so that the performance This has the effect of being able to provide a performance that does not cause any discrepancies and that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine B9,
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection means (e.g., , a stop pattern selection counter C3),
The means for not obtaining an extension are:
A gaming machine B10 characterized in that when the preceding stage selection means causes the preceding stage identification information to appear in the dynamic display, the extended time is not acquired.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. The extended non-obtainment means is configured to set the extended time as non-obtainable when the previous stage selection means causes the previous stage identification information to appear in the dynamic display. In a dynamic display that includes pre-stage identification information, it is common that a judgment performance is performed to determine whether or not specific identification information appears, so a relatively long dynamic display is required to execute the judgment performance. An execution time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, in such a case, there is little need to perform an event performance using a multiple execution means that is performed for a time longer than the acquired dynamic time. Therefore, the gaming machine B10 is configured so that when the execution time of the dynamic display that makes the previous stage identification information appear is selected, the extended time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the presentation time on the display means from becoming longer than necessary and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Group C: Determine the performance content from later performance elements in the acquired performance time>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game medium such as a ball enters a predetermined starting ball entry means, a dynamic display (fluctuating display) of symbols, etc. is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. A gaming machine is known in which a jackpot game is executed when the displayed result indicates a jackpot.

In such a gaming machine, a plurality of types of dynamic display variation patterns are provided in advance. Then, one variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of variation patterns in accordance with the winning timing of the ball into the starting winning hole, and a dynamic display based on the variation pattern is executed on the display means.

In this variation pattern, first, in the main control means that performs the main control of the game, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected due to the entry of the ball into the starting winning hole, and the control signal based on the execution time is selected. The sub-control unit is notified, and the sub-control unit determines a detailed variation pattern based on the execution time (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-134027)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, a wide variety of game settings must be made in the main control means, and there is a need for ways to reduce the control load on the main control means. There's room.

The inventions in Group C were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load on the main control means.

A main control means (for example, main control device 110) that executes control of the game,
A sub-control means (for example, the audio lamp control device 113) that executes control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means;
It has a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) whose display is controlled by the sub-control means,
The main control means includes:
Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a time selection means (e.g., a variation type counter CS1) for selecting an execution time for the dynamic display of identification information (e.g., a variation effect of the third symbol) performed on the display means based on the determination result by the determination means; ,
comprising a notification means (for example, external output processing (S101) of timer interrupt processing) for notifying the sub-control means of the control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means,
The sub-control means
a pattern selection means (for example, a variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting one performance pattern from among a plurality of performance patterns for executing at least one performance element based on the control signal notified from the notification means; ,
Dynamic display execution means (e.g., variable effect processing (S1117)) for executing the dynamic display on the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
The pattern selection means includes:
When the control signal is notified by the notification means, a second half selection means (for example, in a "slump effect") that first selects the production elements to be executed in the second half of the dynamic display based on the control signal. Stored in the slump effect storage area 223h from “Dochida Reach”) and
Remaining selection means for selecting the remaining performance elements based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the performance time based on the performance element selected by the second-half selection means from the execution time (for example, in "slump performance", "Which one?") The game machine C0 is characterized in that the gaming machine C0 is provided with the following steps: after storing "DAReach" in the slump performance storage area 223h, "development suggestion performance" is stored in the slump performance storage area 223h.

According to the gaming machine C0, the main control means executes the control of the game, the sub-control means executes the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the sub-control means displays the display. controlled. Then, the acquisition means provided in the main control means acquires the lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means also provided in the main control means acquires the lottery information based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. A judgment will be made. Further, the time selection means, also provided in the main control means, selects the execution time for the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed on the display means, based on the determination result by the determination means. The notification means notifies the sub-control means of a control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Then, the pattern selection means provided in the sub-control means selects one effect pattern from among the plurality of effect patterns for executing at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notification means, and similarly The dynamic display execution means provided in the sub-control means executes dynamic display on the display means based on the performance pattern selected by the pattern selection means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, when the control signal is notified by the notification means, the second half selection means provided in the pattern selection means first selects the production element to be executed in the second half of the dynamic display based on the control signal. . Then, a remaining performance element similarly provided in the pattern selection means executes the remaining performance elements based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the performance time based on the performance element selected by the second-half selection means from the execution time. Thereby, the main control means only needs to select the execution time of the dynamic display and notify the execution time to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means executes the second half of the dynamic display based on the execution time. To first select a performance pattern from the performance elements to be displayed, and then determine the performance elements based on the remaining time to determine the content of the dynamic display while ensuring consistency among a series of dynamic displays. Can be done. Therefore, by having the sub-control means perform the main control of selecting a dynamic display effect pattern, there is an effect that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

In gaming machine C0,
The performance element is
Contains a fixed time performance element (for example, a "Gase Pseudo-Ren" performance, a "Pseudo-Reach" performance, or a "Dochida Reach" performance element) consisting of a predetermined fixed time (e.g., "10 seconds"),
The execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means is:
A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the game machine C1 includes a time that is an integral multiple of the performance time of the fixed performance.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are achieved. That is, a fixed time performance element configured with a predetermined fixed time is included as a performance element, and a time that is an integral multiple of the fixed performance is included as the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means. As a result, when the sub-control means selects a dynamic display performance pattern based on the notified execution time, when an execution time that is an integral multiple of the performance time of the fixed performance element is selected, the fixed time performance element It is possible to select a performance pattern for executing a dynamic display by combining the following, and it is possible to execute a performance that is consistent with the execution time.

In the gaming machine C1,
The performance element is
Including static performance elements that do not change or have little change over time (e.g., performance elements of "development possibility performance", freeze performance or blackout performance),
The residual selection means includes:
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the static presentation element is configured to be selectable.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance elements include static performance elements that do not change or change little over time. The static presentation elements are configured to be selectable by the remaining selection means. As a result, for example, even if the remaining time is less than 1 fixed time effect element, by selecting a static effect element as the effect element for the remaining time, it is possible to create a fixed time effect with no or little change over time. Even when a performance element is interrupted midway and the next performance element is executed, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Note that "no or little change over time" means, for example, a state where there is no change at all for several seconds, or even if there is a change, the main content (for example, the entire background, the entire screen composition, An example is a case where only the auxiliary content (for example, a part of the background or a part of the screen composition) changes without changing the character pattern, etc.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C2,
The sub-control means
Execution determination means (for example, sub-slump flag 223f) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the control signal is notified by the notification means and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the dynamic display is performed based on the control signal notified by the notification means. and a specific effect execution means (e.g., slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (e.g., "slump effect") in place of the dynamic display in the display means for a time longer than the execution time of. A game machine C3 characterized by:

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the execution determination means provided in the sub-control means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display. When the control signal is notified by the notification means and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the specific effect execution means causes the execution determination means to display the dynamic display based on the control signal notified by the notification means. A specific effect is executed instead of the dynamic display in the display means for a time longer than the display execution time. This has the effect that by increasing the execution time of the performance on the display means, it is possible to reduce the number of situations where no performance is performed on the display means and to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C3,
The specific performance execution means is
Additional time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined additional time (for example, extended time) when executing the specific performance;
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223g) that executes the specific effect during the total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. A gaming machine C4 characterized by comprising the following.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when executing a specific effect, a predetermined additional time is selected by the additional time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means during the total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. . As a result, it is possible to execute a specific effect for more than the execution time of the selected dynamic display, and by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, the situation where the effect is not performed on the display means is reduced, and the game It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

In gaming machine C4,
The additional time selected by the additional time selection means is:
A game machine C5 characterized in that the game machine C5 includes a time that is an integral multiple of the performance time of the fixed performance.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the additional time selected by the additional time selection means includes a time that is an integral multiple of the fixed performance. As a result, when the sub-control means selects a dynamic display performance pattern based on the total time of the notified execution time and the added additional time, the dynamic display is executed by combining the fixed time performance elements. This has the effect that it is possible to select a performance pattern to perform, and to execute a specific performance that is consistent with the execution time.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C5,
The second half selection means is
Judgment performance selection means for selecting a judgment performance (for example, a performance element of "Which one is reach") for determining whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. Prepare,
The residual selection means includes:
Judgment transition performance selection means for selecting a judgment transition performance (for example, a "pseudo-run" performance in which a chance pattern or a false chance pattern appears) to determine whether to transition to the judgment performance;
A development selection means for selecting the judgment transition effect or a development effect (for example, a "pseudo fluctuation" effect element in which a chance development pattern or a reach formation pattern appears) to determine whether or not to transition to the judgment effect. A game machine C6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination performance selection means provided in the second-half selection means selects a determination performance that determines whether specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. Further, the judgment transition performance selection means provided in the residual selection means selects a judgment transition performance for determining whether or not to transition to a judgment performance, and the development selection means also provided in the residual selection means selects a judgment transition performance or a judgment performance. A development performance is selected to determine whether or not to proceed to a performance. As a result, the sub-control means first selects a performance pattern from the performance elements to be executed in the second half of the dynamic display based on the execution time, and then determines the performance element based on the remaining remaining time. , it is possible to determine the content of a dynamic display while maintaining consistency among a series of dynamic displays.

In gaming machine C6,
The time selection means includes:
A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it is configured such that a long execution time can be easily selected when the specific identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time selection means is configured to easily select a long execution time when specific identification information appears. As a result, when the execution time of the selected dynamic display is a long execution time that makes it easy to execute many effects, a judgment transition effect or a development effect with a high degree of expectation for the appearance of specific identification information is executed. Since the degree of expectation for the appearance of specific identification information changes with the execution of the judgment transition performance and the development performance, there is an effect of creating interest in determining which performance to transition to or not, which can improve the interest of the game. .

In gaming machine C6 or C7,
The judgment transition performance and the development performance are
A gaming machine C8 characterized by executing the same or similar performance elements.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6 or C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the same or similar performance elements are executed in the determination transition performance and the development performance. As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether a judgment transition effect or a development effect is being performed. It is possible to create an illusion as if a display has been made, and to make the player think that he or she is getting many lottery opportunities, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, "same or similar" refers to things that have the same time and content, things that have the same time but slightly different content (slightly in color, composition, size, etc.), or things that have the same content but slightly different time ( For example, if the performance element has content and time that can be associated with the standard performance element, it falls into the category of the above-mentioned "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines C3 to C8,
The specific performance execution means is
When new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during execution of the specific performance, time acquisition means (e.g., variable setting processing) acquires a new execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information. (S1401 of (S1213)) and
a residual summation means (for example, S1409 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that sums up the execution time acquired by the time acquisition means and the remaining time of the specific performance being executed;
A game characterized by comprising: a summation setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) for setting the specific performance anew based on the total time summed up by the remaining summation means. Machine C9.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C3 to C8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during execution of a specific performance, the time acquisition means provided in the specific performance execution means determines the execution time of the new dynamic display based on the lottery information. The execution time acquired by the time acquisition means and the remaining time of the specific performance being executed are summed by the remaining summation means, which is also provided in the specific performance execution means. Then, the specific performance is set by the total setting means, which is also provided in the specific performance execution means, based on the total time summed up by the remaining summation means. As a result, even if the execution time of a new dynamic display is obtained while a specific effect is being executed, by setting the content of the specific effect again, the consistency between the specific effect being executed and the execution time can be maintained. This has the effect that it is possible to set the content of a specific performance while also maintaining the performance.

In gaming machine C9,
The total setting means includes:
A gaming machine C10 characterized in that the second half selection means first selects the performance elements to be executed in the second half of the specific performance based on the total time.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the total setting means, the second half selection means first selects the performance elements to be executed in the second half of the specific performance based on the total time. As a result, even if a new dynamic display execution time is obtained during the execution of a specific performance, the performance pattern will be selected first from the performance elements that will be executed in the second half of the specific performance based on the total time. After that, the performance elements are set again based on the remaining time, and the content of the solo performance can be determined while maintaining consistency in a series of dynamic displays.

<Group D: Dummy hold display>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of incoming balls is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the interest of the game, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a jackpot appears, the symbols are changed again in the dynamic display and the dynamic display is executed again. There are devices that perform a pseudo effect as if a specific display result has been displayed (so-called "pseudo-connection" effect), and then perform an effect to determine whether or not a specific display result will appear (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous performance is monotonous, and it is not possible to create surprises in the content of the performance. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group D have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display of the identification information (for example, a fluctuating effect of the third symbol) is executed in the first display means (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81). dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113),
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
Storage means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying performance number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
a pseudo display means (for example, a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display) that displays pseudo pseudo performance number information on the second display device when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a judgment performance for determining whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, a "loss display", a false chance pattern, etc.) appears. (For example, when all symbols such as a "low speed fluctuation" performance element, a "pseudo series" production, a "false pseudo series" production, or a "normal reach" production element, etc., are stopped);
A total number of performances execution means (for example, a slump performance storage area 223h and a pending information storage area 223i) for executing a number of the judgment performances corresponding to the total number of the performance number information and the pseudo performance number information. A gaming machine D0 featuring:

According to the gaming machine D0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the number of effects information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means. Is displayed. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pseudo display means displays pseudo performance number information on the second display means. Here, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. A judgment performance is executed. Further, the total number of performances execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes a number of determination performances corresponding to the total number of performance number information and pseudo performance number information. As a result, pseudo-effect number information is displayed or erased in conjunction with a judgment effect in which specific identification information or non-specific identification information appears, and even with pseudo-effect number information, the judgment effect is executed, so that the actual This makes it possible to create a sense of realism as if the dynamic display is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D0,
The total number of performances execution means is
When displaying the pseudo effect number information by the pseudo display means, an additional effect selection means (for example, a variable setting S1413) of processing (S1213),
The pseudo display means is
Before executing the additional performance selected by the additional performance selection means, a pre-execution display means for displaying the information on the number of pseudo performances (for example, before executing "Gase pseudo series 2", insert a ball into the dummy prize opening 75) A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is equipped with the following: (when a ball enters a ball, a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display is displayed).

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the additional performance selection means provided in the total performance number execution means selects an additional performance to be additionally executed when displaying the pseudo performance number information by the pseudo display means. Then, the pseudo performance number information is displayed by the pre-execution display means provided in the pseudo display means before executing the additional performance selected by the additional performance selection means. As a result, it is possible to display the information on the number of pseudo effects before the additional effects are executed, so for example, even though neither the information on the number of pseudo effects nor the information on the number of effects is displayed, It is possible to prevent situations in which this is carried out. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game while providing a consistent performance.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1,
A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
A first ball entry means (for example, a left side special figure winning hole 77a or a right side special figure winning hole 78a) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter,
The acquisition means is
acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The pseudo display means is
A game machine D2 characterized in that the pseudo performance number information is displayed due to the entry of a game ball into a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball is ejected by the ejecting means, and the ball ejected by the ejecting means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. Then, the acquisition means acquires lottery information due to the entry of the ball into the first ball entry means. Here, the pseudo display means displays pseudo performance number information due to the ball entering the game ball into the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to display the pseudo performance number information, which is the number of performances performed on the first display means, due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and it is possible to display pseudo performance number information, which is the number of performances performed on the first display means. It is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance number information was displayed by the ball entering the first ball entering means. As a result, even if pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entry means and a pseudo performance is performed based on the pseudo performance number information, the actual dynamic display will not be executed. This makes it possible to create a sense of realism as if you were actually there. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D2,
The second ball entering means includes:
A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is arranged near the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entering means is arranged near the first ball entering means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether a game ball that has flown down near the first ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, thereby preventing the game ball from entering the second ball entry means. Even when pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance number information was displayed due to the ball entering the first ball entry means. As a result, even if pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entry means and a pseudo performance is performed based on the pseudo performance number information, the actual dynamic display will not be executed. This makes it possible to create a sense of realism as if you were actually there. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

Note that "near the first ball entry means" refers to, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball entry means, or, in the case of a plurality of first ball entry means, an area between each first ball entry means. , or a position where both the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can be visually recognized at the same time.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3,
Holding means (for example, holding device 73) that can change between a holding state in which the game balls fired by the firing means are held and a release state in which the held game balls are released based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition; Equipped with
The second ball entering means includes:
A game machine D4 characterized in that the game ball released from the holding means is placed at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the holding means is configured to be changeable between a holding state in which the game balls fired by the firing means are held and a release state in which the held game balls are released based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, and the holding means The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from the game ball can enter. Thereby, it becomes possible to cause the game ball held by the holding means to enter the second ball entering means based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, and to display the pseudo performance number information. As a result, the reserved game balls can be immediately entered into the second ball entering means, and while displaying pseudo performance number information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means, the pseudo performance number information is displayed. Even when a pseudo-effect is performed based on , it is possible to create a sense of realism as if an actual dynamic display was being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine D4,
The total number of performances execution means is
When the additional performance is selected by the additional performance selection means, a counting means (for example, a reservation device drive timer 203g) counts whether it is the timing to display the pseudo performance number information corresponding to the additional performance. , comprising;
The holding means is
A releasing means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) that releases the game balls held by the holding means when it is time to display the pseudo performance number information based on the counting result by the counting means. A game machine D5 is characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an additional performance is selected by the additional performance selection means, the counting means provided in the total performance number execution means counts whether or not it is the timing to display the pseudo performance number information corresponding to the additional performance. be done. Then, by the releasing means provided in the holding means, the game balls held by the holding means are released when it is time to display the pseudo performance number information based on the counting result by the counting means. Thereby, it is possible to associate the timing at which the game ball enters the second ball entry means and the timing at which the pseudo performance number information corresponding to the additional performance is displayed. As a result, even if pseudo performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entry means and a pseudo performance is performed based on the pseudo performance number information, the actual dynamic display will not be executed. This makes it possible to create a sense of realism as if you were actually there. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D5,
The total number of performances execution means is
Holding determining means (for example, holding ball detection switch 73g) for determining whether or not game balls are held in the holding means;
When it is determined by the counting result by the counting means that it is time to display the pseudo-performance number information and the holding determination means determines that no game balls are held in the holding means, the additional presentation is performed. A gaming machine D6 comprising a performance changing means (for example, a performance conversion flag 223k) for changing the performance number information or the pseudo performance number information to a non-digestible performance in which the performance number information or the pseudo performance number information is not digested.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suspension determination means provided in the total performance number execution means determines whether or not game balls are reserved in the suspension means. Then, when it is time to display the pseudo performance number information based on the counting result by the counting means, the game balls are held in the holding means by the holding determining means by the effect changing means similarly provided in the total number of effects executing means. When it is determined that the additional performance is not digested, the additional performance is changed to a non-digested performance that does not consume the performance number information or the pseudo performance number information. As a result, when the game ball to be entered into the second ball entering means is not held in the holding means, pseudo performance number information is not displayed, and the number of effects executed on the first display means and the second It is possible to maintain consistency with the performance number information and the pseudo performance number information displayed by the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D6,
a storage determining unit (for example, a pending display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the storage unit;
Display changing means (for example, a pending change counter 223d) for changing the display mode of the number of performances information and the number of pseudo performances information based on the determination result by the memory determining means,
The performance changing means is
When changing the additional performance to the non-digested performance, the present invention is characterized by comprising a change time changing means (for example, a pending rank up command) for changing the display mode of the number of performances information by the display changing means. Game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the memory discriminating means discriminates whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the memory means, and the display changing means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that appears specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the memory means, and the display changing means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the memory means, and the display changing means Accordingly, the display mode of the performance number information and the pseudo performance number information is changed. Here, when the additional performance is changed to the non-digestible performance by the change time changing means provided in the performance changing means, the display mode of the number of performances information is changed by the display changing means. As a result, even if the additional performance is changed to a non-digestible performance due to no game balls being held in the holding means, the display format of the number of effects information can be changed to increase the player's expectations for specific identification information. By amplifying this, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

<Group E: Hold shift before variable time elapses>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of incoming balls is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

The pending number of this dynamic display is displayed by a predetermined pending symbol, and when the dynamic display in progress ends, the pending symbol corresponding to the dynamic display that has not yet been executed is configured to shift (shift) and display. has been done. With this configuration, the end of the dynamic display being executed and the start of a new dynamic display are indicated to the player, and the number of pending dynamic displays remaining is indicated to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-340046)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the shift display of reserved symbols is monotonous, and it is not possible to create surprises in the content of the performance. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of group E have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the inventions is to provide a gaming machine that can perform unexpected performances and suitably improve the interest of the game. .

Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display of the identification information (for example, a fluctuating effect of the third symbol) is executed in the first display means (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81). dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113),
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying performance number information corresponding to the number of performances performed by the first display means;
A first increasing means for increasing (adding) and displaying the number of performances information based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquisition means (for example, adding a reserved symbol based on a winning to the left special symbol winning hole 77a); ) and
a first reduction means for reducing (erasing) the performance number information based on the completion of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means (for example, erasing the executed symbols based on the completion of the variable production);
A second increasing means for increasing and displaying the number of performances information based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means (for example, a second increasing means for increasing and displaying the number of performances information (for example, suspending based on winning in the dummy prize opening 75) (add and display a pattern) and
A second reduction means for reducing the number of effects information based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second condition different from the termination of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means (for example, "Gase pseudo series 1" in "slump effect") (erasing the executed symbol based on the end of ")".

According to the gaming machine E0, lottery information is acquired when a predetermined starting condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the second display means is configured to be able to display performance number information corresponding to the number of performances executed by the first display means. Then, the first increasing means increases and displays the performance number information based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and the first decreasing means increases and displays the number of effects information based on the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. The number of performances information is reduced. Further, the second increasing means increases and displays the number of presentations information based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and the second decreasing means increases and displays the number of performances information based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means. Based on the fulfillment of a predetermined second condition different from the end of the dynamic display, the number of effects information is decreased. Thereby, the increase and decrease of the number of effects information can be performed under conditions different from the start or end of dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide variations in increasing and decreasing the number of performances information, to provide unexpected performances, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0,
A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
A first ball entry means (for example, a left side special figure winning hole 77a or a right side special figure winning hole 78a) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter,
The acquisition means is
acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The first condition is
A gaming machine E1 characterized in that a game ball enters a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball is ejected by the ejection means, and the game ball ejected by the ejection means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means. Then, the acquisition means acquires lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Here, the first condition is that the game ball enters the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. That is, the performance number information is increased and displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. This has the effect that it is possible to provide variations in displaying the increased number of performances, provide unexpected performances, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1,
Execution determination means (for example, main slump counter 203e or demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means;
When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the first display means displays a plurality of specific effects (for example, "slump"). a specific performance execution means (for example, slump performance storage area 223h) that executes each performance (each performance unit of "performance"),
The second condition is
A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the specific performance of No. 1 has ended.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and when the acquisition means acquires the lottery information, the execution determination means determines whether or not the dynamic display is being executed. When it is determined that the specific effect has not been executed, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect a plurality of times on the first display means. Here, the second condition is the completion of the first specific performance. That is, the performance number information is decreased based on the end of one specific performance that is different from the end of the dynamic display. This has the effect of making it possible to increase the interest of the game by providing variations in the reduction of the number of performances information and providing unexpected performances.

In gaming machine E2,
a time selection means (e.g., a variation type counter CS1) for selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on a determination result by the determination means;
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine E3 comprising: a long-time execution means for executing the specific performance a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time selection means selects the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the long-time execution means provided in the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection means. That is, the specific effect is executed a plurality of times for longer than the execution time of the acquired dynamic display. This has the effect that by increasing the execution time of the performance on the first display means, it is possible to reduce the number of situations where no performance is performed on the first display means, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, consistency is maintained between the performance of the performance on the first display means and the increase and decrease of the performance number information displayed on the second display means, and a performance that does not feel strange is provided so that the player does not lose interest. This has the effect of being able to prevent this.

In gaming machine E3,
The long-time execution means is
an extension time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) when executing the specific performance;
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223g) that executes the specific effect during the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. A gaming machine E4 characterized by comprising the following.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the extension time selection means provided in the long-time execution means selects a predetermined extension time when performing a specific performance, and the total time execution means also provided in the long-time execution means selects the extension time. The specific performance is executed during the total time of the extended time selected by the means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. As a result, the specific effect can be executed for longer than the execution time of the selected dynamic display, and by increasing the execution time of the effect on the first display means, the situation where the effect is not performed on the display means can be reduced. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine E3 or E4,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a performance for determining whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, a performance element of "low-speed fluctuation", a "pseudo-connection" performance, a "false pseudo-connection" performance, or a performance element of "normal reach") etc., when all the symbols are stopped).
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it includes a specific-by-specific determination execution means (for example, a first performance and a second performance in a "slump performance") that executes the determination performance for each specific performance.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E3 or E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination performance as to whether or not specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the determination performance is executed for each specific performance by the specific per-specification determination execution means provided in the specific performance execution means. As a result, for each specific performance, a larger number of determination performances than the number of dynamic displays actually obtained are executed, giving the player the illusion that he or she is getting many lottery opportunities. It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

In the gaming machine E5,
The specific performance execution means is
a first performance execution means that executes a first performance (for example, "Gase pseudo series 1") that performs the judgment performance of No. 1;
After the first performance is performed by the first performance execution means, a second performance execution means that executes a second performance (for example, "Gase pseudo series 2") that performs the judgment performance again,
The second reducing means includes:
Decrease the performance number information based on the completion of the first performance by the first performance execution means, and reduce the performance number information based on the completion of the second performance by the second performance execution means. A game machine E6 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first performance execution means provided in the specific performance execution means executes the first performance for performing one judgment performance, and the second performance execution means also provided in the specific performance execution means executes the first performance. After the first performance is performed by the means, a second performance that performs a determination performance is performed again. Here, the second reduction means reduces the performance number information based on the end of the first performance by the first performance execution means, and also reduces the performance number information based on the end of the second performance by the second performance execution means. Information is reduced. As a result, while giving the player the illusion that they are getting many lottery opportunities, it is possible to check the consistency between the number of performances of the judgment performance on the first display means and the number of performances displayed on the second display means. This has the effect of being able to maintain the player's game and provide a presentation that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, thereby preventing the player from becoming disinterested.

In any of gaming machines E2 to E6,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
Based on the execution time selected by the time selection means, a predetermined performance element (for example, "high speed fluctuation" + "slow fluctuation", "false pseudo series" performance, "pseudo series" performance, or "normal reach" performance) a performance element selection means (for example, S1708 of the variable performance processing (S1117)) for selecting at least one performance element from among the elements, etc.);
The specific performance execution means is
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that, in the specific performance, a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selection means is executed.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E2 to E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the performance element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means selects at least one performance element from among the predetermined performance elements based on the execution time selected by the time selection means. Then, the specific performance executing means executes a performance element that is the same as or similar to the performance element that can be selected by the performance element selection means in the specific performance. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been performed, giving the illusion that the player is getting many lottery opportunities. By making the player think, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "same or similar" refers to things that have the same time and content, things that have the same time but slightly different content (slightly in color, composition, size, etc.), or things that have the same content but slightly different time ( For example, if the performance element has content and time that can be associated with the standard performance element, it falls into the category of the above-mentioned "same or similar".

In any of gaming machines E2 to E7,
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means,
Each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means includes individual area changing means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and right symbol row Z3) for varying and stopping the identification information,
The specific performance execution means is
Timing synchronization means (for example, "non-reach") that synchronizes the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means and the stop timing of the identification information of any of the display areas in the specific performance. A gaming machine E8 characterized in that the timing for determining the performance mode of "(Long)" is synchronized with the timing of stopping the left symbol row Z1 of "Gase Pseudo-Run 2".

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E2 to E7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is varied or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means by the individual area variation means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, by the timing synchronization means provided in the specific effect execution means, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means and the stop timing of the identification information of any display area in the specific effect are synchronized. be done. As a result, it is possible to make a specific effect executed instead of a dynamic display have a relationship with the dynamic display, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even while the specific effect is being executed. This has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific performance and the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine E8,
The timing synchronization means
In the second performance by the second performance execution means, the identification information in a display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol row Z2) where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second performance (for example, the left symbol row Z1) ) is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E8, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second performance by the second performance execution means, the timing synchronization means adjusts the timing at which the identification information stops in the display area other than the display area where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second performance to the execution time of the dynamic display. is synchronized with the end timing of As a result, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the specific effect is related to the stop timing of the dynamic display, and even if the specific effect that is executed instead of the dynamic display is being executed, the end timing of the dynamic display is This has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific performance and the dynamic display.

<Group F: Relationship between slump effect and holding device>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of the ball entering the ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of this type, there is a pachinko machine that is provided with a holding means for holding balls shot into a gaming area. In this pachinko machine, balls are held in the holding means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when a player presses a release button), the balls held in the holding means are released, and the balls are sent downstream. The ball is configured to enter a provided ball entrance, and is configured to provide a predetermined gaming value to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-95235)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the entry of the ball released from the holding means into the ball entrance and the dynamic display based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry means are not related, making the game monotonous. Therefore, the content of the performance was not able to create any surprises. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of group F have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game using balls held in a holding means.

A firing means (for example, ball firing unit 112a) that fires the game ball toward the game area;
A first ball entry means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter (for example, the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a);
Acquisition means (for example, special drawing prize opening switch) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Selection means (e.g., selecting dynamic display of identification information (e.g., fluctuating effect of the third symbol) to be performed on the first display means (e.g., third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means; , a fluctuation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means on the first display means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a second ball entry means (for example, a dummy prize opening 75) that is different from the first ball entry means, into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
a holding device (for example, a holding device 73) that is provided above the gaming area of the second ball entry device and is capable of holding game balls flowing down the gaming area;
A releasing means (for example, a holding means) that releases the game ball held by the holding means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition regarding the dynamic display (for example, "6 seconds" have elapsed since the start of the "slump effect"). device solenoid 73f);
A related display that displays a related display related to the dynamic display (for example, a pending symbol as a dummy pending display) when a game ball released by the releasing device enters the second ball entering device. A gaming machine F0 comprising: means (for example, a dummy reserved ball counter 223c).

According to the game machine F0, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. Then, due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. be exposed. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects a dynamic display of the identification information to be performed on the first display means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is displayed by the dynamic display execution means. , executed on the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means by the firing means, and the holding means is provided above the gaming area of the second ball entering means. Accordingly, game balls flowing down the game area can be held. Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition regarding the dynamic display, the game balls held in the holding means are released by the releasing means. When the game ball released by the releasing means enters the second ball entering means, a related display related to the dynamic display is displayed by the related display means. As a result, the game ball held in the holding means is released based on the fulfillment of the first condition in the dynamic display, and the released game ball enters the second ball entering means, resulting in the dynamic display. It is possible to display relevant information. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of performances by using the dynamic display and the performance using the game balls held in the holding means, and to improve the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. This has the effect of being able to achieve this goal.

In the gaming machine F0,
The first condition is
The game machine F1 is characterized in that a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since execution of the dynamic display was started.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first condition is when a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since execution of the dynamic display was started. That is, when a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since execution of the dynamic display was started, the game balls held in the holding means can be released and allowed to enter the second ball entering means. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform an effect related to the dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball held in the holding means. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of performances by using the dynamic display and the performance using the game balls held in the holding means, and to improve the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. This has the effect of being able to achieve this goal.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
Storage means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
a second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the number information of the dynamic display corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means;
The related appearance means is
A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the game machine F2 is equipped with a performance number information increasing means (for example, adding a pending symbol as a dummy pending display) for increasing and displaying the performance number information as the related display.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the dynamic display performance number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is stored in the second It is configured to be displayable on a display means. Here, the performance number information increasing means provided in the related display means increases and displays the performance number information as a related display. That is, when the game ball held by the holding means enters the second ball entering means, the number of effects information, which is the number of effects dynamically displayed, is increased and displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform an effect as if the number of effects in the dynamic display was increased based on the entry of game balls held in the holding means. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by displaying information on the number of performances that is larger than the number of performances actually obtained in the dynamic display and giving the player the illusion that he or she can obtain many lottery opportunities. The effect is that you can.

In gaming machine F2,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a performance for determining whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears (for example, a performance element of "slow fluctuation", "pseudo-connection") ” production, “Gase Pseudo-Reach” production, or “Normal Reach” production elements, etc., when all symbols are stopped).
The related appearance means is
When the number of performances information is increased and displayed by the number of performances information increasing means, the judgment performance increasing means for increasing the number of executions of the judgment performance by one (for example, "Gase pseudo series 1" in "slump performance" and A game machine F3 is characterized in that it is equipped with "Gase Pseudo-Ren 2").

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. The performance is executed. Then, when the performance number information is increased and displayed by the performance number information increasing means, the number of executions of the determination performance is increased by one by the determination performance increasing means provided in the related presentation means. As a result, the number of judgment effects in the dynamic display is increased based on the entry of game balls held in the holding means, and a number of judgment effects greater than the number of judgment effects in the dynamic display that is actually acquired is executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by giving the player the illusion that he or she will have many lottery opportunities.

In the gaming machine F3, the related appearance means is
When the number of executions of the judgment performance is increased by the judgment performance increasing means, the number of performances is decreased by one at the end of the judgment performance. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the gaming machine F4 is equipped with the following:

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the number of executions of a judgment performance is increased by the judgment performance increasing means, the performance number information is decreased by one at the end of the judgment performance by the increase-time-decrement means provided in the related appearance means. As a result, when the number of judgment effects is increased, the number of effects information is increased by one as the number of judgment effects increases, and the number of effects information is decreased by one as the judgment effect ends. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if the amount of information is being increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F4,
A first flow path (for example, a sorting ball entry port 72) for causing the game balls fired by the firing means to flow down to the first ball entry means,
The holding means is
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that it is provided in the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball fired by the firing means flows down to the first ball entering means through the first flow path. A retention means is provided in the first flow path. As a result, it becomes possible to hold the game balls that can enter the first ball entering means in the holding means, and when the game balls can flow into the first ball entering means, the game balls are first held in the holding means. It can be put on hold. Therefore, when performing a performance related to the dynamic display based on the entry of the game balls held in the holding means, it is possible to maintain the state in which the game balls are held in the holding means. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of performances by using the dynamic display and the performance using the game balls held in the holding means, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. This has the effect of being able to achieve this goal.

In gaming machine F5,
The holding means is
A storage section that can store game balls (for example, a reserved ball holding section 73b);
a guide part (for example, holding device opening/closing plate 73a) that guides the game balls flowing down the first channel to the storage part when no game balls are stored in the storage part;
The guide section is
A game machine F6 characterized in that, when game balls are stored in the storage section, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are caused to flow down to the first ball entry means side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage section provided in the holding means is configured to be able to store game balls, and when no game balls are stored in the storage section, the guide section also provided in the holding means allows the first channel to be opened. The game balls flowing down are guided to the storage section. Then, when the game balls are stored in the storage part, the game balls flowing down the first channel are caused to flow down to the first ball entry means side by the guide part. As a result, when there are no game balls stored in the storage section, it becomes possible to hold the game balls that can enter the first ball entry means in the holding means, and on the other hand, when there are no game balls stored in the storage section. If so, game balls that can enter the first ball entering means can be caused to flow down toward the first ball entering means. Therefore, when the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, the game ball can be first held in the holding means. Therefore, when performing a performance related to dynamic display based on the entry of game balls held in the holding means, it is possible to ensure that the game balls are held in the holding means. As a result, it is possible to enrich the variation of performances by using the dynamic display and the performance using the game balls held in the holding means, thereby improving the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. This has the effect of making it possible to achieve the following.

In gaming machine F6,
The first flow path is
It has a passage wall (for example, a side wall on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the distribution ball entrance 72) through which the game balls flow down,
The guide section is
A game machine F7 characterized in that, when a game ball is guided to the storage section, a tip end portion of the guide section has a shape that makes surface contact with the passage wall.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball is flown down by the passage wall of the first passage. When the guide part is in a state of guiding game balls to the storage part, the tip part of the guide part is configured to have a surface contact with the passage wall. That is, since the tip of the guide portion comes into surface contact with the passage wall, the game ball will collide with a portion other than the top surface of the tip. Therefore, by making it difficult for the game balls that have flowed into the first channel to collide with the upper surface of the tip portion of the guide, it is possible to prevent the guide from being damaged.

In any of gaming machines F5 to F7,
The first ball entry means includes:
A predetermined first ball entry means (for example, the left special drawing prize opening 77a),
A plurality of specific first ball entry means (for example, right special figure winning hole 78a) different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided,
The first flow path is
comprising a sorting means (for example, a sorting device 76) that alternately distributes the game balls flowing down the first flow path to the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means;
The second ball entering means includes:
A gaming machine F8, characterized in that it is arranged in an area between the predetermined first ball entering means and the specific first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F5 to F7, the following effects are achieved. That is, a plurality of predetermined first ball entering means and specific second ball entering means different from the predetermined first ball entering means are provided as the first ball entering means, and a plurality of specific second ball entering means are provided in the first flow path. By the means, the game balls flowing down the first channel are alternately distributed to the predetermined first ball entry means or the specific first ball entry means. The second ball entering means is arranged in a region between the predetermined first ball entering means and the specific second ball entering means. As a result, by making it difficult to recognize whether the game ball flowing down the first flow path has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entry means. Even when the performance number information is displayed based on this, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance number information was displayed as a result of the ball entering the first ball entry means. As a result, even if the performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entry means and the judgment performance is performed based on the performance number information, it is possible to determine whether the actual judgment performance is executed multiple times. It is possible to create a sense of realism. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a surprising performance and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine F8,
The holding means is
A gaming machine F9 is arranged upstream of the allocating means in the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the holding means is arranged upstream of the distributing means in the gaming area. Thereby, it becomes possible to hold game balls that can enter the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means by the holding means before being sorted by the sorting means. Therefore, when a game ball can enter either the predetermined first ball entering means or the specific first ball entering means, in either case, the game ball can be first held in the holding means. Therefore, when performing a performance related to dynamic display based on the entry of game balls held in the holding means, it is possible to maintain the state in which the game balls are held in the holding means. As a result, it is possible to enrich the variation of performances by using the dynamic display and the performance using the game balls held in the holding means, thereby improving the interest of the game using the game balls held in the holding means. This has the effect of making it possible to achieve

In any of gaming machines F0 to F4,
comprising a second flow path (for example, an out port 66) through which the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means flows;
The holding means is
A gaming machine F10 characterized in that it is provided in the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game balls that have entered the first ball entering means are flown down by the second flow path, and the holding means is provided in the second flow path. If the game balls that can be entered into the first ball entry means are held back, the player may feel a sense of loss due to not being able to obtain lottery information that may reveal specific identification information, and may feel a sense of loss when playing the game. There is a risk that you may become aroused. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F10, game balls that have entered the first ball entry means and are not used in subsequent games can be held by the holding means. Therefore, instead of game balls that can enter the first ball entry means etc. and are used for games, game balls that are not used for games are allowed to enter the second ball entry means, and this is used for dynamic display and holding means. By using the reserved game balls, it is possible to have a rich variety of performances, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game using the game balls reserved in the retaining means without discouraging the players. , there is an effect.

<G group: Execute a performance that spans multiple variable performances, change the performance time depending on the winning timing>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of the ball entering the ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the interest of the game, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a jackpot appears, the symbols are changed again in the dynamic display and the dynamic display is executed again. There are devices that perform a pseudo effect as if a specific display result has been displayed (so-called "pseudo-connection" effect), and then perform an effect to determine whether or not a specific display result will appear (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the contents of the dynamic display are monotonous, and it is not possible to create surprises in the presentation contents. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of games from conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of group G were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Standard selection means for selecting a reference time for dynamic display of identification information (for example, fluctuating performance of the third symbol) performed on the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means; (for example, fluctuation type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113) that executes the dynamic display on the display means based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a specific effect execution means (e.g., slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (e.g., "Gase pseudo series 2" of "slump effect") performed over a portion of each of the plurality of dynamic displays; ,
When new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition unit during execution of the specific performance by the specific performance execution unit, the timing determination unit (for example, the fluctuation setting process (S1213) determines the acquisition timing of the lottery information ) S1419) and
A special performance setting means (for example, a special performance setting means for setting a performance time of a predetermined special performance (for example, "Gase pseudo series 3" or "development possibility performance") to be performed after the specific performance based on the determination result of the timing determination means. , S1420 to S1422 of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)).

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the reference selection means selects a reference time for the dynamic display of the identification information to be performed on the display means, and the dynamic display is performed based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means. The execution means executes dynamic display on the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect spanning at least a portion of each of the plurality of dynamic displays, and while the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect, the acquiring means acquires new lottery information. When the lottery information is acquired, the timing determining means determines the acquisition timing of the lottery information. Then, based on the determination result of the timing determining means, the special performance setting means sets the performance time of a predetermined special performance to be performed after the specific performance. As a result, by providing variations in the performance time of subsequent special performances depending on the acquisition timing of lottery information during the execution of a specific performance that is being performed across at least a portion of each of a plurality of dynamic displays, the production This has the effect of increasing the variety of games and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G0,
The specific performance execution means is
Additional time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined additional time (for example, extension time) when executing the specific performance;
A total time executing means (for example, a slump effect timer 223g) executes the specific effect during the total time of the additional time selected by the additional time selecting means and the reference time selected by the reference time selecting means. ) and,
The timing determining means includes:
A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the specific performance based on the addition time selected by the addition time selection means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when executing a specific effect, a predetermined additional time is selected by the additional time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, the specific performance is executed by the total time execution means similarly provided in the specific performance execution means during the total time of the addition time selected by the addition time selection means and the reference time selected by the reference time selection means. be done. Here, the timing determining means determines whether or not it is the timing to execute a specific effect based on the additional time selected by the additional time selecting means. In other words, while the part of the specific performance that is being executed based on the standard time and the additional time is being executed based on the additional time, depending on whether or not lottery information has been acquired, the subsequent special The performance time of the performance is set. Therefore, it is possible to set the performance time of a special performance while taking the additional time into consideration, so even if a specific performance is executed based on the additional time, the content of the performance between the specific performance and the special performance can be matched. This has the effect that it is possible to maintain the character and provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

In gaming machine G1,
The specific performance execution means is
comprising an elapsed time counting means (for example, S1421 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for counting the elapsed time of the specific performance based on the added time,
The special effect setting means includes:
When the timing determining means determines that the specific performance based on the added time is being executed, the reference time based on the lottery information and the specific performance counted by the elapsed time counting means are calculated. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it includes an elapsed time setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the variable setting process (S1213)) that sets the special effect based on the elapsed time.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the elapsed time counting means provided in the specific effect execution means counts the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the added time. Then, when the elapsed time setting means provided in the special effect setting means determines that the specific effect is being executed based on the additional time by the timing determining means, the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the elapsed time are determined. The special performance is set based on the elapsed time of the specific performance counted by the time counting means. That is, the performance time of the special performance changes based on the elapsed time of the specific performance. As a result, by providing variations in the performance time of subsequent special performances depending on the acquisition timing of lottery information during the execution of a specific performance that is being performed across at least a portion of each of a plurality of dynamic displays, the production This has the effect of increasing the variety of games and increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The special effect setting means includes:
If the timing determining means determines that the specific performance is not being executed based on the timing at which the new lottery information is acquired by the acquiring means and the additional time, the additional time that has already been acquired is subtracted. Addition/subtraction setting means (for example, S1420 of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) that sets the special effect based on the reference time based on the earlier lottery information and the reference time based on the later lottery information ), a gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the addition/subtraction setting means provided in the special performance setting means determines that the timing at which the new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means is not during the execution of the specific performance based on the additional time. In this case, the special effect is set based on the reference time based on the previous lottery information and the reference time based on the subsequent lottery information after subtracting the acquired additional time. In other words, if a specific performance based on the added time is not executed, there will be no discrepancy between the performance content and the performance time even if the additional time is subtracted for subsequent special performances, and the management of the performance time will be easy. Become. As a result, while ensuring consistency in performance and facilitating the management of performance settings, it is possible to adjust the timing of acquisition of lottery information during the execution of a specific performance that is being performed across at least a portion of each of multiple dynamic displays. By providing variations in the performance time of subsequent special performances, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G3,
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a performance for determining whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, a performance element of "low-speed fluctuation", a "pseudo-connection" performance, a "false pseudo-connection" performance, or a performance element of "normal reach") etc., when all the symbols are stopped).
The specific effect execution means and the special effect setting means,
A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the determination performance is executed in the specific performance and the special performance.

According to gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination performance as to whether or not specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the specific performance executing means and the special performance setting means execute the determination performance in the specific performance and the special performance. As a result, the determination performance is executed also in the specific performance and the special performance, which has the effect of enriching the variation of the performance and improving the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4,
an execution determination unit (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution unit;
The specific performance execution means is
When the acquisition means acquires the lottery information and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the reference time selected by the reference selection means and the additional time The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed until the total time obtained by adding up the additional time selected by the selection means has elapsed.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the execution determining means is configured to be able to determine whether or not dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display executing means. Then, when the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means by the specific performance execution means and the execution determination means determines that the dynamic display is not being executed, the reference time selected by the reference selection means and the addition The specific performance is executed until the total time including the additional time selected by the time selection means has elapsed. As a result, even after the selected reference time for dynamic display has elapsed, the specific effect can be executed until the additional time has elapsed, and by increasing the execution time of the effect on the display means, the effect on the display means can be This has the effect of reducing the number of situations in which the game is not played and increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G5,
The specific performance execution means is
When the determination means determines that the specific identification information is not displayed, the addition time selection means selects the addition time, and the loss execution means (for example, A gaming machine G6 characterized in that it includes a variation setting process (S1405) of a variation setting process (S1213).

According to gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the specific identification information will not appear, the loss execution means provided in the specific performance execution means selects the addition time using the addition time selection means, and based on the addition time. A specific performance is executed. As a result, even if no gaming value is given due to the specific identification information not appearing in the dynamic display, the specific effect is performed on the display means for a longer time than the acquired reference time, and the dynamic effect is displayed on the display means. By reducing the number of situations in which this is not done, it is possible to prevent players from becoming disinterested.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G6,
The additional time selection means includes:
A gaming machine G7 characterized in that it is provided with an addition non-obtaining means (for example, S1405: Yes of the fluctuation setting process (S1213)) that makes the addition time non-obtainable when the specific identification information appears. .

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the addition non-obtainment means provided in the addition time selection means is configured such that the addition time is not obtained when the specific identification information appears. When specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, immediately after the dynamic display ends, a special gaming state (for example, jackpot) in which a predetermined gaming value is given is entered, and notifications are made according to the special gaming state. It must be made. Therefore, even in a dynamic display in which specific identification information appears, if an additional time is obtained and a specific effect is executed based on the additional time, the specific effect will be interrupted midway with the start of the special gaming state. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the content of the performance. Therefore, according to the gaming machine G7, in the case of dynamic display in which specific identification information appears, the additional time is configured not to be acquired. With this configuration, it is possible to synchronize the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the start timing of the special gaming state based on the specific identification information, so there is no inconsistency in the performance and the player does not feel strange. This has the effect of being able to provide a performance that doesn't make you feel .

In gaming machine G7,
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection means (e.g., , a stop pattern selection counter C3),
The addition unobtained means is
A gaming machine G8, characterized in that when the previous stage selection means causes the previous stage identification information to appear in the dynamic display, the additional time is not acquired.

According to gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine G7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. The addition unobtained means is configured such that when the previous stage selection means causes the previous stage identification information to appear in the dynamic display, the addition time is set to be unobtained. In a dynamic display that includes pre-stage identification information, it is common that a judgment performance is performed to determine whether or not specific identification information appears, so a relatively long dynamic display is required to execute the judgment performance. An execution time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, in such a case, there is little need to perform a specific performance that is performed for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time. Therefore, the gaming machine G8 is configured such that when the execution time of the dynamic display that makes the previous stage identification information appear is selected, the additional time is not acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the presentation time on the display means from becoming longer than necessary and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Group H: Configuration of holding device>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of the ball entering the ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of this type, there is a pachinko machine that is provided with a holding means for holding balls shot into a gaming area. In this pachinko machine, balls are held in the holding means, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when a player presses a release button), the balls held in the holding means are released, and the balls are sent downstream. The ball is configured to enter a provided ball entrance, and is configured to provide a predetermined gaming value to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235)).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the aim is to improve interest by directly imparting gaming value by allowing the game balls held in the holding means to enter the winning slot based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the gaming machine does not provide the gaming value. Therefore, a large number of game balls must be held, and as a result, the installation area of the holding means in the game area becomes large, reducing the degree of freedom in designing the board surface of the game area. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in design compared to conventional gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group H have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and can improve the degree of freedom in designing gaming machines while improving the interest of games by using the balls held in the holding means. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

A firing means (for example, ball firing unit 112a) that fires the game ball toward the game area;
A first ball entry means into which the game ball fired by the firing means can enter (for example, the left side special figure winning hole 77a or the right side special figure winning hole 78a);
Acquisition means (for example, special drawing prize opening switch) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
A selection means (e.g., a variable display) for selecting a dynamic display of identification information (e.g., a fluctuating effect of the third symbol) to be performed on the display means (e.g., the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. type counter CS1),
Dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means on the display means,
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information (for example, "jackpot display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a second ball entry means (for example, a dummy prize opening 75) that provides a predetermined gaming value when the game ball launched by the launch means enters the ball, and is different from the first ball entry means;
Holding means (for example, holding device 73) capable of holding game balls flowing down a first channel provided above the gaming area of the second ball entering means;
Equipped with
The retention means is
a storage section (for example, a reserved ball holding section 73b) capable of storing one game ball;
A guide unit that is connected to the storage unit and guides the game balls flowing down the first channel toward the storage unit when the game balls are not stored in the storage unit (for example, a holding device opening/closing unit). Plate 73a) and
a changing means (for example, a rotating shaft portion 73c) for changing the guiding portion from the guiding state to a non-guiding state in which the game balls are not guided to the storing portion when game balls are stored in the storing portion;
When game balls are stored in the storage part, a movable means (for example, holding part lock part 73e1) that can change between a storage state in which game balls are stored in the storage part and a release state in which the storage state is released. and,
a drive means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) that drives the movable means between the storage state and the release state;
a release means (for example, a holding device drive flag 203f) that causes the drive means to change the movable means from the storage state to the release state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied;
a second channel (for example, the board surface return port 74) through which the game balls released from the storage state by the release means flow down toward the second ball entry means;
When the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entering means, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, a predetermined effect of a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display) executes a predetermined effect related to the dynamic display. display) and
It is characterized by comprising a re-guiding means (for example, an opening/closing plate extrusion part 73e2) that changes the guiding means to the guiding state when the movable means is changed from the released state to the storing state. Game machine H0.

According to the game machine H0, the game ball is fired toward the game area by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. Then, lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects a dynamic display of the identification information to be performed on the display means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is displayed by the dynamic display execution means. carried out in the means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, it is configured such that a predetermined game value is given when a game ball fired by the firing means enters a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means A game ball flowing down a first channel provided above the game area is configured to be able to be held by a holding means. In addition, one game ball is configured to be able to be stored in the storage section provided in the storage means, and is connected to the storage section, and in the guiding state in which no game balls are stored in the storage section, the guide section , the game ball flowing down the first channel is guided to the storage section side. When game balls are stored in the storage section, the movable means is configured to be able to change between a storage state in which game balls are stored in the storage section and a release state in which the storage state is released. Further, when the movable means is driven between the storage state and the release state by the drive means, and a predetermined first condition is satisfied, the release means causes the drive means to change the movable means from the storage state to the release state. The game balls released from the stored state by the releasing means are flown down toward the second ball entering means through the second flow path. When the game ball that has flown down the second channel enters the second ball entering means, the predetermined effect execution means executes a predetermined effect regarding the dynamic display. Furthermore, when the movable means is changed from the released state to the storage state by the re-guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the guiding state. That is, when one game ball stored in the holding means enters the second ball entering means, a predetermined game value is given, a predetermined performance is executed in the dynamic display, and furthermore, the holding means After the game balls stored in the storage part are released, when the game balls are put into a state where the game balls can be stored again, the game balls can be guided to the storage part. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of performances by efficiently using the game balls stored in the holding means, and it is possible to improve the interest of games using the game balls stored in the holding means. , there is an effect. In addition, since it is possible to give players interest even if the holding means does not store a large amount of game balls and provide a large amount of gaming value, it is possible to increase interest by using the holding means, and to install the holding means. This has the effect that the area can be made smaller and the degree of freedom in board design in the game area can be increased.

<Group I: Main pending display and decorative pending display>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entering means while a dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of symbols etc. is being performed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. In some cases, the dynamic display of the ball entering the ball is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the dynamic display being executed ends, execution of the suspended dynamic display that has not yet been executed is started.

In this dynamic display, as part of the entertainment of the game, there are some that execute various effects when a special result other than a specific display result that can generate a jackpot appears (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-134027)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the inventions is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, left side special figure winning hole 77a or right side special figure winning hole 78a) that acquires lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition;
a determination unit (for example, S401 of the fluctuation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit;
Based on the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display of the identification information (for example, a fluctuating effect of the third symbol) is executed in the first display means (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81). dynamic display execution means (for example, audio lamp control device 113),
In a gaming machine that provides a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
Storage means (for example, reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
a second display means (e.g., cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying basic performance number information (e.g., main hold display) corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means;
Decoration (or auxiliary display; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the basic performance number information on the second display means (or auxiliary display; hereinafter the same shall apply) for displaying performance number information (for example, dummy pending display); Display means (for example, a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display);
The dynamic display execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a judgment performance for determining whether the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, a "loss display", a false chance pattern, etc.) appears. (For example, when all symbols such as a "low speed fluctuation" performance element, a "pseudo series" production, a "false pseudo series" production, or a "normal reach" production element, etc., are stopped);
A game characterized by comprising a performance execution means (for example, a slump performance storage area 223h and a pending information storage area 223i) that executes the judgment performance corresponding to the basic performance number information and the decorative performance number information. Machine I0.

According to the gaming machine I0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the basic performance number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is displayed on the second display means. Displayed by Then, the decoration display means displays the decoration performance number information that decorates the basic performance number information on the second display means. Here, the determination performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means determines whether specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. A judgment performance is executed. Further, the performance execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination performance corresponding to the basic performance number information and the decoration performance number information. As a result, the basic performance number information and the decorative performance number information are displayed or erased in conjunction with the determined performance in which specific identification information or non-specific identification information appears, and the basic performance number information and decorative performance number information correspond to each other. By executing the judgment performance, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that does not make him feel uncomfortable, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0,
The performance execution means is
When displaying the number information of decorative effects by the decoration display means, an additional effect selection means (for example, a variable setting) for selecting an additional effect to be additionally executed (for example, "Gase pseudo series 2" in a "slump effect") S1413) of processing (S1213),
The decorative display means
Before executing the additional performance selected by the additional performance selection means, a pre-execution display means for displaying the number information of decorative performances (for example, before executing "Gase Pseudo-Run 2", insert a ball into the dummy prize opening 75) A gaming machine I1 is characterized in that it is equipped with the following: (when a ball enters a ball, a pending symbol that is a dummy pending display is displayed).

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the additional performance selection means provided in the performance execution means selects the additional performance to be additionally executed when the decoration display means displays the information on the number of decoration performances. Then, the pre-execution display means provided in the decoration display means displays the number information of the decoration performance before executing the additional performance selected by the additional performance selection means. With this, it is possible to display the number information of decorative effects before the additional effects are executed, so for example, even if neither the number of decorative effects nor the number of basic effects are displayed, an additional effect can be added. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game while providing a consistent performance.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
A first ball entry means (for example, a left side special figure winning hole 77a or a right side special figure winning hole 78a) into which the game ball fired by the shooting means can enter,
The acquisition means is
acquiring the lottery information due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means;
The pseudo display means is
A game machine I2 characterized in that the decorative performance number information is displayed due to the entry of a game ball into a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball is ejected by the ejecting means, and the ball ejected by the ejecting means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entering means. Then, the acquisition means acquires lottery information due to the entry of the ball into the first ball entry means. Here, the decorative presentation number information is displayed by the decorative display means due to the ball entering the game ball into the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. Thereby, it is possible to display the number information of the decorative performance related to the judgment performance performed on the first display means due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, It is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance number information was displayed by entering the first ball into the first ball entering means. As a result, even when displaying the number of decorative effects information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and performing the effect based on the information on the number of decorative effects, the player is provided with an effect that does not feel strange, This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine I2,
The second ball entering means includes:
A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is arranged near the first ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second ball entering means is arranged near the first ball entering means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether a game ball that has flown down near the first ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, thereby preventing the game ball from entering the second ball entry means. Even when the decorative performance number information is displayed based on the ball entering, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the performance number information was displayed due to the ball entering the first ball entering means. As a result, even if the information on the number of decorative effects is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and a pseudo effect is performed based on the information on the number of decorative effects, the effect will not feel strange to the player. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Note that "near the first ball entry means" refers to, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball entry means, or an area between each of the first ball entry means when there is a plurality of first ball entry means. , or a position where both the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can be visually recognized at the same time.

In gaming machine I2 or I3,
Holding means (for example, holding device 73) that can change between a holding state in which the game balls fired by the firing means are held and a release state in which the held game balls are released based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition; Equipped with
The second ball entering means includes:
A game machine I4 characterized in that the game ball released from the holding means is placed at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the holding means is configured to be changeable between a holding state in which the game balls fired by the firing means are held and a release state in which the held game balls are released based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, and the holding means The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from the game ball can enter. Thereby, it becomes possible to cause the game ball held by the holding means to enter the second ball entering means based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, and to display the decorative performance number information. As a result, the reserved game balls can be immediately entered into the second ball entering means, and the number information of decorative effects is displayed based on the ball entering the second ball entering means. Even when the performance is performed based on the above, there is an effect that the performance can be provided to the player without feeling strange and the interest of the game can be improved.

In gaming machine I4,
The performance execution means is
When the additional performance is selected by the additional performance selection means, a counting means (for example, a reservation device drive timer 203g) counts whether or not it is the timing to display the decoration performance number information corresponding to the additional performance. , comprising:
The holding means is
A releasing means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) that releases the game balls held by the holding means when it is time to display the decorative presentation number information based on the counting result by the counting means. A game machine I5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when an additional performance is selected by the additional performance selection means, the counting means provided in the performance execution means counts whether or not it is the timing to display the number of decorative performances corresponding to the additional performance. . Then, by the releasing means provided in the holding means, the game balls held by the holding means are released when the timing for displaying the decoration performance number information is reached based on the counting result by the counting means. Thereby, it is possible to associate the timing of entering the game ball into the second ball entering means with the timing of displaying the number information of the decorative presentation corresponding to the additional presentation. As a result, even when displaying the number of decorative effects information based on the ball entering the second ball entering means and performing the effect based on the information on the number of decorative effects, the player is provided with an effect that does not feel strange, This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine I5,
The performance execution means is
Holding determining means (for example, holding ball detection switch 73g) for determining whether or not game balls are held in the holding means;
When it is determined by the counting result by the counting means that it is time to display the decorative presentation number information and the holding determining means determines that no game balls are held in the holding means, the additional presentation is performed. A gaming machine I6 comprising a performance changing means (for example, a performance conversion flag 223k) for changing the basic performance number information or the decorative performance number information to a non-digestible performance.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the suspension determination means provided in the performance execution means determines whether or not the game balls are reserved in the suspension means. Then, when it is time to display the decorative performance number information based on the counting result by the counting means, the performance changing means also provided in the performance execution means determines that the game balls are not held in the holding means by the holding determination means. When it is determined that this is the case, the additional performance is changed to a non-digested performance that does not consume the basic performance number information or the decorative performance number information. As a result, when the game ball to be entered into the second ball entering means is not held in the holding means, the information on the number of decorative effects is not displayed, and the number of effects executed on the first display means and the second It is possible to maintain consistency with the basic performance number information and the decorative performance number information displayed on the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In gaming machine I6,
a storage determining unit (for example, a pending display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether or not there is the dynamic display that displays the specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the storage unit;
Display changing means (for example, a pending change counter 223d) for changing the display mode of the basic performance number information and/or the decorative performance number information based on the determination result by the memory determination means,
The performance changing means is
When changing the additional performance to the non-digestible performance, change time changing means (for example, pending rank up command) changes the display mode of the basic performance number information and/or the decorative performance number information by the display changing means. A gaming machine I7 comprising:

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the memory discriminating means discriminates whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the memory means, and the display changing means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that appears specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the memory means, and the display changing means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display that shows specific identification information in the lottery information stored in the memory means, and the display changing means Accordingly, the display mode of the basic performance number information and/or the decorative performance number information is changed. Here, when the additional performance is changed to a non-digestible performance by the change time change means provided in the performance change means, the display mode of the basic performance number information and/or the decorative performance number information is changed by the display change means. . As a result, even if the additional performance is changed to a non-digestible performance due to no game balls being held in the holding means, the display mode of the basic performance number information and/or the decorative performance number information is changed and the player By amplifying the expectations for the specific identification information, the effect is that it is possible to enrich the variation of performances and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E9, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, H0, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Furthermore, for the configuration of the gaming machine H0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, I0 to I7 A configuration limited to the above may be applied.

In addition, for the configuration of the gaming machines I0 to I7, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0 A configuration limited to the above may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Characteristic game machine Z1. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2 featuring the following. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (big prize opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win balls, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes is awarded. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion of the following. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

It should be noted that "ball entering" into the "special figure winning holes 77a, 78a" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "predetermined starting conditions" in the claims, and "counters C1 to C3" described in the above embodiment correspond to "predetermined starting conditions" in the claims. , CS1 value" corresponds to the "lottery information" acquired by the "acquisition means" in the claims, and the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment is the "identification information" described in the claims. Correspondingly, the "fluctuation effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "jackpot display" described in the above embodiment falls in the claims. The "jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined gaming value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
66 Out port (part of second flow path)
72 Sorting ball entrance (part of the first channel)
73 Holding device (part of holding means)
73a Holding device opening/closing plate (part of the guide section)
73b Retention ball holding part (part of storage part)
73c Rotating shaft part (part of changing means)
73e1 Holding part lock part (part of movable means)
73e2 Opening/closing plate extrusion part (part of re-guiding means)
73f Holding device solenoid (part of release means, part of drive means)
73g Hold ball detection switch (part of hold determination means)
74 Panel surface return port (part of the second flow path)
75 Dummy prize opening (part of the second ball entry means, part of the second increase means)
76 Sorting device (part of the sorting means)
77a Left side special drawing prize opening (part of the acquisition means, part of the first increase means, part of the prescribed first ball entry means)
78a Right side special drawing prize opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increase means, part of specific first ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means, part of first display means)
110 Main control device (part of determination means, part of main control means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of dynamic display execution means, part of sub-control means)
203c Holding ball storage area (part of storage means)
203f Hold device drive flag (part of release means)
223d Pending change counter (part of memory discrimination means)
203e Main slump counter (part of execution determination means)
203g Holding device drive timer (part of counting means)
223c Dummy reserved balls counter (part of related appearance means)
223d Pending change counter (part of display changing means)
223f Sub-slump flag (part of execution determination means)
223g Slump effect timer (part of total time execution means)
223h Slump effect storage area (part of specific effect execution means, part of second half selection means, part of remaining selection means, part of total number of effects execution means, part of effect execution means)
223i Pending information storage area (part of total performance number execution means, part of performance execution means)
223k Production conversion flag (part of production change means)
C1 Jackpot random number counter (part of lottery information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of previous stage selection means)
CS1 Variation type counter (part of selection means, part of time selection means, part of reference selection means)
Db Cockpit display area (part of the second display means, part of the pseudo display means, part of the decorative display means)
Dm Main display area (part of the first display means)
S101 External output processing (part of notification means)
S401 (part of determination means)
S1117 Fluctuation effect processing (part of dynamic display execution means)
S1208 Hold display setting process (part of memory determination means)
S1213 (Part of pattern selection means)
S1401 (part of time acquisition means)
S1405 (Part of execution means in case of loss)
S1406 (Part of time selection means, part of extension time selection means, part of addition time selection means)
S1409 (Part of residual summation means)
S1411 (Part of elapsed time setting means)
S1413 (Part of total setting means, part of additional effect selection means, part of elapsed time setting means)
S1419 (Part of timing determination means)
S1420 (Part of special effect setting means, part of addition/subtraction setting means)
S1421 (Part of special effect setting means, part of elapsed time counting means)
S1422 (Part of special effect setting means)
S1708 (Part of production element selection means)
Z1 to Z3 Left symbol row, middle symbol row, right symbol row (part of individual area variation means)

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball;
a first ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
a second ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launch means is different from the first ball entry means;
acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information by at least entering a ball into the first ball entry means;
determination means capable of making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
Selection means for selecting a production pattern for dynamic display of identification information performed on the first display means based on the determination result by the determination means;
Dynamic display execution means capable of executing the dynamic display on the first display means based on the performance pattern selected by the selection means,
In a gaming machine that can provide a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means,
a storage means capable of storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
a second display means capable of displaying first performance number information corresponding to the number of said lottery information stored in said storage means;
a second performance number information display means capable of displaying second performance number information different from the first performance number information on the second display means when the ball enters the second ball entry means;
The dynamic display execution means includes:
By stopping all of the identification information that has changed with the start of the dynamic display in the first display means, the specific identification information appears, or unlike the specific identification information, the predetermined gaming value Execute a performance for determining whether non-specific identification information that cannot be given and whose appearance can change after appearance appears, a number of times corresponding to the total number of the first performance number information and the second performance number information. It is possible and
The gaming machine is
Execution time selection means capable of selecting an execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means;
After the execution time selected by the execution time selection means has elapsed, in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means, the appearance of the area in which the non-specific identification information is displayed is visible. and a changeable after-change means;
The post-lapse changing means is
configured to be able to execute a first aspect of changing the aspect of the non-specific identification information appearing on the first display means, and a second aspect that is different from the first aspect on the first display means,
The gaming machine is
a first changing means capable of changing the display mode of the first performance number information into at least two or more types of display modes;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a second changing means that can change the display mode of the second performance number information in accordance with the entry of a ball into the second ball entry means.

Images